AP English Literature and Composition · English

AP English Literature

A course in reading closely and arguing from the text. Nine units spiral through short fiction, poetry, and longer fiction or drama, teaching character, setting, structure, narration, figurative language, and literary argumentation on public-domain works you can read in full: every lesson ends with a paragraph you write yourself. Each unit closes with an exam-style multiple-choice review built on a shared poem or passage, and the three essay sections let you write Q1, Q2, and Q3 against the College Board's six-point analytic rubric with a 6/6 response to compare against.

3H EXAM 55 MCQ 3 ESSAYS 51 LESSONS 90 REVIEW QUESTIONS 15 ESSAY PROMPTS GRADE: 11TH+

Course overview

What this course covers, and how the exam is built.

The exam runs three hours. Section I is one hour: 55 multiple-choice questions in five passage sets drawn from prose fiction, drama, and poetry, worth 45% of the score. Section II is two hours for three essays worth 55%: Q1 analyzes a poem printed on the exam, Q2 analyzes a prose fiction passage (which may be drama), and Q3 argues about a concept, issue, or literary element in a work you choose and know well. All three essays are scored on the same six-point analytic rubric (Row A Thesis (1 point), Row B Evidence and Commentary (4 points), Row C Sophistication (1 point)), so the writing skill you build in one section pays off in the other two. The College Board weights this exam by question type rather than by unit, so each of the nine units below carries roughly a ninth of it: the units spiral through short fiction, poetry, and longer fiction or drama three times over, and each pass returns to the same six big ideas (Character (CHR), Setting (SET), Structure (STR), Narration (NAR), Figurative Language (FIG), and Literary Argumentation (LAN)) at a harder level. Every unit ends with a ten-question review on one or two shared passages, and the three essay sections at the bottom of the outline hold five prompts each with a timed writing space that scores against the official rubric.

  • U1Unit 1: Short Fiction I≈11%
  • U2Unit 2: Poetry I≈11%
  • U3Unit 3: Longer Fiction or Drama I≈11%
  • U4Unit 4: Short Fiction II≈11%
  • U5Unit 5: Poetry II≈11%
  • U6Unit 6: Longer Fiction or Drama II≈11%
  • U7Unit 7: Short Fiction III≈11%
  • U8Unit 8: Poetry III≈11%
  • U9Unit 9: Longer Fiction or Drama III≈11%

All nine units are open, 51 lessons in all. Every lesson pairs a short explanation with worked examples and a problem to try yourself, the same problem types that show up on the exam. Each unit closes with a short video walk-through and a ten-problem practice set with hidden answers.

Free preview: open any 5 lessons, or watch one unit video, without an account. The counter on the left keeps track.

Lesson 1.1 · Unit 1 · Short Fiction I · CHR 1.A

What details reveal about a character

A story rarely tells you what a person is like. It shows a room, a gesture, a sentence spoken aloud, and leaves the judgment to you.

So argue from the detail, not the adjective. “Trapped” is your word; the dusty curtain a character leans against is the text's. An asserted trait earns nothing; a quoted detail starts an argument.

Key terms
  • Characterization (CHR 1.A): description, action, speech, and what other characters say. A narrator's label counts for less than any of them.
  • Trait versus detail (CHR 1.A): the trait is your word; the detail is the text's word that earns it. Reason from detail to trait, never the reverse.
  • Objects as evidence (CHR 1.A): what a person keeps, and how, is an action; a room holds a history its owner never states.
  • Commentary (LAN 7.A): the sentence explaining how a quoted detail supports your claim. Pointing is description; explaining function is analysis.
Text

About the text: James Joyce, “Eveline,” from Dubliners, first published 1914. The opening paragraph and the paragraph beginning “Home!”; the ellipsis marks the cut.

She sat at the window watching the evening invade the avenue. Her head was leaned against the window curtains and in her nostrils was the odour of dusty cretonne. She was tired.

…

Home! She looked round the room, reviewing all its familiar objects which she had dusted once a week for so many years, wondering where on earth all the dust came from. Perhaps she would never see again those familiar objects from which she had never dreamed of being divided. And yet during all those years she had never found out the name of the priest whose yellowing photograph hung on the wall above the broken harmonium beside the coloured print of the promises made to Blessed Margaret Mary Alacoque. He had been a school friend of her father.

Model analysis

Eveline's inability to leave is already built into the way she holds her own house. Joyce gives her “familiar objects which she had dusted once a week for so many years”, a clause that counts her life in repetitions rather than events, and then the “yellowing photograph” of a priest whose name she never learned. Both make her the keeper of things she neither owns nor understands: the dusting is care without choice, the unnamed priest loyalty without knowledge. Another reader could take the same sentences as tenderness toward home; that is why this is an interpretation to argue, not a meaning to announce.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “Joyce uses dust imagery” names a technique; “the dust counts her life in repetitions” explains one.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this passage reveals about Eveline's relationship to her home. Make a claim a reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each supports it.

Show a model response

Joyce presents Eveline's attachment to home as an unexamined habit rather than a chosen love. She sits “watching the evening invade the avenue,” a verb that turns even nightfall into something done to her while she stays still. Taking stock of the room, she finds objects “she had dusted once a week”: time measured in chores she never chose. A woman who has kept a house for years without learning the name of the priest on its wall is attached to the routine, not to its meaning.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation (Row A); the quoted phrases with the sentences explaining their wording are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 1.2 · Unit 1 · Short Fiction I · SET 2.A, 2.B

Setting and what it does

Students lose the setting point by stopping at the weather. “The setting is gloomy” is a paraphrase; “the setting functions to…” is the start of an argument.

Setting is everything the characters move through (place, hour, weather, the social world), and every detail of it was chosen. Ask what each one makes possible, impossible, or inevitable.

Key terms
  • Setting (SET 2.A): place, time, weather, and social world; the conditions a character lives under, not a backdrop behind them.
  • Atmosphere (SET 2.A): the feeling those details produce. Naming it is the first step of analysis, never the last.
  • Function of setting (SET 2.B): what the place does to the story: shapes a character, limits a choice, embodies a conflict, prepares an ending.
  • Setting given a body (SET 2.B), when a place is described with human parts or moods, it stops holding the action and starts acting.
Text

About the text: Edgar Allan Poe, “The Fall of the House of Usher,” first published 1839. From the story's opening paragraph; the ellipses mark internal cuts.

During the whole of a dull, dark, and soundless day in the autumn of the year, when the clouds hung oppressively low in the heavens, I had been passing alone, on horseback, through a singularly dreary tract of country; and at length found myself, as the shades of the evening drew on, within view of the melancholy House of Usher. I know not how it was — but, with the first glimpse of the building, a sense of insufferable gloom pervaded my spirit. … There was an iciness, a sinking, a sickening of the heart — an unredeemed dreariness of thought which no goading of the imagination could torture into aught of the sublime. … acting upon this idea, I reined my horse to the precipitous brink of a black and lurid tarn that lay in unruffled lustre by the dwelling, and gazed down — but with a shudder even more thrilling than before — upon the remodelled and inverted images of the gray sedge, and the ghastly tree-stems, and the vacant and eye-like windows.

Model analysis

Poe's opening does not decorate the story with a mood; it builds a place that performs the narrator's dread for him. The house returns his look through “the vacant and eye-like windows”, the anatomy of a face with the sight removed, so that being watched and being unseen arrive in the same phrase. When he tries to correct the impression by studying the “black and lurid tarn,” he finds only “the remodelled and inverted images” of what he has already seen. The second look was supposed to test the first; instead it repeats it upside down. The setting functions to shut off escape by re-examination: the trap the narrator spends the story inside.

Exam tip: the point is in the sentence after the adjective. “The mood is gloomy” paraphrases; “the gloom comes from a house given a face and no sight” explains.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this setting functions to do, not what mood it creates. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each produces the effect you name.

Show a model response

Poe uses the setting to strip his narrator of his senses before the story proper begins. The day is “dull, dark, and soundless,” three adjectives that each take something away (color, light, sound), so he arrives already short of what he would need to judge the house fairly. Then the building looks back at him with “vacant and eye-like windows,” which face him without seeing him. The setting functions to put him in a world that watches and withholds at once: the relation he will have with Roderick Usher throughout.

Rubric: the opening sentence claims a function rather than a mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by the sentence explaining its effect (Row B).

Lesson 1.3 · Unit 1 · Short Fiction I · STR 3.A, 3.B

Plot: how events are ordered

Plot is not the list of events. Plot is the order a writer puts them in, and the order is where the meaning lives.

Two questions do the work: what happened, and when did the reader find out? Where the sequences differ, something was withheld, and a withholding is arguable.

Key terms
  • Order of telling (STR 3.A): the sequence in which a text releases events, which need not match the order they happened in.
  • Exposition (STR 3.A): a function, not a location: whatever a reader must know before the conflict can mean anything.
  • Climax (STR 3.B): the moment tension turns into change. Find it by what changes, not by what is loudest.
  • Withheld information (STR 3.B): a delay the writer chooses. Ask what the reader assumes during the gap, and what the gap costs a character.
  • Pacing (STR 3.B): how much text an event is given. A paragraph spent on a chair outweighs a sentence spent on a death.
Text

About the text: Kate Chopin, “The Story of an Hour,” first published 1894. The opening four paragraphs, complete and unbroken.

Knowing that Mrs. Mallard was afflicted with a heart trouble, great care was taken to break to her as gently as possible the news of her husband's death.

It was her sister Josephine who told her, in broken sentences; veiled hints that revealed in half concealing. Her husband's friend Richards was there, too, near her. It was he who had been in the newspaper office when intelligence of the railroad disaster was received, with Brently Mallard's name leading the list of “killed.” He had only taken the time to assure himself of its truth by a second telegram, and had hastened to forestall any less careful, less tender friend in bearing the sad message.

She did not hear the story as many women have heard the same, with a paralyzed inability to accept its significance. She wept at once, with sudden, wild abandonment, in her sister's arms. When the storm of grief had spent itself she went away to her room alone. She would have no one follow her.

There stood, facing the open window, a comfortable, roomy armchair. Into this she sank, pressed down by a physical exhaustion that haunted her body and seemed to reach into her soul.

Model analysis

Chopin orders the opening so that grief arrives as a public procedure and only then as a private fact. Two full paragraphs go to the machinery of delivery, “great care was taken to break to her,” Richards confirming the report “by a second telegram”, while Mrs. Mallard's own response is compressed into a single clause, “She wept at once.” The proportion is the argument: the early words go to other people deciding what she can bear. Only once she is alone does the pace slow enough for a chair and a window to get a paragraph of their own: Chopin's way of saying the real event has not begun.

Exam tip: a structure question wants an order and a consequence; what we learn, when we learn it, and what the timing does to us.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Chopin gains by telling how the news was delivered before how Mrs. Mallard received it. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

By putting the delivery before the reaction, Chopin makes the reader spend the opening with the people managing Mrs. Mallard rather than with Mrs. Mallard. The first paragraph is about how “great care was taken” to tell her; the second is about Richards verifying the death “by a second telegram.” Both are busy with other people's judgment of what she can survive. Her own grief then gets one clause before she goes upstairs, and the door closes behind her. The order makes her inner life look like something she has to leave the room to reach.

Rubric: the claim concerns sequence, not events (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what the ordering does to the reader (Row B).

Lesson 1.4 · Unit 1 · Short Fiction I · NAR 4.A, 4.B

The narrator and point of view

Someone is always telling the story, and that someone is part of it. A narrator is not a window; a narrator is a decision about what you are allowed to see.

Two questions start the analysis: who is speaking, and what does that position let them know? The answers set the limits of everything else you can argue.

Key terms
  • First person (NAR 4.A): a character tells the story, so every fact reaches you shaped by someone with a stake in it.
  • Third-person limited (NAR 4.A): an outside voice held to one character's knowledge. What it cannot see is part of the design.
  • Third-person omniscient (NAR 4.A): an outside voice free to enter any mind; whose mind, and when, is still a choice.
  • Limits of a perspective (NAR 4.B): every point of view supplies some information and forbids other information. Ask what this narrator cannot know.
Text

About the text: Edgar Allan Poe, “The Tell-Tale Heart,” first published 1843. The opening paragraph and the first sentences of the second.

True! — nervous — very, very dreadfully nervous I had been and am; but why will you say that I am mad? The disease had sharpened my senses — not destroyed — not dulled them. Above all was the sense of hearing acute. I heard all things in the heaven and in the earth. I heard many things in hell. How, then, am I mad? Hearken! and observe how healthily — how calmly I can tell you the whole story.

It is impossible to say how first the idea entered my brain; but once conceived, it haunted me day and night. Object there was none. Passion there was none. I loved the old man. He had never wronged me. He had never given me insult. For his gold I had no desire. I think it was his eye!

Model analysis

Poe uses first person to hand the reader a case and no way to check it. The narrator opens by demanding “why will you say that I am mad?”, answering a charge nobody on the page has brought, and then offers his own manner as proof: “observe how healthily — how calmly I can tell you the whole story.” The word calmly comes from a voice already broken into dashes, so the sentence undoes its own claim. Because everything arrives through him, there is no second account to test his against: the reader's doubt must be built from his own words. First person trades verification for intimacy, and the trade is the design.

Exam tip: name the point of view, then say what it prevents. “The story is told in first person” is a label, and labels earn nothing.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Poe gains by giving this story to the narrator rather than an outside observer. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

Poe's first-person narration turns the reader into the jury this narrator keeps addressing. He begins by asking “why will you say that I am mad?”, a question that answers an accusation no one has made, and then submits his delivery as evidence: “how calmly I can tell you the whole story.” Since everything reaches us through him, we cannot look past him for a second opinion, so our suspicion has to be built from the way he talks: the interruptions, the insistence, the hurry to be believed. An outside narrator could report that he was disturbed; this one makes us notice it ourselves.

Rubric: the claim names an effect of the narration (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary explaining how the wording produces it (Row B).

Lesson 1.5 · Unit 1 · Short Fiction I · FIG 5.A, 5.B

Literal and figurative: reading one detail two ways

A detail can carry meaning without being a symbol, and a symbol is not a code to crack. The dependable method has two steps, and the order matters.

First establish what the thing literally is and does. Only then argue what it does for the story. Skip step one and you are asserting a meaning the text cannot confirm.

Key terms
  • Literal meaning (FIG 5.A): what the detail actually is in the world of the story. Establish it before interpreting it.
  • Figurative function (FIG 5.B): what the detail does beyond itself: what it suggests, hides, or forces other characters to face.
  • Symbol (FIG 5.B): a detail whose figurative meaning the text keeps developing. Not every meaningful detail is one.
  • The two-step move (FIG 5.A, 5.B): say what it is, then what it does. Only the first step makes the second provable.
Text

About the text: Nathaniel Hawthorne, “The Minister's Black Veil,” first published 1836. The paragraph in which Mr. Hooper first appears before his congregation.

Mr. Hooper, a gentlemanly person, of about thirty, though still a bachelor, was dressed with due clerical neatness, as if a careful wife had starched his band, and brushed the weekly dust from his Sunday's garb. There was but one thing remarkable in his appearance. Swathed about his forehead, and hanging down over his face, so low as to be shaken by his breath, Mr. Hooper had on a black veil. On a nearer view it seemed to consist of two folds of crape, which entirely concealed his features, except the mouth and chin, but probably did not intercept his sight, further than to give a darkened aspect to all living and inanimate things. With this gloomy shade before him, good Mr. Hooper walked onward, at a slow and quiet pace, stooping somewhat, and looking on the ground, as is customary with abstracted men, yet nodding kindly to those of his parishioners who still waited on the meeting-house steps.

Model analysis

Before anyone assigns the veil a meaning, Hawthorne has built one into its geometry: the cloth works in one direction only. It “entirely concealed his features, except the mouth and chin,” taking from the congregation exactly the part of a man they use to judge him, while it “did not intercept his sight, further than to give a darkened aspect to all living and inanimate things.” They lose their reading of him; he keeps his of them, only darker. The veil therefore functions to reverse who is exposed in a church. A reader could argue it signals grief rather than sin, and the paragraph allows that, but no reading survives that forgets the mouth and chin left uncovered.

Exam tip: establish the literal first. A paragraph that opens “the veil symbolizes secret sin” has skipped the evidence that would make the symbol arguable.

Write it

Write one paragraph performing the two-step move on the veil: what it literally is and does, then one thing it functions to make visible. Quote two short phrases.

Show a model response

Literally the veil is “two folds of crape” hanging low enough to be moved by Hooper's breath: cloth, not mystery. What matters is that it works one way. It “entirely concealed his features, except the mouth and chin,” so the parish loses the face it has always used to measure its minister, while Hooper keeps his own sight and merely sees everything darker. The veil functions to reverse the usual arrangement of a church: the man at the front, normally the most visible person there, becomes the only one who cannot be read, and his parishioners are unsettled before he explains a thing.

Rubric: the paragraph claims a function, not a meaning (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on how the wording produces it (Row B).

Lesson 1.6 · Unit 1 · Short Fiction I · LAN 7.A

The basics of literary argument: claim, evidence, commentary

Everything in this unit converges here. An analytic paragraph has three parts, and a reader can tell within two sentences whether you know which part you are in.

A claim is an interpretation someone could argue with. Evidence is the text's own words, kept short. Commentary explains how those words support the claim, and it is the part the rubric actually pays for.

Key terms
  • Defensible claim (LAN 7.A): an interpretation a reasonable reader could dispute. A summary is not a claim, and neither is an observation.
  • Evidence (LAN 7.A): the text's own words, quoted in fragments and fitted inside the grammar of your own sentence.
  • Commentary (LAN 7.A): the sentence after the quotation, explaining how its wording supports the claim rather than restating it.
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.A): the order of your claims, each one made possible by the one before it.
Text

About the text: James Joyce, “Araby,” from Dubliners, first published 1914. The closing two paragraphs of the story.

I lingered before her stall, though I knew my stay was useless, to make my interest in her wares seem the more real. Then I turned away slowly and walked down the middle of the bazaar. I allowed the two pennies to fall against the sixpence in my pocket. I heard a voice call from one end of the gallery that the light was out. The upper part of the hall was now completely dark.

Gazing up into the darkness I saw myself as a creature driven and derided by vanity; and my eyes burned with anguish and anger.

Model analysis

Joyce ends “Araby” by making humiliation a trick of lighting, not an event. Nothing is done to the boy: a voice calls from the far end of the gallery “that the light was out,” a routine announcement of closing time that he takes as a sentence on him. Then he is “gazing up into the darkness” when he sees himself: the verb that brought him to the bazaar turns around and takes him as its object. The cruelty in “derided” has no source but him. That is why the last clause can hold “anguish and anger” together: both are aimed the same way, inward.

The three parts: claim = sentence one; evidence = the quoted phrases; commentary = each sentence that follows a quotation and explains its wording. Exam tip: if half your sentences retell the passage, you have written summary with quotations in it.

Write it

Write one analytic paragraph on this closing: a defensible claim, two quotations of eight words or fewer, and a sentence of commentary after each. Then name in one line your claim sentence and your commentary sentences.

Show a model response

Joyce closes “Araby” by letting the boy do to himself what the bazaar never bothers to do. No one insults him; a voice simply calls “that the light was out,” an announcement about closing time that he takes as a judgment. Looking up into the dark, he finds in himself “a creature driven and derided by vanity,” language far harsher than the evening warrants, and the gap between the occasion and the verdict is the point. He has supplied the cruelty the world declined to, which is why the final clause aims anguish and anger at one target.

Rubric: sentence one is the claim (Row A); the two quotations with the sentences explaining them are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Unit 1 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 1 review: detail, setting, order, and voice

Ten exam-style items built on two stories this unit did not teach, the opening of Bierce's “An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge” and the first paragraph of Crane's “The Open Boat”, so that the unit's four foundations have to work on prose you are meeting cold.

Multiple choice

  1. Passage A. About the text: Ambrose Bierce, “An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge,” first published in the San Francisco Examiner, 1890, and collected in Tales of Soldiers and Civilians (1891). The opening of the story; the paragraph continues past the excerpt.

    A man stood upon a railroad bridge in northern Alabama, looking down into the swift water twenty feet below. The man's hands were behind his back, the wrists bound with a cord. A rope closely encircled his neck. It was attached to a stout cross-timber above his head and the slack fell to the level of his knees. Some loose boards laid upon the sleepers supporting the metals of the railway supplied a footing for him and his executioners—two private soldiers of the Federal army, directed by a sergeant who in civil life may have been a deputy sheriff.

    In context, the details of the cross-timber, the sleepers, and the loose boards primarily serve to

    The timber is called “stout” and the boards do hold the men, so soundness is genuinely in the passage, but that is the information the detail carries, not the work it performs. Ask what the parts of the bridge are being put to, and the answer is a hanging.

    Correct. Read the nouns: sleepers, the metals of the railway, loose boards, a stout cross-timber. Every one belongs to a bridge and every one has been handed a job in an execution: the timber holds the rope, the boards hold the feet. Setting here is not the room the scene is played in; it is the apparatus, which is why the paragraph reads less like a crime than like a procedure.

    Nothing suggests disrepair. “Loose boards” describes planks laid down rather than fastened, and the sentence's own verb says they “supplied a footing”: they are doing their job. A word that sounds ominous out of context is not yet evidence.

    Northern Alabama is named, and the war it implies matters, but a location is not a function. A setting question asks what the described place does to the people in it; an answer that stops at where they are has answered a different question.

  2. Passage A, above: Bierce, “An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge,” 1890.

    A man stood upon a railroad bridge in northern Alabama … The man's hands were behind his back, the wrists bound with a cord.

    The paragraph gives the reader the man's situation before any of the events that produced it. This arrangement chiefly functions to

    The opening makes no such promise, and the missing cause has to be supplied from somewhere other than forward motion. Treating an opening as a pledge about sequence assumes that the order of events and the order of telling are the same thing, which is precisely the distinction this item tests.

    No crime appears. The passage supplies a rope, a cord and a Federal uniform and leaves you to infer a war and a charge; an answer that arrives with a verdict has read past the words on the page into the story it expected.

    Correct. The order of telling is doing the work. In time, the man was seized, tried and marched to this bridge; the story begins after all of it, with a result standing in place of its own causes. That is why the opening produces a question rather than a scene, and why withholding, not revealing, is the move to name when you write about how a story is arranged.

    The narration misses nothing that is happening on the bridge: it measures the drop, the cord, the slack and the boards. A narrator who reports this closely is plainly present. What he declines to give is the past, not the present.

  3. Passage A, above: Bierce, “An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge,” 1890.

    The man's hands were behind his back, the wrists bound with a cord. A rope closely encircled his neck.

    The passage characterizes the man on the bridge chiefly through

    Correct. Count what he is given: hands, wrists, a neck, a footing, and something attached to each. Every interior fact is withheld and no label is offered, so the only evidence of a person here is the tackle holding him in place. Character built from detail rather than from a narrator's adjective is the whole of CHR 1.A, and in this paragraph the detail belongs to other people's equipment.

    No history is given. The single biographical guess in the paragraph attaches to the sergeant, “in civil life may have been a deputy sheriff”, and even that is a guess. The absence of the condemned man's story is a design decision, not an oversight.

    The soldiers are identified by uniform and rank, the man by his bonds; no likeness is drawn between them. The passage does put them on the same boards, which is a shared footing rather than a shared appearance.

    He looks down into the swift water and the narration stops there, no expression, no trembling, no dread is reported. Reading feeling into a body described only from outside is how an unsupported character claim begins.

  4. Passage A, above: Bierce, “An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge,” 1890.

    … two private soldiers of the Federal army, directed by a sergeant who in civil life may have been a deputy sheriff.

    The phrase “may have been a deputy sheriff” most clearly indicates that the narration

    “May have been” is the opposite of access. A narration inside the sergeant's head would know his trade and say so; this one offers a probability about a stranger, which is what an observer does when a face suggests a former occupation.

    Nothing marks the voice as a participant's: there is no “I,” no place in the line, no stake in what is about to happen. The soldiers are described from outside exactly as the condemned man is, and a man serving under the sergeant would hardly need to guess at his civilian trade.

    Precision is what the physical reporting has: twenty feet, a stout cross-timber, slack falling to the level of the knees. The hedge lands only on a biography, and noticing which kind of fact a narrator hedges is how you find the edge of a point of view.

    Correct. Set the two halves of the paragraph side by side. Distances, knots and timbers are given flatly, as measurements; the instant the sentence reaches a man's life before the war it retreats to “may have been.” This narration can see bodies and cannot see histories, and that boundary, what a point of view can and cannot show, is the thing to name when a question asks about narration.

  5. Passage A, above: Bierce, “An Occurrence at Owl Creek Bridge,” 1890.

    A student claims that the opening presents the hanging as a piece of routine work rather than as a horror. Which detail, taken up next, would most advance that line of reasoning?

    The drop is the passage's most vivid image, which is why students reach for it first, but a man staring down at water twenty feet below fits a horror reading as comfortably as a routine one. Evidence that supports a claim and its opposite equally advances neither.

    The rope is the fact the claim has to survive, not the fact that proves it. Quoting the most violent detail in the paragraph to argue that the scene feels ordinary asks the reader to do the work your commentary should be doing.

    Correct. The sentence is written in the vocabulary of a railway inspection (sleepers, the metals of the railway, a footing “supplied”), and it hands the same plank to the condemned man and to his executioners without distinguishing between them. Choose the quotation whose wording, not merely whose content, carries the claim; here the diction is the argument, and one sentence of commentary pointing at “supplied” finishes the move.

    A place-name locates the scene and does nothing else. A line of reasoning advances when each new piece of evidence narrows the case, and a state narrows nothing.

  6. Passage B. About the text: Stephen Crane, “The Open Boat,” first published in Scribner's Magazine, 1897, and collected in The Open Boat and Other Tales of Adventure (1898). The first paragraph of the story; four men are adrift in a dinghy after a shipwreck.

    None of them knew the color of the sky. Their eyes glanced level, and were fastened upon the waves that swept toward them. These waves were of the hue of slate, save for the tops, which were of foaming white, and all of the men knew the colors of the sea. The horizon narrowed and widened, and dipped and rose, and at all times its edge was jagged with waves that seemed thrust up in points like rocks.

    The point of view established in the first two sentences is best described as one that

    Correct. “None of them” and “their eyes” bind the men into one unit, and the next clause fastens that unit to the waves. The story opens by naming a color nobody in it has looked at, which tells you at once how narrow the available world has become: a point of view is a limit before it is a voice.

    There is no “I” and no retrospect; the verbs report what is happening rather than what was remembered. A first-person survivor would also be in no position to say “none of them” with such confidence about the other three.

    No mind is entered. The paragraph offers exactly one piece of shared knowledge, that all of the men know the colors of the sea, and not a single private thought, which is a long way from moving among four interiors.

    No man is singled out: not one is named, described, or given a separate line of sight. Assuming a story must have a center of consciousness is reasonable in general and wrong here, and that is what makes this opening unusual enough to be worth writing about.

  7. Passage B, above: Crane, “The Open Boat,” 1897.

    The horizon narrowed and widened, and dipped and rose, and at all times its edge was jagged with waves that seemed thrust up in points like rocks.

    The account of the horizon in the final sentence contributes most to the setting by

    No land appears. What rises at the edge is water, waves “thrust up in points”, and mistaking them for a shore is exactly the hope the sentence exists to deny.

    No sun is mentioned anywhere in the paragraph, and the sky is the one thing nobody has looked at. Time of day is precisely the information this opening refuses to supply.

    Every verb in the sentence is motion, and the waves making the horizon jagged are still standing up. Reading a calm into a clause built from four verbs of movement reverses what the setting is doing.

    Correct. A horizon is supposed to be the one fixed thing you can steer by, and Crane gives this one four verbs in a single clause. The place these men are in is defined by instability, which is why so much can be made of a small boat: the function of this setting is to remove every reference point except the next wave.

  8. Passage B, above: Crane, “The Open Boat,” 1897.

    These waves were of the hue of slate, save for the tops, which were of foaming white … its edge was jagged with waves that seemed thrust up in points like rocks.

    The comparisons in “the hue of slate” and “thrust up in points like rocks” work together chiefly to

    “Seemed” is the word that saves you here: the waves only seem thrust up like rocks, and no coast is anywhere in the paragraph. Turning a comparison into a fact of the plot is the commonest figurative-language error on this exam, and this sentence is built to catch it.

    Correct. Take the literal sense first (gray water, a jagged edge), and then ask what the figure imports. Slate is roofing; rocks sink boats. Both comparisons reach for stone and press it into a description of water, so the sea reads as something hard at the exact moment the men need it to hold them up. Another reader might weigh the two images differently; what makes this reading defensible is that both of them go to the same material.

    Slate is cheap gray stone and rocks are a hazard; neither is valuable, and nothing in the sentence admires anything. Assuming that imagery must be doing something appreciative is a habit worth breaking early.

    The description is precise rather than exhausted: a hue, a contrast with foaming white, an edge called jagged and in points. The men's situation is desperate, but the narration's eye is not tired at all.

  9. Passage B, above: Crane, “The Open Boat,” 1897.

    Their eyes glanced level, and were fastened upon the waves that swept toward them … and all of the men knew the colors of the sea.

    The paragraph characterizes the men in the boat chiefly by

    No temperament is described and no man is separated from the rest. The paragraph's pronouns are “them,” “their,” “the men,” and a character question has to be answered with the distinctions a text actually makes.

    Nobody gives an order and nobody is named as being in charge. Supplying a hierarchy the paragraph has not mentioned, because boats usually have one, is how a character claim ends up unsupported.

    Correct. What these men are given is a direction of gaze, “Their eyes glanced level”, and a single piece of expertise: “all of the men knew the colors of the sea.” They are characterized by a limit, and it is a limit the sea has taught them. A group can be a character, and what a text withholds (names, faces, thoughts) characterizes as surely as what it supplies.

    Nothing in the paragraph is hopeful. The men watch waves “that swept toward them,” and the sentence about the horizon ends on points like rocks; confidence would have to be carried in from outside the text.

  10. Passage B, above: Crane, “The Open Boat,” 1897.

    A student writes: “Crane uses imagery of slate and rocks to show that the sea is dangerous.” Which revision best turns that observation into commentary?

    Correct. It keeps the original's evidence, adds the logic the original skipped, stone is the one thing water is not, and then states what that costs the reader: the sea is not dangerous because something happens in it, it is dangerous in the way it has to be looked at. That final clause is the “so what” sentence Row B keeps asking for.

    This names the devices more accurately than the original, and naming is where most drafts stop. A reader who can see the similes already knows they are there; the sentence still has not said what they accomplish, which is why it stalls in the lower half of Row B.

    Listing the words is evidence without commentary. Quotation is necessary and not sufficient: the point is earned by the sentence that explains how those particular words support the claim being made.

    Praise is not analysis. “Powerful and vivid” could be written about any paragraph in the anthology without reading this one, and a claim that survives without the text cannot be supported by it.

Lesson 2.1 · Unit 2 · Poetry I · NAR 4.A, 4.C

The speaker: voice, situation, and audience

A poem's “I” is a made thing. Even when the voice sounds like confession, what reaches you is a position the poet built, with a situation behind it and a listener in front of it.

So settle three questions before you interpret anything: who is speaking, what circumstance they are speaking from, and who is being spoken to. Change any one and the same words mean something else.

Key terms
  • Speaker (NAR 4.A): the voice the poem invents to do the talking. Calling it the poet closes an argument before you have made one.
  • Situation (NAR 4.A): the circumstance the speaker speaks from. A poem rarely announces it; you assemble it from details and then argue from what you assembled.
  • Addressee (NAR 4.C): the person or group spoken to. A poem addressed to a lover, to God, or to “the world” is doing three different jobs.
  • Diction as perspective (NAR 4.C): word choice betrays a stance the speaker is not arguing for. Watch the pronouns first; they are the cheapest evidence and the strongest.
  • Refrain (STR 3.C): a line that returns. The same words in a new position are not the same statement, so ask what has changed around them.
Text

About the text: Paul Laurence Dunbar, “We Wear the Mask,” collected in Lyrics of Lowly Life, 1896. Complete, 15 lines.

We wear the mask that grins and lies,
It hides our cheeks and shades our eyes,—
This debt we pay to human guile;
With torn and bleeding hearts we smile,
And mouth with myriad subtleties.

Why should the world be over-wise,
In counting all our tears and sighs?
Nay, let them only see us, while
We wear the mask.

We smile, but, O great Christ, our cries
To thee from tortured souls arise.
We sing, but oh the clay is vile
Beneath our feet, and long the mile;
But let the world dream otherwise,
We wear the mask!

Model analysis

Dunbar's speaker never says “I,” and the plural is the poem's first argument: concealment is presented as a shared obligation rather than a private choice. The mask is “this debt we pay to human guile”: a debt is owed, and owed to somebody, so the smiling becomes a payment extracted rather than a disguise adopted. The refrain then does different work each time it lands. In the second stanza it finishes a sentence begun in the line above, “let them only see us, while / We wear the mask,” where the mask is a condition the world is permitted to observe. In the last it stands alone under an exclamation point, spoken outward instead of explained. A reader could argue that closing mark signals defiance rather than exhaustion; the poem leaves the choice open.

Exam tip: name the addressee. “The speaker is sad” reports a mood; “the speaker addresses a world he has decided not to inform” is a defensible interpretation with a line of reasoning already waiting behind it.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the poem gains by speaking as “we” and never as “I.” Make a claim a reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each supports it.

Show a model response

Dunbar's plural turns private concealment into something closer to public policy. The speaker calls the mask “this debt we pay to human guile,” which makes hiding an obligation charged by other people rather than a habit chosen by one man: a debt implies a creditor. The same “we” then absorbs the cost: “With torn and bleeding hearts we smile” puts the injury and the performance inside one clause, so no member of the group is exempt from either. Because the speaker never steps out of the plural to identify himself, the poem cannot be reduced to one man's grievance, which is precisely its claim about who is doing the watching.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation (Row A); each quotation followed by a sentence on what its wording does is evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 2.2 · Unit 2 · Poetry I · CHR 1.A, 1.E

Character in a poem

A poem has no room for a biography, so it builds a person out of how they talk. Twenty lines are enough if the lines are listened to closely.

The richest evidence is what a speaker gives away without meaning to. Read for the hesitations, the repetitions, and the register: the level of language a person reaches for under pressure.

Key terms
  • Characterization in a poem (CHR 1.A): the same evidence fiction uses: what the speaker says, how he says it, and what he leaves out.
  • Self-revelation (CHR 1.E): the gap between what a speaker intends to establish and what a reader concludes from the attempt.
  • Register (CHR 1.A): the social level of a word. “Nipperkin” and “half-a-crown” belong to a public house, not to a battlefield, and the mismatch is evidence.
  • Hesitation as evidence (CHR 1.E): dashes, restarts, and repeated words are events in the poem. Treat them as things the speaker does, not as noise.
  • Complex character (CHR 1.E): one whose account of himself will not hold together. Contradiction is design; your job is to say what it is designed to show.
Text

About the text: Thomas Hardy, “The Man He Killed,” first published 1902 and collected in Time's Laughingstocks, 1909. Complete, 20 lines.

“Had he and I but met
By some old ancient inn,
We should have sat us down to wet
Right many a nipperkin!

“But ranged as infantry,
And staring face to face,
I shot at him as he at me,
And killed him in his place.

“I shot him dead because —
Because he was my foe,
Just so: my foe of course he was;
That's clear enough; although

“He thought he'd 'list, perhaps,
Off-hand like — just as I —
Was out of work — had sold his traps —
No other reason why.

“Yes; quaint and curious war is!
You shoot a fellow down
You'd treat if met where any bar is,
Or help to half-a-crown.”

Model analysis

Hardy characterizes this speaker by letting his justification fail in his own mouth. Asked to say why he fired, he begins “I shot him dead because —” and cannot finish: the dash breaks the line, and what he offers on the other side of it is the same word again, “Because he was my foe.” He then certifies the answer three times in two lines, “Just so,” “of course he was,” “That's clear enough”, and a man who calls a thing clear three times is a man talking himself into it. The fourth stanza supplies the reason he could not: the other man probably enlisted exactly as he did, “Off-hand like — just as I —,” out of work and out of options. Hardy never comments. The barroom diction does it instead.

Exam tip: CHR 1.E rewards contradiction held open, not resolved. Do not settle the speaker into “he feels guilty”; point at the sentence where his explanation breaks and say what the break reveals.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the final stanza reveals about the speaker that he does not intend to reveal. Make a claim a reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each supports it.

Show a model response

Hardy's last stanza lets the speaker close the case with the word that reopens it. He calls war “quaint and curious,” a pair of adjectives fit for an antique shop rather than for shooting a man, and the distance between the size of the event and the smallness of the language is his whole defense. He then describes his victim as a man “You'd treat if met where any bar is”, not a soldier's thought at all but a drinker's, and one that concedes nothing separated the two of them except the uniform. He means to end on a shrug. What he produces is the evidence against the shrug.

Rubric: the opening sentence is a defensible interpretation (Row A); each quotation followed by a sentence explaining its wording is evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 2.3 · Unit 2 · Poetry I · SET 2.A, 2.B

Setting in a poem

A lyric builds its world in a handful of words (a season, an hour, a weather), and then leans on it. Place is never scenery; it is the condition the speaker thinks under.

The move that earns points is the one you learned in fiction: go past the mood word to the function. And watch for the element that does not match the rest. It is usually the poem.

Key terms
  • Setting in a poem (SET 2.A): place, season, hour, and weather, established quickly and then relied on. Every detail of it was selected.
  • Atmosphere (SET 2.A): the feeling the details produce. Name it in one word and then get to work; the word itself is not an argument.
  • Function of setting (SET 2.B): what the place does: supplies the speaker's mood, contradicts it, or makes a claim the speaker will not make himself.
  • Landscape given a body (SET 2.B), when land is described with human anatomy or human states, the setting stops holding the poem and starts arguing inside it.
  • Contrast within a setting (SET 2.B): the element that breaks the pattern. Locate it, then explain what the rest of the setting does to it.
Text

About the text: Thomas Hardy, “The Darkling Thrush,” first published in The Graphic, 31 December 1900, under the title “By the Century's Deathbed.” Complete, 32 lines.

I leant upon a coppice gate
When Frost was spectre-grey,
And Winter's dregs made desolate
The weakening eye of day.
The tangled bine-stems scored the sky
Like strings of broken lyres,
And all mankind that haunted nigh
Had sought their household fires.

The land's sharp features seemed to be
The Century's corpse outleant,
His crypt the cloudy canopy,
The wind his death-lament.
The ancient pulse of germ and birth
Was shrunken hard and dry,
And every spirit upon earth
Seemed fervourless as I.

At once a voice arose among
The bleak twigs overhead
In a full-hearted evensong
Of joy illimited;
An aged thrush, frail, gaunt, and small,
In blast-beruffled plume,
Had chosen thus to fling his soul
Upon the growing gloom.

So little cause for carolings
Of such ecstatic sound
Was written on terrestrial things
Afar or nigh around,
That I could think there trembled through
His happy good-night air
Some blessed Hope, whereof he knew
And I was unaware.

Model analysis

Hardy spends sixteen lines turning a field into a funeral so that a single living voice will register as something he cannot account for. The land's “sharp features” are “The Century's corpse outleant,” with the clouds for a crypt and the wind for a “death-lament”: the setting is not merely bleak but liturgical, a burial already under way. Then the thrush arrives belonging wholly to that same world: “aged,” “frail, gaunt, and small,” “In blast-beruffled plume.” The song is therefore not relief imported from somewhere else; it comes from something as used up as the century. That is why the ending stays careful rather than consoling. Having found “So little cause for carolings” in anything visible, the speaker can only credit a hope the bird knows and he does not.

Exam tip: “the setting is bleak” paraphrases the poem. Say what the bleakness makes possible: here, an event the speaker cannot explain from anything inside the scene.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the winter setting functions to do in the poem's final stanza, not what mood it creates. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each produces the effect you name.

Show a model response

By the last stanza Hardy's winter has become the speaker's instrument of measurement. The poem has already shown a land whose “ancient pulse of germ and birth” was “shrunken hard and dry,” so when the speaker searches for a reason to sing he can report finding “So little cause for carolings” anywhere in sight. The setting functions as evidence for a negative: it rules out every earthly source of the thrush's joy, which is what forces him to reach for “Some blessed Hope, whereof he knew.” The desolation does not produce despair; it produces a question the speaker can neither answer nor put down, which is why a reader could call the ending honest doubt rather than faith.

Rubric: the claim names a function, not a mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what the wording does (Row B); the last sentence opens an alternative reading instead of closing one (Row C).

Lesson 2.4 · Unit 2 · Poetry I · STR 3.C

Structure: lines, stanzas, and the turn

Form is not packaging. A stanza break is a pause the poet imposes on you, a rhyme is a promise about what is coming, and a turn is the moment an argument changes direction.

An English sonnet gives you three four-line units and a closing pair, which means three chances to make the same move and one place to say what it adds up to. Read the units as steps in a case.

Key terms
  • Quatrain and couplet (STR 3.C): the English sonnet's three four-line units and its final pair. Treat each as a step in an argument, not as decoration.
  • Volta (STR 3.C): the turn in the poem's thinking. In an English sonnet it usually arrives with the couplet; a poet may place it earlier for effect.
  • End-stopped and enjambed (STR 3.C), whether a line closes with its syntax or spills into the next. A stopped line asks you to weigh; a run-on line makes you hurry.
  • Rhyme scheme (STR 3.C): here abab cdcd efef gg. A scheme sets expectations, and expectations can be satisfied, delayed, or used against a reader.
  • Parallel structure (STR 3.C): repeated openings that invite comparison. When three units begin the same way, the poem is telling you to notice what differs.
Text

About the text: William Shakespeare, Sonnet 73, “That time of year thou mayst in me behold,” first published in Shake-speares Sonnets, 1609. Complete, 14 lines; modern spelling.

That time of year thou mayst in me behold
When yellow leaves, or none, or few, do hang
Upon those boughs which shake against the cold,
Bare ruined choirs, where late the sweet birds sang.
In me thou see'st the twilight of such day
As after sunset fadeth in the west,
Which by and by black night doth take away,
Death's second self, that seals up all in rest.
In me thou see'st the glowing of such fire
That on the ashes of his youth doth lie,
As the death-bed whereon it must expire,
Consumed with that which it was nourished by.
This thou perceiv'st, which makes thy love more strong,
To love that well which thou must leave ere long.

Model analysis

The three quatrains are the same sentence three times, and the repetition is what makes the shrinking visible. Each hands the beloved an image of the speaker, “That time of year thou mayst in me behold,” then “In me thou see'st” twice over, and each image occupies less time than the one before it: a season, then a single day, then a fire burning down. By the third the fire lies “on the ashes of his youth,” consumed “with that which it was nourished by,” so what fed it is now what is killing it. Only then does the couplet turn from picture to consequence: “This thou perceiv'st, which makes thy love more strong.” The turn is a claim about the effect of the evidence, and it is disputable: another reader could hear a speaker instructing the beloved how to feel.

Exam tip: a structure question wants a unit and a function. “The poem is a sonnet” is a label; “three narrowing quatrains make the couplet's claim look earned rather than asked for” is an interpretation a reader can argue with.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the poem gains by holding its turn until the final two lines rather than placing it at line 9. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each supports your claim.

Show a model response

Keeping the turn until line 13 lets Shakespeare finish the demonstration before he asks for anything. Twelve lines only describe: a season of “yellow leaves, or none, or few,” a day taken by “black night,” a fire settling onto its own ashes. Nothing is requested of the listener in any of them, so when the couplet opens with “This thou perceiv'st,” the conclusion can be presented as something the beloved arrived at rather than something the speaker pressed on him. A turn at line 9 would have left four more lines of argument after the images and made the poem a case being urged. Arriving last, the claim gets to look like a discovery.

Rubric: the claim is about placement, not about content (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary explaining what the ordering does to a reader (Row B).

Lesson 2.5 · Unit 2 · Poetry I · FIG 5.B, 5.D

Word choice, imagery, and detail

Every word in a poem beat out a synonym to get there. The useful question is never “what does this word mean?” but “what would the obvious alternative have lost?”

Imagery is the same question at the level of the senses. A poem that works in texture and taste is asking you to perceive something, not to picture it, and the difference is worth an argument.

Key terms
  • Imagery (FIG 5.D): language that addresses the senses. Sight is only one of them; color, heat, and texture carry meaning too.
  • Denotation and connotation (FIG 5.B): what a word names and what it carries. Both are evidence, and the second is where the arguments are.
  • Diction (FIG 5.B): the choice of this word over its near neighbor. Test it by substituting the plainer word and naming what disappears.
  • Compound words (FIG 5.B): two words fused into one so the reader takes them as a single perception rather than as a phrase to assemble.
  • Catalogue (FIG 5.D): a list that means by accumulation. Its order, and the place it stops, are choices you can argue about.
Text

About the text: Gerard Manley Hopkins, “Pied Beauty,” written 1877, first published in Poems, 1918. Complete, 11 lines; the stress accents in line 6 are Hopkins's own.

Glory be to God for dappled things —
For skies of couple-colour as a brinded cow;
For rose-moles all in stipple upon trout that swim;
Fresh-firecoal chestnut-falls; finches' wings;
Landscape plotted and pieced — fold, fallow, and plough;
And áll trádes, their gear and tackle and trim.

All things counter, original, spare, strange;
Whatever is fickle, freckled (who knows how?)
With swift, slow; sweet, sour; adazzle, dim;
He fathers-forth whose beauty is past change:
Praise him.

Model analysis

Hopkins does not describe variety; he manufactures it inside his own words. The compounds, “couple-colour,” “rose-moles,” “Fresh-firecoal chestnut-falls”, each weld together two things a plainer poet would keep apart, so the reader receives one perception where the world offered two. That is the poem's claim enacted rather than stated: dappling is a single kind of thing, not a mixture of two. The catalogue then pushes the principle past its examples: “All things counter, original, spare, strange” gives four adjectives and no nouns at all, as if the quality had outrun the things that have it. And the last compound is a verb: God “fathers-forth,” yet his “beauty is past change.” A poem in praise of the spotted and the shifting closes by crediting the one thing in it that cannot shift. The two-word ending does not settle that tension; it stops in front of it.

Exam tip: FIG 5.B asks what a word does, not what it means. Gloss it in half a sentence, then spend the rest of the sentence on the effect of choosing it.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Hopkins's compound words accomplish that ordinary phrases could not. Quote two compounds and explain how each one works on a reader.

Show a model response

Hopkins's hyphens argue for the poem's subject at the level of the word. A cow's hide is “couple-colour,” not two-colored: the compound makes doubleness a property the animal has, rather than a pair of colors a viewer has to add together. “Fresh-firecoal chestnut-falls” goes further and fuses a fallen chestnut to a live ember, so heat, color, and gravity all have to be held at once before the line moves on. In both cases the fusion is the point. The poem praises things that are mottled and mixed, and the compounds make the reader perform that mixing instead of being told it happened.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation about technique (Row A); each quoted compound followed by a sentence on its effect is evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 2.6 · Unit 2 · Poetry I · FIG 6.A, 6.B, 6.C, 6.D

Comparison: simile, metaphor, personification, allusion

Naming a comparison is the cheapest sentence in a literary essay, and on its own it earns nothing. The work begins one step later.

Name both terms, the subject and the thing it is compared to, then say what the comparison lets a reader see that a direct statement would not. That second sentence is the one Row B pays for.

Key terms
  • Simile (FIG 6.A): a comparison made openly with like or as, which keeps the two things separate even while joining them.
  • Metaphor (FIG 6.B): a comparison that states one thing as another. Name the subject and the thing it is called before you interpret either.
  • Extended metaphor (FIG 6.B): one comparison developed across stanzas, which obliges the poet to follow its logic wherever the logic goes.
  • Personification (FIG 6.C): human attributes given to something not human. Ask which attribute, and what it imports along with it.
  • Allusion (FIG 6.D): a reference to something outside the poem that the reader has to supply. The poem changes for a reader who catches it.
  • Commentary (LAN 7.A): the sentence explaining how the comparison supports your claim. Identification is description; explanation is analysis.
Text

About the text: Emily Dickinson, “‘Hope’ is the thing with feathers —,” written about 1861, first published in Poems by Emily Dickinson: Second Series, 1891. Complete, 12 lines; punctuation and capitals follow Dickinson's manuscript.

“Hope” is the thing with feathers —
That perches in the soul —
And sings the tune without the words —
And never stops — at all —

And sweetest — in the Gale — is heard —
And sore must be the storm —
That could abash the little Bird
That kept so many warm —

I've heard it in the chillest land —
And on the strangest Sea —
Yet — never — in Extremity,
It asked a crumb — of me.

Model analysis

Dickinson never says hope is like a bird, and the refusal is the first move: she calls it “the thing with feathers,” a creature identified by an attribute and never named, so the comparison stops one step short of the familiar emblem. Across three stanzas she then makes the metaphor do what a simile could not. In the first the bird is only heard: it “sings the tune without the words.” In the second it is tested: “sore must be the storm — / That could abash the little Bird,” which introduces the weather the opening stanza never mentioned. In the third the speaker stops describing and starts keeping accounts: the bird “asked a crumb — of me.” What began as a property of the soul has become a creature with a claim on her, and the poem's last act is to note that the claim was never pressed.

Exam tip: the label is not the point. “Dickinson uses a metaphor” is Row B level 2 at best; “the metaphor turns hope from a possession into a creditor” explains how the device supports an interpretation, which is what the fourth point requires.

Write it

Write one analytic paragraph on how the bird metaphor changes between the first stanza and the last. Make a defensible claim, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and give a sentence of commentary after each.

Show a model response

Dickinson's metaphor moves from something the speaker simply has to something that has been keeping accounts on her. In the first stanza hope is an interior habit, a thing that “perches in the soul” and “never stops — at all”, described entirely from inside, with no cost attached to it. By the last stanza the speaker has been to “the chillest land” and back, and what she reports is not comfort but an unsettled bill: the bird “asked a crumb — of me.” The comparison has quietly become an obligation the poem then notes was never collected. Calling that generosity is one reading; calling it a creditor who has not yet come to the door is another the poem will support.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation (Row A); the quotations with the sentences explaining their wording are evidence and commentary (Row B); the closing pair of readings holds a tension open instead of resolving it (Row C).

Unit 2 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 2 review: the speaker, the turn, and the comparison

Ten exam-style items on two complete sonnets this unit did not teach, Christina Rossetti's “Remember” and Wordsworth's “The World Is Too Much with Us”, with line numbers printed every fifth line so that you can cite them the way a reader will expect.

Multiple choice

  1. Passage A. About the text: Christina Rossetti, “Remember,” first published in Goblin Market and Other Poems, 1862. Complete, 14 lines; modern spelling, printed flush left, with a line number at every fifth line.

    Remember me when I am gone away,
    Gone far away into the silent land;
    When you can no more hold me by the hand,
    Nor I half turn to go yet turning stay.
    5Remember me when no more day by day
    You tell me of our future that you planned:
    Only remember me; you understand
    It will be late to counsel then or pray.
    Yet if you should forget me for a while
    10And afterwards remember, do not grieve:
    For if the darkness and corruption leave
    A vestige of the thoughts that once I had,
    Better by far you should forget and smile
    Than that you should remember and be sad.

    Lines 1–8 are best understood as spoken by

    The situation runs the other way. “Remember me when I am gone away” puts the departure in the speaker's own future and the remembering in the listener's, so the one who will be dead is the one doing the talking. Elegies usually work as this option describes, which is exactly why the reversal is worth catching on a first read.

    Correct. Everything asked for is set in a time the speaker will not be present for, “when I am gone away,” “when you can no more hold me by the hand”, while the actions given to her now are still within reach: she can “half turn to go yet turning stay.” The poem's pressure comes from that overlap, a woman close enough to be held who is already arranging the time after her.

    “Gone far away into the silent land” and “It will be late to counsel then or pray” rule a journey out: a traveller can be advised and prayed with, and a traveller's country is not silent. Taking a euphemism literally turns a deathbed into an itinerary.

    The poem is addressed, not reported: “Remember me,” “you tell me,” “you understand.” A second person that insistent puts the speaker inside the scene rather than outside it, which is the first thing to settle in any speaker question.

  2. Passage A, above: Rossetti, “Remember,” 1862, lines 1–2.

    Remember me when I am gone away,
    Gone far away into the silent land;

    In context, the phrase “the silent land” (line 2) primarily serves to

    No country is named, and the phrase is a figure, not a destination. A metaphor that you resolve into a place on a map stops being able to do the work the poem gives it two lines later.

    The silence belongs to the land, not to the listener; he goes on talking in the poem's own account of him, “day by day,” and it is that talk the speaker says will end. Assigning a quality to the wrong figure is the commonest way an otherwise careful reading goes wrong.

    Correct. The word “death” never appears in the sonnet. Of everything a metaphor for death might select (darkness, sleep, rest) Rossetti selects silence, and the octave then builds on it: counsel and prayer will be “late,” the future can no longer be told, so whatever must be settled has to be settled now. A comparison that chooses one property is making an argument, not decorating a subject.

    Nothing marks an hour. The only time-words in the octave are “day by day,” and they describe a habit of conversation rather than a setting. A plausible-sounding detail with no line behind it is still an invention.

  3. Passage A, above: Rossetti, “Remember,” 1862, lines 8–10.

    It will be late to counsel then or pray.
    Yet if you should forget me for a while
    10And afterwards remember, do not grieve:

    The shift that occurs at line 9 functions to

    Correct. The octave says “Remember me” three times; then one conjunction, “Yet,” turns the poem at the place an Italian sonnet turns, the head of line 9. From there the sestet concedes forgetting (“do not grieve”), qualifies its own claim (“if the darkness and corruption leave / A vestige”), and finally prefers the smile to the memory. Notice that there is no stanza break to warn you: the argument changes direction while the white space stays the same, which is why a structure claim here has to be built on the rhyme and the syntax.

    One voice runs the whole sonnet; the “you” is addressed constantly and never given a line. A reversal inside an argument is not a change of speaker, and the rhyme carries on without interruption through the turn.

    The tenses go forward, not back. “If you should forget” is conditional, “do not grieve” is an imperative, and the single backward look, “the thoughts that once I had,” sits inside a condition about what may survive. Watch the mood of the verbs before you claim a change of time.

    “If you should forget me for a while” is a supposition the speaker raises herself, not a report of something that has happened. Reading a hypothetical as an event is the fastest way to lose a question about a turn.

  4. Passage A, above: Rossetti, “Remember,” 1862, lines 11–12.

    For if the darkness and corruption leave
    A vestige of the thoughts that once I had,

    The primary effect of the words “darkness and corruption” (line 11) is to

    “Corruption” here is decay, not misconduct; the word belongs to the older, bodily sense, and the thing being worked on is the speaker, not the listener. Choosing a modern connotation over the one the sentence supports is precisely the diction error this item is built on.

    “Counsel then or pray” in line 8 is the poem's only religious language, and it names what will be too late rather than opening a doctrine. A religious word is not a religious argument, and the sestet's business is memory.

    The grief in this poem belongs to the listener and is treated with care: “do not grieve.” The darkness and the corruption are in the ground, and attaching them to a living man's feelings reverses who is being described.

    Correct. Through line 10 death has been “gone away,” “the silent land,” the hour when hands can no longer hold; line 11 says what that distance is actually made of. The bluntness is load-bearing, because the speaker is granting that even a “vestige” of her thinking may not survive, and it is that concession, not modesty, that makes the closing preference for forgetting sound like a gift.

  5. Passage A, above: Rossetti, “Remember,” 1862, lines 13–14.

    Better by far you should forget and smile
    Than that you should remember and be sad.

    The poem's closing two lines are best understood as

    Nothing is withdrawn but the demand. The sestet gives up a claim, not a person, and the difference between those two things is what the whole second half of the sonnet is about: a speaker who had stopped loving would have no reason to weigh the listener's sadness at all.

    The address never widens. “You should forget,” “you should remember”: the couplet is spoken to one person about what will go on inside him, and its comfort is arranged for his sake rather than a reader's. A sentiment can sound conventional and still be aimed at somebody in particular.

    Correct. The comparison is explicit, “Better by far … Than that”, and what it weighs is not remembering against forgetting but smiling against being sad. Watch the diction drop, too: after “darkness and corruption” and “a vestige of the thoughts that once I had,” the poem ends on “smile” and “sad.” Another reader could hear the couplet as one last bid for sympathy, and that dispute is what makes the generosity worth arguing for rather than asserting.

    The sonnet offers no such assurance; its last six lines are built out of conditions, “if you should forget,” “if the darkness and corruption leave / A vestige”, that deliberately leave the outcome open. Reading confidence into a chain of “ifs” supplies a certainty the poem declines.

  6. Passage B. About the text: William Wordsworth, “The World Is Too Much with Us,” first published in Poems, in Two Volumes, 1807. Complete, 14 lines; text as commonly printed in modern editions, with a line number at every fifth line.

    The world is too much with us; late and soon,
    Getting and spending, we lay waste our powers;—
    Little we see in Nature that is ours;
    We have given our hearts away, a sordid boon!
    5This Sea that bares her bosom to the moon;
    The winds that will be howling at all hours,
    And are up-gathered now like sleeping flowers;
    For this, for everything, we are out of tune;
    It moves us not.—Great God! I'd rather be
    10A Pagan suckled in a creed outworn;
    So might I, standing on this pleasant lea,
    Have glimpses that would make me less forlorn;
    Have sight of Proteus rising from the sea;
    Or hear old Triton blow his wreathèd horn.

    In lines 1–4 the speaker's use of “we” and “our” chiefly serves to

    Correct. The grammar will not let him stand outside: “we lay waste our powers,” “We have given our hearts away.” That inclusion sets the tone of the octave, since a sonnet that said “you” would be a scolding; and it makes the turn audible, because the first-person singular does not appear until “Great God! I'd rather be,” where one voice finally pulls free of the group it has been indicting.

    No group is ever named, no class, trade, city, or party. The pronoun is left unspecified on purpose, which is what allows it to take in the reader along with the speaker.

    Nothing is proposed or organized. What the sestet asks for is a way of perceiving, “glimpses,” “sight,” to “hear”, and a wish to see differently is not a programme for anyone to join.

    “This Sea” is looked at, not walked beside with company, and the only figure the poem ever stands anywhere is the “I” of line 11, alone on “this pleasant lea.” A plural pronoun is a claim about who is implicated, not a count of the people present.

  7. Passage B, above: Wordsworth, “The World Is Too Much with Us,” 1807, lines 5–8.

    5This Sea that bares her bosom to the moon;
    The winds that will be howling at all hours,
    And are up-gathered now like sleeping flowers;
    For this, for everything, we are out of tune;

    In context, lines 5–7 primarily serve to

    The winds are doing the opposite of breaking: they “are up-gathered now,” stilled, and “will be howling at all hours” names their habit rather than tonight's weather. Reading a habitual future as a forecast turns a quiet evening into a storm the poem never has.

    The city is not in the poem. “Getting and spending” names an activity, and the sonnet's charge is against a way of living that could be carried on anywhere, which is why the cure it imagines is a change of sight, not a change of address.

    Indifference is precisely what these lines refuse. The sea is given a bosom and the moon something to bare it to; the winds are given voices and then sleep. Whatever indifference the poem finds runs the other way, and belongs to “us.”

    Correct. Two comparisons do the work in three lines: the sea is personified, and the winds are personified (“howling”) and then handed a simile (“like sleeping flowers”) that makes them small, gathered, and asleep. A seascape becomes a presence with moods, and line 8 draws the conclusion at once: “we are out of tune.” The tuning metaphor needs something to be out of tune with, and these lines are what supply it.

  8. Passage B, above: Wordsworth, “The World Is Too Much with Us,” 1807, lines 8–10.

    For this, for everything, we are out of tune;
    It moves us not.—Great God! I'd rather be
    10A Pagan suckled in a creed outworn;

    The primary effect of placing the sonnet's turn inside line 9 rather than at its beginning is to

    The sestet rhymes cdcdcd (be, lea, sea against outworn, forlorn, horn), and the poem never reaches a couplet at all. Reading the rhyme sounds aloud is a five-second check worth making before any claim about form.

    Correct. “It moves us not.” closes the octave's case in four words, and then, with no line to breathe in, “Great God! I'd rather be” arrives in the same line, in the singular, at a pitch nothing before it prepared. An Italian sonnet is expected to turn at line 9; this one turns in the middle of line 9, and the half-line of running-room is what makes the wish sound blurted instead of argued. A reader could reasonably call the outburst theatrical rather than genuine: the placement is the evidence either way.

    The sea stays in the third person from line 5 to line 13, and the only direct address in the poem is the exclamation “Great God!” Turning a cry into an apostrophe to nature mistakes who is being spoken to.

    The final couplet is the English sonnet's hinge, and this poem is Italian: octave abbaabba, sestet cdcdcd, with the turn at line 9 and six lines still to run. Naming the form correctly tells you where to look for the argument to move.

  9. Passage B, above: Wordsworth, “The World Is Too Much with Us,” 1807, lines 11–14.

    So might I, standing on this pleasant lea,
    Have glimpses that would make me less forlorn;
    Have sight of Proteus rising from the sea;
    Or hear old Triton blow his wreathèd horn.

    The references to Proteus and Triton (lines 13–14) function chiefly to

    Display is a real motive in some allusions, but the verbs here argue against it: the speaker wants to “Have sight of” and to “hear,” and a man performing his education would be naming rather than looking. An allusion question asks what the borrowed figure does in this poem, not what it proves about its author.

    The wish is contrary to fact from the start, “I'd rather be / A Pagan suckled in a creed outworn”, and a creed the speaker himself calls outworn is not one he expects to come back. Prophecy needs a future the sonnet never offers.

    Correct. An allusion works by importing what a reader already knows, and these two bring exactly one thing: sea-gods doing sea-things, Proteus rising and Triton sounding his horn. Put at the end, they answer the octave's own complaint: the sea that “bares her bosom” in line 5 would, to a pagan's eye, be inhabited rather than merely observed. Notice that the poem asks for perception, not doctrine (“glimpses,” “sight,” “hear”), which is why it ends on two visible figures instead of a belief.

    No government appears anywhere in the poem, ancient or modern. Greece enters as mythology, and the charge in the octave is against how people spend their attention, not how they are governed.

  10. Passage B, above: Wordsworth, “The World Is Too Much with Us,” 1807.

    All of the following help the octave present modern life as a kind of loss EXCEPT

    This one does the work. “Lay waste” is the vocabulary of ruined ground, and it is attached to “our powers,” which makes the damage self-inflicted rather than suffered. A true contributor is not the exception.

    Correct: this is the exception. The howling winds belong to the natural world the sonnet is defending, not to the life it is charging; they describe what we have lost the use of, not anything we have done. In an EXCEPT item, three options share one job and the fourth quietly changes subject, so test each option against the question rather than against your sense of the poem as a whole.

    This contributes too, and the key is “boon.” A boon is a gift or a blessing, and calling the exchange “sordid” makes the trade itself the loss: hearts handed over for something cheap.

    And so does this. “Out of tune” is the octave's own summary of the damage, and the metaphor defines the loss as a lost capacity rather than a lost possession, which is what the sestet then tries to buy back with a creed.

Lesson 3.1 · Unit 3 · Longer Fiction or Drama I · CHR 1.A, 1.D

First impressions: how a long work introduces a character

A novel's first page does two things at once. It hands you a few facts, and it trains you to expect certain things. The facts arrive slowly; the expectations arrive immediately.

So read an opening twice, once for what you were told, once for what you were asked to take for granted. And when characters talk, listen to the relationship the exchange builds, not only to the news it carries. Who begins, who repeats, who declines to answer: that pattern is evidence, and it is usually steadier than anything either speaker claims.

Key terms
  • Direct and indirect characterization (CHR 1.A): what a narrator asserts about a person versus what speech and action let you infer. The assertion is information; the inference is where an argument can start.
  • Narrative premise (CHR 1.A): the assumption an opening asks you to accept before you have met anyone. Test it against the scene that follows rather than repeating it.
  • Dialogue as relationship (CHR 1.D): the shape of the turns. Length, order, and interruption tell you who holds power in a conversation and what it costs to hold it.
  • Withholding (CHR 1.D): silence in an exchange is an act, not a gap. Ask what the refusal to answer does to the other speaker.
  • Reported versus quoted speech (NAR 4.A): a narrator who summarizes one character and quotes another has already made a judgment. Notice who gets the page.
Text

About the text: Jane Austen, Pride and Prejudice, first published 1813, chapter 1: the opening sentence and the first exchange between Mr. and Mrs. Bennet. The ellipsis marks the cut.

It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.

…

“My dear Mr. Bennet,” said his lady to him one day, “have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?”

Mr. Bennet replied that he had not.

“But it is,” returned she; “for Mrs. Long has just been here, and she told me all about it.”

Mr. Bennet made no answer.

“Do not you want to know who has taken it?” cried his wife impatiently.

“You want to tell me, and I have no objection to hearing it.”

This was invitation enough.

Model analysis

The Bennets' first exchange settles their marriage before the novel describes it. Mrs. Bennet arrives carrying news and a question, “have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?”, and her husband answers by not answering: he “replied that he had not,” then “made no answer” at all. Austen quotes her in full and summarizes him in a clause, so the page itself gives her the noise and him the control. When he does speak, “You want to tell me, and I have no objection to hearing it” grants her the floor as a favour, which is one way of keeping it. Another reader could hear long-married teasing in the same line and argue the marriage is comfortable rather than cold; the passage will carry either, which is exactly why it is an interpretation to defend and not a meaning to announce.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “Austen uses dialogue to show their marriage” names a technique; “his turns are summarized and hers are quoted” explains one.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this opening asks a reader to assume about a wealthy newcomer, and who in the chapter actually holds that assumption. Make a claim a careful reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each supports it.

Show a model response

Austen states a rule in the first sentence and then quietly shows that it belongs to one household rather than to the world. “It is a truth universally acknowledged” sounds like settled public opinion, but the sentence never names a person who holds it, and the first character to act on it is Mrs. Bennet, who treats a stranger's lease as family business. Her husband keeps his distance from the rule by keeping his distance from her: he “made no answer” to news she has obviously hurried in with. By the end of the page the universal truth has shrunk to the opinion of one anxious mother and the neighbors who agree with her, which is the claim the rest of the novel spends its time testing.

Rubric: the first sentence offers a defensible interpretation rather than a restatement of the prompt (Row A); the two quoted phrases, each followed by the sentence explaining what its wording does, are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 3.2 · Unit 3 · Longer Fiction or Drama I · CHR 1.B

Character development across a long work

A long work gives a character room to become someone else. The exam does not ask you to notice that a character changed; it asks you to explain what the work gains by changing her.

So stop describing the change as an event. “Jane stands up to her aunt” is plot. The analytic question is why the change is placed here, at this age, in this voice, and whether the person telling you about it has changed too. Ask the same of a character who stays as she was: standing still is also a function.

Key terms
  • Change as a function (CHR 1.B), not what happens to a character but what the work accomplishes by having it happen. Finish the sentence: the change functions to…
  • Dynamic character (CHR 1.B): one whose values, self-understanding, or relationships differ by the end. The difference has to be in the person, not only in her circumstances.
  • Static character (CHR 1.B): one who does not change, and who therefore measures everyone who does. A static character holds a value still so a shift becomes visible against it.
  • Turning point (CHR 1.B): the scene after which the old version is no longer available. Find it by looking for the first act the character could not have performed a chapter earlier.
  • Retrospective narration (NAR 4.B), when an older self narrates a younger self, two people occupy the page. The distance between them is evidence about both.
Text

Description of: Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre, first published 1847, chapter 4: Jane's outburst to Mrs. Reed after Mr. Brocklehurst's visit. Paraphrased, not quoted.

Brocklehurst has just gone. In front of him, and in Jane's hearing, Mrs. Reed called the child a liar who must be watched at Lowood, and left her a book about a girl who died after lying. Mrs. Reed now tells Jane to go back to the nursery. Jane does not go.

She answers her aunt for the first time, and the speech is short and flat. She refuses the word she has been handed: she is not deceitful, because if she were she would claim to love Mrs. Reed, and she does not love her, and dislikes her more than anyone alive except John Reed. The book about the liar should go to Georgiana, the real liar of the house. Then she cancels the relation itself: she is glad they are not truly family, she will never call Mrs. Reed aunt again, and if anyone asks how she was treated she will say the thought of her aunt makes her sick.

The voice reporting all this is not the child's. Before the speech is even finished, the narrator says, her soul began to expand and to exult with a freedom she had never known, as though an invisible bond had snapped. Afterwards she reaches for a figure from the moors: a ridge of heath on fire, and then the same ridge blackened and dead once the flames have burned out.

Wording here is paraphrase; quote the novel itself when you write on this chapter.

Model analysis

Jane's outburst matters because it changes what she is permitted to be, not because she finally loses her temper. Mrs. Reed's charge is a word, deceitful, and Jane's first independent act is to refuse the word and hand it back, assigning the lying to Georgiana. Her second is to cancel a title, announcing that she will never say aunt again. Both are acts of naming, and a child who can name is no longer only named; that is a change in her standing, not merely in her mood. But Brontë refuses to let the victory stand alone. The narrator reporting it is the grown Jane, and her figure runs in two directions: a ridge of heath alight, then the same ridge black and finished. The change functions to show what self-assertion costs a person who has nowhere to take it. Another reader could call the blackened ridge exhaustion rather than regret, and the chapter supports that too, which is why the reading has to be argued.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “Jane changes in chapter 4” is plot summary; “she takes back the word her aunt used to define her” explains a change.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Brontë gains by letting the adult narrator, rather than the child, describe how the outburst felt. Build the paragraph on two specific details, name them precisely instead of quoting, and explain how each supports your claim.

Show a model response

Splitting the scene between the child who speaks and the adult who remembers lets Brontë approve of the outburst and doubt it in the same breath. The child's half is pure refusal: she gives back the word deceitful, sends the liar's book on to Georgiana, and drops the word aunt. If the chapter ended there we would have a straightforward rescue. But the voice describing the feeling is decades older, and the two figures it reaches for do not agree: a bond snapping into freedom, and then a ridge of heath burnt down to nothing. The adult narrator is telling us both that the freedom was real and that it emptied her out. A child's voice could deliver the first judgment; only the retrospective one delivers both.

Rubric: the opening sentence is a defensible interpretation rather than a summary (Row A); the named details, each followed by a sentence explaining what the two figures do to each other, are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 3.3 · Unit 3 · Longer Fiction or Drama I · SET 2.B, 2.C

Setting as a force on character

In a short story the setting can be a mood. In a novel it is a condition: something the characters have lived under long enough to be shaped by it.

So ask a physical question before an atmospheric one. What does this place make difficult? What does it make impossible, or inevitable? A house that has to be built against the wind tells you what the wind does to everything else standing out there, people included.

Key terms
  • Function of setting (SET 2.B): what the place does to the story: closes off a choice, forces a meeting, hardens a person, makes an ending look inevitable. Name the verb.
  • Landscape as record (SET 2.B): weather leaves marks. A detail that records a force (a slant, a scar, a repair) is stronger evidence than a detail that only describes one.
  • Built environment (SET 2.C): architecture is a set of decisions about people: what a door admits, what a window keeps out, whose name is over the entrance.
  • Character and place (SET 2.C): the relationship itself is arguable. Belonging, exile, endurance, siege: choose the word and then prove it from the description.
  • The visiting observer (SET 2.C, NAR 4.A): a newcomer describes a place by what surprises him. His surprise measures the distance between him and the people who live there.
Text

About the text: Emily Brontë, Wuthering Heights, first published 1847, chapter 1: Lockwood outside the house on his first visit. The ellipses mark cuts.

Wuthering Heights is the name of Mr. Heathcliff's dwelling. “Wuthering” being a significant provincial adjective, descriptive of the atmospheric tumult to which its station is exposed in stormy weather. … one may guess the power of the north wind blowing over the edge, by the excessive slant of a few stunted firs at the end of the house; and by a range of gaunt thorns all stretching their limbs one way, as if craving alms of the sun.

…

Before passing the threshold, I paused to admire a quantity of grotesque carving lavished over the front, and especially about the principal door; above which … I detected the date “1500,” and the name “Hareton Earnshaw.”

Model analysis

Brontë introduces the Heights as a place where force is readable in whatever has had to survive it. There is no storm scene; the wind is inferred, “guessed” from “the excessive slant of a few stunted firs” and from thorns “craving alms of the sun.” Both details record a pressure rather than describe one, so the exposure registers as climate rather than weather: the ordinary condition of anything that grows here, and the posture it has to grow in. The carving does the same work in human time. Above the door Lockwood finds a date, 1500, and a name, Hareton Earnshaw, which is not the name of the man who owns the house and will not be explained for another two hundred pages. The setting functions to make possession look temporary and pressure permanent: the arrangement the novel's characters spend three generations inside. A reader could argue instead that the menace is Lockwood's, not the place's, since he calls the carving grotesque before anyone has let him in; the passage supports that reading too.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “The setting is bleak” paraphrases; “the wind is visible only in the shape of the firs” explains a function.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this setting does to the people who live in it: a function, not a mood. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each produces the effect you name.

Show a model response

Emily Brontë builds a house at war with its own weather, and the living things around it have all taken the same posture. Lockwood reads the north wind backwards, guessing its power from “the excessive slant of a few stunted firs”: growth that has been bent rather than stopped, which is a fair description of what the Heights does to the people it keeps. Even the thorns are “craving alms of the sun,” beggars on their own ground, reaching for something the place will not hand over. Nothing here is destroyed and nothing here is comfortable; things go on living in the shape the site has given them. The setting functions to prepare a reader for characters who endure one another rather than escape.

Rubric: the first sentence claims a function rather than an atmosphere (Row A); each quoted phrase is followed by the sentence explaining what its wording does, which is the commentary Row B pays for (Row B).

Lesson 3.4 · Unit 3 · Longer Fiction or Drama I · STR 3.E, 3.F

Conflict and plot structure: name it before you explain it

Plot is not the list of things that happen. It is the arrangement, which event is allowed to change what the characters can do next. Conflict is what does the arranging, and “character versus society” is too blunt a name to build an argument on.

So name a conflict the way a lawyer would: who wants what, from whom, and what happens if they do not get it. Then ask the question the exam pays for: what does this particular conflict let the work show that nothing else could? In a play you have to answer from speech and stage directions alone. No narrator will step in to tell you what anyone is feeling.

Key terms
  • External conflict (STR 3.E): a struggle between a character and a force outside her: a person, an institution, a law. Name both parties and the thing each one wants. A conflict you cannot state as a demand is not stated yet.
  • Internal conflict (STR 3.E): a struggle inside one person between two things she genuinely values. It becomes visible only when a choice is forced, so find the line that forces it.
  • Significant event (STR 3.F): the event after which the situation is different and an option has closed. Test a candidate by asking what becomes impossible once it has happened.
  • The turn staged in dialogue (STR 3.F): a play cannot narrate a discovery, so the discovery has to arrive as something one character says to another. Often the turn is a question rather than a revelation.
  • Stage business (STR 3.E, SET 2.C): what a character does with her hands and the furniture while she speaks. When the business and the speech disagree, the disagreement is your evidence.
Text

About the text: Henrik Ibsen, A Doll's House, first published 1879; Act I: Krogstad's first private scene with Nora. Described from William Archer's public-domain English translation (1889).

Description of: the exchange in which Krogstad first presses Nora about the signature on the bond, and the stage business that follows it. Paraphrased, not quoted.

Nora is playing hide-and-seek with the children when Krogstad appears in the hall doorway; a stage direction gives her a half-stifled cry, and the children go out. He asks politely for her influence with her husband, to keep his bank post; when she will not promise, he changes ground and asks about dates. Her father died on the twenty-ninth of September; the bond is dated the second of October, and that date, he says, is not her father's hand. He asks whether she signed her father's name herself. She says she did, and defends it: her husband's life had to be saved, her father was dying. Krogstad answers that the law asks nothing about motives; she says it must be a bad law. He warns that if he goes back into the mud she will keep him company, then goes out.

Then the business takes over: Nora tosses her head, says he only means to frighten her, then half admits he may not. The maid brings in the Christmas tree, and she decorates it while her sentences stop finishing.

This is paraphrase, and translations of Ibsen differ line by line. Quote the wording in the edition in front of you, name your translator, and cite by act.

Model analysis

The conflict here is not Nora against society; it is Krogstad asking for a job and, when the asking fails, trading on a date. Name it that precisely and the structure becomes legible. He opens with a request, meets a refusal, and switches from persuasion to evidence: the twenty-ninth of September against the second of October. Those three days are the turn of the act. Before them Nora's secret is a private triumph she has told only Mrs. Linde about; after them it is a document somebody else is holding. Ibsen makes that change happen entirely in dialogue: Krogstad asks questions, and her own answers convict her. The internal conflict surfaces in the same breath, since she admits the forgery and defends it at once, which puts all three of her loyalties (the law, her dying father's peace, her husband's life) on stage together. Then the business finishes what a narrator would otherwise say: she hangs ornaments on a tree while assuring herself there is nothing to fear, and her hands keep the holiday going after her sentences have given up. Another reader could argue the real turn comes later in the act, when Torvald describes what a forger does to his own children, which is why the choice has to be argued rather than assumed.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “Ibsen builds tension through conflict” names a category; “he moves Krogstad from asking to dating the signature” explains one.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Ibsen gains by letting the forgery come out through Krogstad's questions rather than through a confession Nora volunteers. Build the paragraph on two specific details, name them precisely instead of quoting, and explain how each one supports your claim.

Show a model response

Making Krogstad the one who produces the forgery turns Nora's rescue of her husband into somebody else's property, and it does that in front of us rather than in a speech about it. He does not accuse her; he asks her for the date of her father's death, then reads out the date on the bond, and the gap of three days does the accusing. Because the discovery arrives as arithmetic, Nora has to supply the admission herself, and the audience watches her hand it over. A confession would have made her the author of the scene. The questions make her its subject, which is the position the rest of the play keeps her in, and the Christmas tree she decorates a minute later, still talking herself out of it, shows how little of that position she can yet see.

Rubric: the first sentence is a defensible interpretation rather than a summary (Row A); each named detail is followed by the sentence explaining what it does to Nora's standing, which is the commentary Row B pays for (Row B).

Lesson 3.5 · Unit 3 · Longer Fiction or Drama I · NAR 4.B, 4.C

Narrative distance: how close the narrator stands

Third person is not one distance. A narrator can stand at the back of the room and report, or move close enough to use a character's own vocabulary, and Austen changes the distance inside a single sentence.

So stop asking whether a narrator is reliable and start asking how far away she is standing right now, and what the position lets you see. Free indirect style is the instrument: the narration keeps its own grammar but borrows somebody else's words, which means it can agree with a character and grade her in the same breath. The test is simple: would this character say that phrase about herself?

Key terms
  • Narrative distance (NAR 4.B): how near the narration stands to a character's mind. It is a dial the narrator turns sentence by sentence, not a setting fixed on the first page.
  • Free indirect style (NAR 4.C): third-person, past-tense narration that carries a character's diction and judgments with no quotation marks and no “she thought.” You identify it by vocabulary, not by punctuation.
  • Focalization (NAR 4.B), whose eyes the scene is seen through, which is a different question from whose voice is telling it. A narrator can look through one character and speak as herself.
  • The hedge (NAR 4.C): seemed, rather, a little, at present. Every softening word belongs to somebody. Ask who is doing the softening and what it buys.
  • The narrator's audit (NAR 4.D): the sentence that reports what the character cannot see. The gap it opens between her knowledge and yours is the ground a whole novel can stand on.
Text

About the text: Jane Austen, Emma, first published 1815, chapter 1: the opening paragraphs, from the sentence introducing Emma through the sentence naming the real evils of her situation.

Description of: those opening paragraphs and the words that set the narrator's distance. Paraphrased, not quoted.

The first sentence introduces Emma with three adjectives (handsome, clever, rich) gives her a comfortable home and happy disposition, then hedges with a verb: she seemed to have nearly everything life offers. Nearly twenty-one years have passed with little to distress or vex her. She is the younger daughter of an indulgent father, mistress of his house since her sister married; her mother died too early to leave more than an indistinct memory, and the governess, Miss Taylor, fell little short of a mother in affection.

Sixteen years of Miss Taylor in the family, and lately less a governess than a friend, the shadow of authority long gone, so that Emma has done very much as she liked, respecting Miss Taylor's judgment but guided chiefly by her own. Then the paragraph turns on a noun: the real evils of her situation are that she has rather too much her own way and thinks a little too well of herself. The danger, it ends, is so far unperceived that it does not rank with Emma as a misfortune.

This is paraphrase. Quote Austen's own sentences from the edition in front of you, the exact adjectives and adverbs are the evidence here, and cite by chapter.

Model analysis

Austen's opening lends Emma her own good opinion and then quietly audits it, and the whole operation runs on small words. The three adjectives that introduce her (handsome, clever, rich) are the terms a neighbourhood uses to rank a young woman, not the terms a narrator needs; borrowing them places us inside Highbury's estimate rather than outside it. Then the verb seemed goes in, doing two jobs at once: it keeps the estimate and marks it as an estimate. The sentence about her faults works the same way. The noun is severe, evils, but the measurements are rather too much and a little too well, which are exactly the sizes Emma would allow her own failings to be, so the sentence convicts her in her own vocabulary. That is what free indirect style is for. Then comes the clause nobody inside the paragraph could have written: the danger is unperceived. The narration steps back from Emma's account to report what she cannot see, and from there a reader knows something about her that she does not. Another reader could call the hedges affection rather than irony (Austen is fond of Emma, and fondness softens too), and the paragraph will carry that, so long as it is argued against the word evils.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “Austen uses free indirect discourse” names a device; “Emma's faults are measured in the adverbs Emma herself would have chosen” explains one.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing how far this narrator stands from Emma, and what the distance lets Austen do that Emma telling her own story could not. Name three specific words from the passage and explain what each one does to the distance.

Show a model response

Austen keeps the narrator close enough to use Emma's words and far enough to grade them. Handsome, clever, rich is how Highbury would introduce her, and letting that phrase stand unchallenged makes a reader begin where the village begins. But seemed is not Highbury's word; it is the narrator's, and it converts the village's description into an estimate the novel is free to test. By the time the paragraph reaches the real evils of Emma's situation the double position is doing open work: the noun is harsh, the adverbs (rather, a little) are generous, and the mismatch between them is the judgment. An Emma telling her own story could produce the generosity or the harshness, never both in one sentence. That is what the third person buys here: a heroine who is charming and overrated at once, and a reader who can see both before she can.

Rubric: the opening sentence is a defensible interpretation rather than a description of technique (Row A); the three named words, each followed by a sentence explaining what it does to the distance, are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 3.6 · Unit 3 · Longer Fiction or Drama I · LAN 7.B

From claim to thesis: writing a sentence worth defending

A claim becomes a thesis when a careful reader could disagree with it and still be reading the same book. That is the whole of Row A, and it is the cheapest point on the exam to lose.

You lose it three ways: by handing the prompt back with the nouns rearranged, by summarizing what happens, or by saying something so obviously true that no evidence could bear on it. You earn it by writing one sentence somebody could argue against, and then spending forty minutes making that somebody wrong.

Key terms
  • Defensible interpretation (LAN 7.B): a claim about what a text does or means that the text can support and a reasonable reader could dispute. Both halves are required; a claim nobody would fight is not defensible, it is just safe.
  • Restatement (LAN 7.B): the prompt returned in new word order. It promises the reader nothing, so it earns nothing.
  • Summary in thesis position (LAN 7.B): a sentence about what happens rather than about what the happening does. Test it: is there a verb the author performs?
  • The opposability test (LAN 7.B): write the opposite of your sentence. If the opposite is absurd, or if it is equally unarguable, you do not have a thesis yet.
  • Scope (LAN 7.C): a thesis promises a line of reasoning. Name the elements the essay will actually use and no more; four elements promised in forty minutes means a fragment of each.
Text

About the text: Nathaniel Hawthorne, The Scarlet Letter, first published 1850, chapter 2 (“The Market-Place”): Hester coming out of the prison door and crossing to the scaffold.

Description of: that exit and the walk to the pillory, with the details the narration lingers on. Paraphrased, not quoted.

The prison door opens; the town beadle comes out first, with sword and staff of office. He lays a hand on the shoulder of the young woman behind him; she shakes it off with what the narrator calls natural dignity and walks into the open air as though by her own will. She carries a baby three months old, which blinks and turns from the daylight it has never seen. On the breast of her gown is the letter A, cut in red cloth and worked round with gold thread; the women outside complain that she has made an ornament of her sentence and is handy with a needle.

Her first movement is to press the child against her, less from tenderness, the narration says, than to cover the letter; then she thinks better of it, since one token would hide another badly, and carries the baby on her arm, burning red and smiling a haughty smile. The narration then turns to judgment: the letter takes her out of ordinary human relations and shuts her in a sphere by herself.

This is paraphrase. Quote Hawthorne's sentences from the edition in front of you, the narrator's own adjectives are half the evidence here, and cite by chapter.

Scoring three theses

Three candidate first sentences on this passage, each scored against Row A.

  • 0: “In chapter 2 of The Scarlet Letter, Hester Prynne is led out of prison and made to stand before the townspeople with her baby and her scarlet letter.” Every word is true and none of it is arguable. It reports the scene instead of interpreting it, and Row A pays for a claim, not an accurate sentence.
  • 0: “Hawthorne uses imagery, symbolism, and irony to show the harshness of Puritan society.” This restates what the prompt already assumes and hangs three device names on it. Run the test: a gentle Puritan society is not a reading anybody could defend from this page, so nothing in the sentence needs proving.
  • 1 ( “By letting Hester shake off the beadle's hand and then refuse to hide the letter behind her child, Hawthorne turns a punishment staged to display her shame into an occasion she partly controls, so that the scene becomes a contest over who says what the letter means.” It interprets rather than reports, names the evidence the essay will use, and invites a real opponent) the burning blush is right there, and a reader can argue it shows the display winning.
Model analysis

Hawthorne stages the exit as a series of small transfers of control, which is why the third thesis can be defended. The beadle's hand goes on Hester's shoulder and comes straight off again; she reaches the open air as though by her own will, so the first thing the crowd sees is a woman arriving rather than a prisoner produced. The gold thread does the same work in the other direction. The sentence the magistrates imposed was a letter; what she wears is embroidery, and the women outside grasp the difference immediately when they complain she is handy with a needle: a punishment has been answered with craft. The decisive moment is the one the narrator refuses to sentimentalize: she lifts the child to cover the letter, works out that one token hides another badly, and puts the baby on her arm instead. That is a calculation made in public, and it leaves the letter where the town wanted it while making the leaving a choice. The blush that arrives with the haughty smile keeps the reading honest, the control is real and it is costing her, and a reader who leads with the blush can argue the opposite case from the same three details.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary that explains how the evidence works. “The letter symbolizes shame” names a symbol; “the sentence was a letter and what she wears is embroidery” explains what the text does with one.

Write it

Write a defensible thesis about the function of the infant in this scene, what Hawthorne gains by putting a three-month-old on the scaffold, then one paragraph defending it from two named details. Finish with one sentence giving the strongest objection a careful reader could make to your thesis.

Show a model response

Thesis. Hawthorne gives Hester a child she must either hide behind or hold up, and since she cannot do both, the infant forces her to decide in public what the letter is going to mean.

The narrator is careful to say that the first press of the child to her breast is not motherly; it is cover, and the sentence admits as much before the crowd can. That admission turns the next movement into a decision rather than an instinct: she works out that one token would hide another badly, shifts the baby to her arm, and leaves the letter in plain sight. The infant is also the only figure on the scaffold with no idea what is happening, blinking and turning from a light it has never seen while everyone stares at what its mother is wearing. Setting an unknowing three-month-old beside a woman who has just chosen exactly how to be looked at measures how much of this scene is sentence and how much is performance.

Objection. A reader could answer that the blush arrives in the same breath as the smile, which makes Hester's arrangement of the child look less like control than like the best face she can manage over shame.

Rubric: the thesis interprets rather than reports and could be argued against (Row A); the two named details, each followed by the sentence explaining what it does, are evidence and commentary, and the objection is the beginning of the tension Row C rewards when an essay holds it open.

Unit 3 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 3 review: character, setting, and the turn

Ten exam-style items on a novel opening and a scene from a play this unit did not teach, the first page of Great Expectations and the moment in King Lear when a daughter answers a king with a single word, so that the unit's skills have to travel to text you are meeting cold.

Multiple choice

  1. Passage A. About the text: Charles Dickens, Great Expectations, first published in weekly parts 1860–61; the opening chapter, in a churchyard on the marshes where Pip's parents are buried. Pip, who narrates the novel as a grown man, is about seven years old in the scene. The ellipsis stands for a further stretch of the same sentence, in which the child also makes out his parents' gravestones and the flat marshland beyond them.

    My first most vivid and broad impression of the identity of things seems to me to have been gained on a memorable raw afternoon towards evening. At such a time I found out for certain that this bleak place overgrown with nettles was the churchyard; … and that the distant savage lair from which the wind was rushing was the sea; and that the small bundle of shivers growing afraid of it all and beginning to cry, was Pip.

    “Hold your noise!” cried a terrible voice, as a man started up from among the graves.

    In context, the sequence of things the narrator “found out for certain” primarily serves to

    The sentence does supply geography, but that is the information it carries, not the work it performs; a function question asks what the information is being used for. An answer that stops at the literal content is a paraphrase wearing the costume of an analysis, and it is the single commonest wrong choice on this exam.

    Nothing in the excerpt gives a reason for the burials: only that this bleak place is the churchyard. Supplying a cause the passage withholds turns a description into a plot you have invented.

    Correct. Read the grammar rather than the scenery. One repeated construction, “and that X was Y”, runs from the nettles to the churchyard to the sea and then, without changing shape, arrives at “the small bundle of shivers … was Pip.” The boy is identified by the same sentence and the same syntax that identify the landscape, so setting is not a backdrop here; it is the thing doing the identifying.

    No home appears in the passage, and no warmth. A contrast needs two terms actually on the page, and importing the second one from a later chapter or from a summary you half-remember is how a setting question gets lost.

  2. Passage A, above: Dickens, Great Expectations, 1860–61, ch. 1.

    … and that the small bundle of shivers growing afraid of it all and beginning to cry, was Pip.

    The introduction of the novel's protagonist in this clause is most notable for the fact that

    Correct. The noun phrase does the characterising before the name does: he is “the small bundle of shivers,” a thing made of trembling, and the only verbs attached to him, “growing afraid,” “beginning to cry”, are things happening to him rather than things he does. The name lands at the very end, after four other identifications, which is why a first-time reader meets Pip as the smallest item in his own world.

    Pip does not speak in the excerpt; the only speech belongs to the voice from the graves. A first impression built out of dialogue is a real technique, it is how Pride and Prejudice opens, but it is not what is happening here, and swapping one method for another is the trap.

    Nobody in the passage has an opinion of Pip. He is alone until the last line, and even the man who appears gives him an order rather than an assessment.

    The order is the reverse: he is described for a full clause and named in the final word. Getting the sequence backwards loses the whole point, because the delay of the name is what makes the description land as a condition rather than a portrait.

  3. Passage A, above: Dickens, Great Expectations, 1860–61, ch. 1.

    My first most vivid and broad impression of the identity of things seems to me to have been gained on a memorable raw afternoon towards evening. … and that the small bundle of shivers growing afraid of it all and beginning to cry, was Pip.

    The phrase “seems to me to have been gained,” taken together with the naming of the crying child as “Pip” rather than as “me,” indicates that the narration is

    The hedge is about memory, not about fact. “Seems to me to have been gained” concedes that a first impression is hard to date precisely; it does not doubt the afternoon, which the same sentence calls “memorable.” Read what a modal verb is actually qualifying before you turn it into scepticism.

    The possessive rules it out: “My first most vivid and broad impression.” The memory belongs to the speaker, so the distance here is distance in time, not distance in place: a difference worth keeping straight, because only one of them can be closed by growing up.

    One voice speaks throughout. A narrator who calls his younger self by name has not been replaced; he has stepped back from himself, which is a move within a single narration rather than a change of narrator.

    Correct. Both signals point the same way. “Seems to me” is the adult weighing an old impression, and “was Pip” lets that adult look at the child from outside, as one more object in the churchyard. Distance is a dial, not a switch: the telling is close enough to know exactly how frightened the boy was and far enough to name him as though he were someone else.

  4. Passage A, above: Dickens, Great Expectations, 1860–61, ch. 1.

    … and that the small bundle of shivers growing afraid of it all and beginning to cry, was Pip.

    “Hold your noise!” cried a terrible voice, as a man started up from among the graves.

    Placing “Hold your noise!” immediately after the excerpt's long opening sentence functions chiefly to

    It is a fair inference, the crying is in the previous clause and the order is to stop it, but it answers a question about plausibility rather than about effect. Notice how little this reading would change if the interruption came three paragraphs later; a structural answer should stop working the moment you move the line.

    Correct. Everything before it is stative: things were the churchyard, were the sea, was Pip. Then a verb of action arrives from outside the list, “cried,” “started up”, and it lands on the very sentence in which the boy has just finished being catalogued. The turning point of the chapter is not announced; it cuts in, and it takes the child's self-description away from him mid-breath.

    The narration does not change hands. The voice that cries out is quoted by the same narrator who has been speaking, and the paragraph break marks a new event, not a new teller.

    The location has already been established in detail (churchyard, sea, wind, evening) before the voice speaks. A line cannot delay information the passage has just finished giving you.

  5. Passage A, above: Dickens, Great Expectations, 1860–61, ch. 1.

    A student must write an analytic essay on the excerpt. Which of the following works best as a thesis?

    This is summary. It reports the order of events accurately and takes no position, so there is nothing in it a careful reader could argue against, which is the test Row A applies. A sentence that cannot be disagreed with cannot be defended either.

    Closer, because “bleak and frightening” is at least a judgment, but it is a judgment almost any reader would reach in one pass, and “creates a dark mood” names an effect without naming what produces it. Restating the obvious in the vocabulary of mood is the most common way a thesis stalls at zero.

    Correct. It makes a claim about how the passage works (the list, the delayed name), states the consequence of that technique (the boy read as part of the place), and reaches a conclusion a careful reader could contest: someone could argue the convict is exactly a stranger, an intruder from outside the marsh world. That contestability is what makes it defensible, and the essay it opens has a clear line of reasoning to follow: the syntax, then the naming, then the interruption.

    Listing devices is not an interpretation. “Vivid imagery, repetition, and figurative language” could be written about nearly any page of Dickens without reading this one, and a claim that survives without the text cannot be supported by it.

  6. Passage B. About the text: William Shakespeare, King Lear, Act I, scene i (written about 1605–06), in the text of the Globe edition. Lear has announced that he will divide his kingdom among his three daughters according to how much each of them says she loves him; Goneril and Regan have spoken and been rewarded, and he now turns to Cordelia, his youngest and his favorite. Lines are numbered as printed here, from the beginning of the excerpt. Within fifty lines of its close Lear disowns Cordelia and divides her third between her sisters.

    LEAR. … what can you say to draw
    A third more opulent than your sisters? Speak.

    CORDELIA. Nothing, my lord.

    LEAR. Nothing?

    5 CORDELIA. Nothing.

    LEAR. Nothing will come of nothing: speak again.

    CORDELIA. Unhappy that I am, I cannot heave
    My heart into my mouth: I love your majesty
    According to my bond; nor more nor less.

    10 LEAR. How, how, Cordelia! mend your speech a little,
    Lest you may mar your fortunes.

    Cordelia's “Nothing, my lord,” and her repetition of the word most clearly introduce her as a character who

    She understands it exactly. Lear asks what she can say to draw a richer third, and “nothing” is a precise answer to that precise question: she has nothing to say, which is not the same as having nothing to feel. A character who answers the question's own verb has not misheard it.

    Strategy of that kind would need some sign of calculation, and the scene gives the opposite: offered a second try and then a warning about her fortunes, she does not adjust. A first impression is built from what a character does when the pressure rises, and hers is to hold still.

    Fear would be silence or retreat. Cordelia answers immediately, answers again when questioned, and then speaks four lines that define her position: “I cannot heave / My heart into my mouth” is a refusal explained, not a stammer.

    Correct. The repetition is the characterisation. Her first “Nothing” could be nerves; the flat second one, given after Lear has queried it, converts a word into a position. And notice what she refuses: not her father, but a ceremony that asks love to be produced on demand and measured against her sisters'. That distinction is the whole of her in one word, and the tragedy begins because Lear cannot hear it.

  7. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, King Lear, I.i, excerpt lines 1–9.

    … what can you say to draw
    A third more opulent than your sisters? Speak. … I love your majesty
    According to my bond; nor more nor less.

    The central conflict established in the excerpt is best described as one between

    Correct. Name the conflict from the verbs both sides use. Lear's demand is about speech, “what can you say … Speak”, and Cordelia's answer is about the impossibility of speech: she “cannot heave / My heart into my mouth.” Neither of them disputes that she loves him. What they cannot agree on is whether love said aloud in front of a court is the same thing as love, and the kingdom is being divided on that question.

    Cordelia asks for nothing and takes nothing. The ambition in this play belongs to her sisters, and reading it back onto her flattens the one daughter whose refusal is disinterested: a misreading worth catching early, because the rest of the plot depends on the difference.

    Goneril and Regan are mentioned only as a standard of comparison in Lear's question. They do not speak in the excerpt and are not set against each other in it; a conflict has to be staged on the page before you can call it central.

    No suitor appears here. France and Burgundy are in the scene elsewhere, but importing a pressure the excerpt does not stage is the fastest way to lose a conflict question: answer from the lines you are given.

  8. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, King Lear, I.i, excerpt lines 3–6.

    CORDELIA. Nothing, my lord.

    LEAR. Nothing?

    5 CORDELIA. Nothing.

    LEAR. Nothing will come of nothing: speak again.

    The exchange in lines 3–6 functions chiefly to

    The court is not shown reacting, and nothing in these four lines belongs to anyone but the two speakers. A pause that exists to let onlookers respond would need onlookers in it.

    Correct. Structure is the argument here. Goneril and Regan have just spent long, ornamented speeches buying their thirds, and Cordelia answers in one word, then the same word again, then hears it thrown back at her twice by her father: “Nothing will come of nothing.” Four lines of monosyllables sit at the centre of a ceremony made of eloquence, and the turning point of the whole tragedy happens inside them. A reader could argue the real turn comes later, when Lear disowns her; the tell is that by the end of line 6 he is already threatening, which means the break has happened.

    Her longer speech does not retract or refine the “nothing”; it explains why she said it. Treating a considered refusal as hesitation gives a decisive character a weakness the text does not grant her.

    Tempting, because a one-word question often means “say that again.” But Lear's next line answers the content rather than asking for a repeat: he argues with the word, and then offers her another attempt. Read what a character does immediately after a question to learn what the question meant.

  9. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, King Lear, I.i, excerpt lines 10–11.

    10 LEAR. How, how, Cordelia! mend your speech a little,
    Lest you may mar your fortunes.

    Lear's response in lines 10–11 most clearly reveals that he

    “Lest you may mar your fortunes” is a warning about loss, not an offer of restoration. He is holding her inheritance over the conversation, which is the opposite of setting it aside.

    He is the one who attached the stakes in the first place: the third is “more opulent” by the measure of what she says. A king who names the price cannot be unaware of it.

    Correct. Look at the two verbs he puts side by side: “mend your speech” and “mar your fortunes.” Better words, better estate; the rate of exchange is stated in a single line. This is why the scene is a turning point for him and not only for her: pressed by the one daughter who will not trade, he does not reconsider the trade, he raises the price. A reader might call this simple temper; the tell is that the sentence is conditional and commercial rather than angry, which suggests he still believes she will take the deal.

    He plainly retains the power: he threatens to use it in this very line, and he uses it within the scene. Confusing a decision already spoken with a decision that can no longer be changed misses how much of this scene Lear controls.

  10. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, King Lear, I.i.

    A student argues that Cordelia's “nothing” is not a refusal to love her father but a refusal to price her love. Which line from the excerpt most directly supports that reading?

    Correct. The claim has two halves, and this line is the only one in the excerpt that carries both. “I love your majesty” states the love outright, so the refusal cannot be a refusal to love; “According to my bond; nor more nor less” then fixes the amount and declines to inflate it, which is precisely a refusal to bid. Evidence that answers every part of a claim at once is what lets a line of reasoning move forward instead of stalling.

    This is the moment the claim is about, not evidence for it. On its own “Nothing, my lord” is silent on whether she loves him, which is exactly why the student's reading needs a different line to stand on. Quoting the thing you are interpreting is not the same as supporting the interpretation.

    The words are Lear's. A claim about what Cordelia refuses cannot be proved by what her father says about arithmetic, however neatly his line fits the theme of exchange. Check whose mouth a quotation comes out of before you build on it.

    Also Lear's, and it supports a claim about him: that he is still bargaining. It is good evidence for the wrong argument, which is a harder error to spot than a simply irrelevant quotation and the reason strong readers name the claim before they choose the line.

Lesson 4.1 · Unit 4 · Short Fiction II · CHR 1.D

Character relationships and what they reveal

Two people in a scene are two positions on one event. A relationship becomes evidence the moment you stop asking how they feel about each other and start asking what each is doing with the same minute.

The meaning sits in the gap. What one of them needs the moment to mean, and what the other declines to make it mean, is an asymmetry you can point to, and an asymmetry is arguable, which a feeling never is.

Key terms
  • Relationship as evidence (CHR 1.D): a pairing is a device: each person is placed where the other can be measured against them. Ask what the pairing makes visible.
  • Asymmetry (CHR 1.D): the two do not experience the scene equally. Name the difference between their positions before you name anybody's feelings.
  • What goes unsaid (CHR 1.D): a silence, a changed subject, an ordinary act performed at an extraordinary moment. What a character withholds is still text.
  • Complexity (CHR 1.D): a relationship that holds two things at once, such as intimacy and use. One adjective for a relationship is almost always wrong.
  • Commentary (LAN 7.A): the sentence explaining how a gesture between two people supports your claim, not a second description of the gesture.
Text

About the text: Anton Chekhov, “The Lady with the Dog,” first published 1899; translated by Constance Garnett, 1917 (The Tales of Chekhov, Vol. 3). From part II, in Anna Sergeyevna's hotel room just after she and Gurov have become lovers. Complete and unbroken.

The attitude of Anna Sergeyevna — “the lady with the dog” — to what had happened was somehow peculiar, very grave, as though it were her fall — so it seemed, and it was strange and inappropriate. Her face dropped and faded, and on both sides of it her long hair hung down mournfully; she mused in a dejected attitude like “the woman who was a sinner” in an old-fashioned picture.

“It's wrong,” she said. “You will be the first to despise me now.”

There was a water-melon on the table. Gurov cut himself a slice and began eating it without haste. There followed at least half an hour of silence.

Model analysis

Chekhov keeps these two in one room and gives each of them a different event to be in. Anna Sergeyevna takes the night as a fall, and the comparison the narration lends her, she “mused in a dejected attitude,” like a repentant sinner “in an old-fashioned picture”, supplies her grief with a frame and a title, as though it has to be large enough to hold what she believes she has done. Gurov reaches for the watermelon and eats it “without haste.” That is not cruelty; it is the absence of any answer at all, and the story measures it: “at least half an hour of silence.” They share the silence without sharing anything inside it. Another reader could call Gurov merely embarrassed, which is why this is a claim to argue.

Exam tip: a relationship claim earns Row B only when you explain what the pairing makes visible. “She is ashamed and he is cold” names two people; “her grief arrives with a frame and his has none” names the relationship.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the watermelon reveals about how Gurov stands toward Anna Sergeyevna in this scene. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each one supports your claim.

Show a model response

The watermelon lets Chekhov show Gurov's distance without making him say a single unkind word. Anna Sergeyevna has just told him he will despise her, and the story answers her not with his reply but with a piece of fruit: he “began eating it without haste.” A man in a hurry would at least be reacting to her; instead the ordinary continues straight through her confession. Then the narration counts what follows, “at least half an hour of silence”, long enough that the reader has to sit in it with her.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation of the relationship (Row A); the two quoted phrases, each followed by a sentence explaining its wording, are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 4.2 · Unit 4 · Short Fiction II · CHR 1.C

Foils and contrasting characters

A foil is not a villain and not a sidekick. It is a character set beside another so that one quality in the other becomes impossible to miss, the way a plain wall makes a shape visible.

The test is quick: take the foil away and ask what you can no longer see. If the answer is nothing, you have found a contrast, not a foil. And the foil is often the narrator, who stands nearest of all.

Key terms
  • Foil (CHR 1.C): a character whose contrast with another makes a quality in that other visible. The foil's work happens in the reader's eye, not in the plot.
  • Contrast as arrangement (CHR 1.C, STR 3.D): the pairing is a choice someone made. Ask what putting these two side by side exposes that neither would show alone.
  • The narrator as foil (CHR 1.C, NAR 4.A), when the teller stands beside his subject, every judgment he offers measures him as well as the person he is judging.
  • A character who does not change (CHR 1.C): stillness can be the device. A figure who refuses to move forces everyone around him to reveal how they move.
  • Naming the contrast's work (LAN 7.A): commentary says not “they differ” but “the difference makes this visible.” Only the second sentence is analysis.
Text

About the text: Herman Melville, “Bartleby, the Scrivener: A Story of Wall-Street,” first published 1853. The lawyer has called Bartleby out from behind his screen to help examine a copied document; the ellipsis marks one cut sentence.

Imagine my surprise, nay, my consternation, when without moving from his privacy, Bartleby in a singularly mild, firm voice, replied, “I would prefer not to.”

I sat awhile in perfect silence, rallying my stunned faculties. … I repeated my request in the clearest tone I could assume. But in quite as clear a one came the previous reply, “I would prefer not to.”

“Prefer not to,” echoed I, rising in high excitement, and crossing the room with a stride. “What do you mean? Are you moon-struck? I want you to help me compare this sheet here — take it,” and I thrust it towards him.

“I would prefer not to,” said he.

Model analysis

Melville runs the contrast through voice. Bartleby answers “in a singularly mild, firm voice,” a pairing that holds gentleness and refusal in one breath, so there is nothing to argue with and nothing to overrule. Everything the lawyer does afterward is motion: he sits “rallying my stunned faculties,” repeats himself, then is “rising in high excitement,” crossing the room and pushing the paper at a man who has not stood up. “Are you moon-struck?” gives him away: offered a refusal with no reason attached, he reaches for a diagnosis, because a lunatic can be managed and a clerk who simply prefers not to cannot. The foil is the narrator himself: Bartleby's stillness exposes how completely this lawyer depends on being obeyed, and no description of him could have shown it.

Exam tip: a foil paragraph that only lists differences stalls at Row B level 2. The point arrives in the sentence naming what the contrast makes visible in the other character.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the lawyer's reaction reveals about him rather than about Bartleby. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each supports your claim.

Show a model response

Melville uses Bartleby's refusal to show how little the lawyer's authority has ever been tested. His first response is not anger but paralysis: he sits “rallying my stunned faculties,” as though a clerk saying no had knocked something loose in him. When the same words come back he is “rising in high excitement,” on his feet and across the room over a single sheet of paper. That much motion belongs to a man whose ordinary morning has never once been refused. Bartleby never leaves his desk; the room is disordered entirely by the person in charge of it.

Rubric: the claim is about the narrator rather than the title character (Row A); each quotation is followed by a sentence explaining how its wording produces that effect (Row B).

Lesson 4.3 · Unit 4 · Short Fiction II · STR 3.D

Contrast and shift: finding the sentence where a story turns

Stories turn, and they usually turn in one sentence. Find it and you have the spine of an essay: everything before it belongs to one arrangement of a life, everything after it to another.

The turn is rarely an event. More often it is a change of register, the vocabulary or the rhythm shifts, and a reader tracking only the plot walks straight past the most important line.

Key terms
  • Juxtaposition (STR 3.D): two things set side by side so the reader does the comparing. The gap between them, not either one alone, is where your claim lives.
  • Shift (STR 3.D): the place a text changes direction: scene, tense, speaker, or register. Locate it by sentence, never by paragraph.
  • Register (STR 3.D, FIG 5.A): the kind of language a passage is speaking: household arithmetic against sensuous description. Changing register changes the subject.
  • Hinge sentence (STR 3.C): the one sentence that belongs to both halves. Quote it and your line of reasoning has somewhere to stand.
  • Commentary on a shift (LAN 7.A): say what the second half can now do that the first half could not. Announcing that a shift occurs is only the setup.
Text

About the text: Kate Chopin, “A Pair of Silk Stockings,” first published in Vogue, 1897. Mrs. Sommers, who has come by fifteen unexpected dollars and a long list of things her children need, sits down at a shop counter; the ellipsis marks a cut covering the price placard, the shop girl's offer, and Mrs. Sommers's answering smile.

An all-gone limp feeling had come over her and she rested her hand aimlessly upon the counter. She wore no gloves. By degrees she grew aware that her hand had encountered something very soothing, very pleasant to touch. She looked down to see that her hand lay upon a pile of silk stockings. … But she went on feeling the soft, sheeny luxurious things — with both hands now, holding them up to see them glisten, and to feel them glide serpent-like through her fingers.

Two hectic blotches came suddenly into her pale cheeks. She looked up at the girl.

“Do you think there are any eights-and-a-half among these?”

Model analysis

The passage turns in a sentence that does not look like a turn: “By degrees she grew aware that her hand had encountered something very soothing, very pleasant to touch.” Mrs. Sommers is not the subject of her own discovery: her hand is, and she catches up to it “by degrees.” Before that clause her hand rests “aimlessly”; after it she holds the stockings “with both hands now,” and the language changes with her, from the flat report of a tired shopper to silk that will “glide serpent-like through her fingers.” Chopin then puts the change on her body before her mouth can admit it, in the blotches that come “suddenly into her pale cheeks.” Nothing has happened yet, and the woman who asks about eights-and-a-half is already someone else.

Exam tip: name a shift by quoting the sentence where it happens. “The passage shifts halfway through” is a location; the hinge sentence, quoted, is evidence.

Write it

Write one paragraph identifying the sentence where this passage turns and arguing what the turn does. Quote the hinge sentence and one short phrase from each side of it.

Show a model response

Chopin turns the passage at the moment the sentence hands the initiative to Mrs. Sommers's body: “By degrees she grew aware that her hand had encountered something very soothing, very pleasant to touch.” The grammar puts the hand first and the awareness second, so the wanting is underway before she agrees to any of it. Before that sentence her hand lies “aimlessly upon the counter,” the posture of a woman with nothing of her own to spend; after it she is feeling the silk “with both hands now.” Between those two phrases she stops being a shopper doing sums for her children and becomes a person with an appetite.

Rubric: the claim locates and interprets a structural turn (Row A); the hinge sentence and the phrases on either side, each followed by commentary on its wording, are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 4.4 · Unit 4 · Short Fiction II · SET 2.C

Setting and the character shaped by it

Unit 1 asked what a setting does in a moment. This one asks what it does over weeks: the difference between a place that colors a scene and a place that is a condition somebody lives under.

A room works on a person the way weather works on a coastline: never in the sentence you are reading, always in the accumulation. So hunt for details that carry duration: wear, repetition, fittings installed for somebody else.

Key terms
  • Setting as condition (SET 2.C): the place a character cannot step outside of. Ask what it permits, forbids, and repeats, not what mood it gives off.
  • Cumulative effect (SET 2.C): a setting's work measured across time. The evidence is wear, habit, and shifting attention, never a single adjective.
  • Traces of earlier occupants (SET 2.C): damage and fittings left by people who were here first. They record what the room has been used for, which predicts what it will be used for next.
  • Confined perspective (SET 2.C, NAR 4.B), when a narrator can report only one room, a new detail means her looking has changed, not the room.
  • Function versus atmosphere (SET 2.A, 2.C): “oppressive” names a feeling; “the room turns rest into custody” names a function. Only the second can be argued with.
Text

About the text: Charlotte Perkins Gilman, “The Yellow Wall-Paper,” first published in The New England Magazine, 1892. The narrator, ill after the birth of her child, has been put in an upstairs room to rest and told not to write; she writes anyway. Her first description of the room. The ellipsis marks an internal cut.

It was nursery first and then playroom and gymnasium, I should judge; for the windows are barred for little children, and there are rings and things in the walls.

The paint and paper look as if a boys' school had used it. It is stripped off — the paper — in great patches all around the head of my bed, about as far as I can reach, and in a great place on the other side of the room low down. I never saw a worse paper in my life.

One of those sprawling flamboyant patterns committing every artistic sin.

…

The color is repellent, almost revolting; a smouldering unclean yellow, strangely faded by the slow-turning sunlight.

Model analysis

Gilman builds a room whose function is written in what other people did to it, so that the narrator describes her own confinement without recognising it. Her explanation arrives ahead of the evidence: the windows “are barred for little children,” a reason she supplies for a fitting she has only found there. The bars, the “rings and things in the walls,” and paper torn away “about as far as I can reach” are a record of use that the room keeps whether or not she reads it, and she measures an earlier occupant's reach with the accuracy she will later spend on her own. Even the color is dated, “strangely faded by the slow-turning sunlight,” so the setting is told in the tense of duration before anything happens in it. A reader could argue the room is merely shabby and the narrator is supplying the menace; the paragraph allows that, but shabbiness does not come with bars already fitted.

Exam tip: SET 2.C rewards evidence with time inside it. A detail that could be true of any single afternoon shows a scene; wear, repetition, and fittings show a condition.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this room functions to do to the person kept in it, not what mood it creates. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each carries time as well as description.

Show a model response

Gilman makes the room a set of standing instructions rather than a backdrop. The narrator notes that the windows “are barred for little children,” a harmless purpose invented for a fitting that will hold a grown woman just as well: the explanation is hers, the bars were up before she arrived. The paper is stripped “about as far as I can reach,” a measurement that records somebody else's arm and predicts what this room gets out of whoever is left in it. Neither detail reports her state today. Together they say what the room has already done and is still equipped to do.

Rubric: the first sentence claims a function rather than a mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on how its wording produces that effect (Row B).

Lesson 4.5 · Unit 4 · Short Fiction II · NAR 4.B, 4.C

Narrative distance: a narrator inside a character's idiom

A third-person narrator can stand at any distance from the person it reports on, and the distance can change inside a sentence. When it closes all the way, the narration starts borrowing the character's own words, and you have to decide whose judgment you are reading.

That decision is where tone lives. Joyce's narrator in “Clay” speaks Maria's vocabulary while arranging her sentences in a way Maria never would, so the writing is fond and unsparing at once. Naming a tone proves nothing; showing the words that hold two tones together is the work.

Key terms
  • Narrative distance (NAR 4.B): how near the narration stands to a character's mind. Measured in diction, not pronouns: third person can sit closer than first.
  • Free indirect style (NAR 4.B): third-person narration carrying a character's idiom, with no quotation marks and no “she thought.” The reporting belongs to the narrator; the wording belongs to her.
  • Tone (NAR 4.C): the attitude the narration takes toward what it reports. Prove it from diction, syntax, and proportion; an unquotable tone word is a guess.
  • Double tone (NAR 4.C): two attitudes in one sentence, usually because the diction is the character's and the arrangement is the narrator's.
  • Naming versus proving (NAR 4.C, LAN 7.B): “the tone is condescending” is a label; the quoted word that makes it so is evidence, and the sentence explaining that word is commentary.
Text

About the text: James Joyce, “Clay,” from Dubliners, first published 1914. The opening of the story, in the laundry kitchen where Maria works, on an evening she has leave to go out. Barmbracks are the fruit loaves eaten at Hallow Eve. The excerpt runs from the story's second sentence through the first sentence of the next paragraph.

The kitchen was spick and span: the cook said you could see yourself in the big copper boilers. The fire was nice and bright and on one of the side-tables were four very big barmbracks. These barmbracks seemed uncut; but if you went closer you would see that they had been cut into long thick even slices and were ready to be handed round at tea. Maria had cut them herself.

Maria was a very, very small person indeed but she had a very long nose and a very long chin.

Model analysis

Joyce borrows Maria's own approval of the kitchen and then measures her with it, so the paragraph praises her in the voice that shows how small her portion of the world is. The verdict on the kitchen is not the narrator's, “you could see yourself in the big copper boilers” is the cook's, and the second person of “if you went closer you would see” hands the reader the exact inspection Maria gives her own work. “Nice and bright,” “very big”: that is her scale of things, imported whole. Then the intensifier that praised the loaves turns round on her, “a very, very small person indeed,” and the word she reserves for what she likes is the word that makes her ridiculous. The fondness and the irony come out of one piece of diction, which is why you cannot argue for either without the other.

Exam tip: NAR 4.C is a proof requirement. Put the tone word only in a sentence that also carries the quoted diction it came from: “ironic” alone is a claim with its evidence missing.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing how this narration manages to be affectionate and ironic at once. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain what each does to the distance between the narrator and Maria.

Show a model response

Joyce keeps his narrator inside Maria's vocabulary and then lets that vocabulary do the exposing. The fire is “nice and bright,” a phrase with her satisfaction in it rather than his description, and the barmbracks reveal their neat slices only “if you went closer”: that is, only to a reader willing to take the trouble Maria takes. So far the closeness reads as sympathy. The irony arrives when the same habit of intensifying is aimed at her body: “a very, very small person indeed.” The narrator has not changed voices; he has turned the voice on its owner, and it sizes her up the way she sizes up a loaf.

Rubric: the claim names one technique doing two things, not a mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what it does to narrative distance (Row B).

Lesson 4.6 · Unit 4 · Short Fiction II · LAN 7.C

Building a line of reasoning

Row B stalls at two points when a response is full of true claims that have nothing to do with one another. A set of accurate observations is not an argument. A line of reasoning is an order in which each claim makes the next one possible.

The test is a sentence you can say out loud: because the first thing is true, the second thing follows. If “and also” works just as well as “because,” you have written a list.

Key terms
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.C): claims sequenced so that each is made possible by the one before. A reader should feel that your second paragraph could not have come first.
  • Advancing claim (LAN 7.C): a claim that changes what the next piece of evidence can mean. If deleting it costs nothing, it was decoration.
  • Load-bearing transition (LAN 7.C), “because,” “which is why,” “so the next detail reads differently.” “Also” and “furthermore” announce a list.
  • Faulty line (LAN 7.C): claims each defensible but arranged so that none depends on another. Readers cap that at 2 on Row B however good the quotations are.
  • The device march (LAN 7.B, 7.C): a paragraph for imagery, then one for diction, then one for irony. The commonest faulty line: a checklist has replaced the passage's own order.
Text

About the text: Kate Chopin, “Désirée's Baby,” first published in Vogue, 1893. Désirée, whose own parentage is unknown, has married Armand Aubigny and borne a son on his Louisiana plantation. The paragraph in which she first registers the change in him, cut before its last two sentences. The racial language is Chopin's, of 1893.

When the baby was about three months old, Désirée awoke one day to the conviction that there was something in the air menacing her peace. It was at first too subtle to grasp. It had only been a disquieting suggestion; an air of mystery among the blacks; unexpected visits from far-off neighbors who could hardly account for their coming. Then a strange, an awful change in her husband's manner, which she dared not ask him to explain. When he spoke to her, it was with averted eyes, from which the old love-light seemed to have gone out. He absented himself from home; and when there, avoided her presence and that of her child, without excuse.

Model analysis

Chopin keeps the cause of the change off the page so that the reader has to take it as Désirée does: a quality of Armand's attention rather than a fact about the world. The paragraph gives her symptoms and no diagnosis: something “in the air menacing her peace,” a threat “too subtle to grasp,” then neighbors “who could hardly account for their coming.” Every item is noticed; none is told to her. Even the change in Armand is the thing “she dared not ask him to explain,” so the silence is a rule of her situation, not an accident of it.

Because the explanation has been withheld, the one detail that does arrive carries the weight of an explanation, and it is a detail about looking. Armand speaks “with averted eyes, from which the old love-light seemed to have gone out,” and then he “absented himself from home.” Both are subtractions of presence rather than acts against her, which is why she has nothing to answer. Chopin has taught us to read Armand's gaze as the instrument of judgment before anyone knows what is being judged, so his verdict, when it comes, reads as something he performs rather than something he discovers.

Now the same evidence in a faulty line: “Chopin uses imagery to create mystery: there is something ‘in the air menacing her peace.' She also uses characterization when Armand speaks ‘with averted eyes.' Chopin's diction is ominous throughout.” Every sentence is true and every claim has a quotation, yet nothing in the second needs the first, so there is no line for commentary to explain. That response is capped at 2 on Row B.

Exam tip: proofread by swapping each transition for “because.” Wherever it turns into nonsense, you have a list rather than a line.

Write it

Write two connected paragraphs on this passage. Begin the second with a sentence starting “Because…” that could not have been written if the first paragraph did not exist. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer in each.

Show a model response

Chopin assembles the change entirely out of things Désirée notices and nobody says. The danger is at first only “something in the air menacing her peace,” and the callers are neighbors “who could hardly account for their coming,” a phrase that leaves even the visitors unexplained. She is given atmosphere instead of information, and the passage shuts the one door out of it: the change in Armand is what “she dared not ask him to explain.”

Because she is barred from asking, the only evidence left to her is what Armand's body does, and Chopin makes that evidence a series of removals: he speaks “with averted eyes,” and he “absented himself from home.” Neither is an accusation she could meet, which is why her helplessness later looks structural rather than weak. The passage has taught her, and us, to read a man by what he withdraws.

Rubric: paragraph one makes a defensible claim about withheld information (Row A); paragraph two opens with the word that makes the line of reasoning visible and explains its quotations instead of restating them, which is the level Row B pays 3 and 4 points for.

Unit 4 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 4 review: contrast, distance, and relationship

Ten exam-style items built on two stories this unit did not teach, Chekhov's “Misery” and Joyce's “Counterparts”, so that the unit's skills have to travel to text you are meeting cold; answer each one before you open its explanation.

Multiple choice

  1. Passage A. About the text: Anton Chekhov, “Misery,” first published 1886; translated by Constance Garnett for her Tales of Chekhov (1916–1922). The opening of the story; the paragraph continues past the excerpt.

    The twilight of evening. Big flakes of wet snow are whirling lazily about the street lamps which have just been lighted, and lying in a thin soft layer on roofs, horses' backs, shoulders, caps. Iona Potapov, the sledge-driver, is all white like a ghost. He sits on the box without stirring, bent as double as the living body can be bent. If a regular snowdrift fell on him it seems as though even then he would not think it necessary to shake it off. His little mare is white and motionless too. Her stillness, the angularity of her lines, and the stick-like straightness of her legs make her look like a halfpenny gingerbread horse. She is probably lost in thought.

    In context, the details of the falling snow in the first two sentences primarily serve to

    Twilight and snow do set a time, but that is what the sentences say, not what they do; an answer that stops at the information a detail carries is a paraphrase wearing the costume of a function. Ask instead what the detail is doing to the figure it lands on.

    Correct. The snow is given a list of things to settle on, “roofs, horses' backs, shoulders, caps”, and the very next sentence puts Iona under the same white layer, “all white like a ghost.” Setting here is not a backdrop but a slow action performed on a body, which is exactly what a setting that works over time does.

    Nothing in the passage points forward to a departure; Iona does not move, and the following sentence insists he would not even shake a snowdrift off. This choice invents a plot where the passage offers a condition.

    The lamps are mentioned, and cold is certainly present, but the passage never sets warmth against cold: the snow falls on the lamps and on Iona alike. A true detail put to a function the text does not support is the commonest wrong answer on this exam.

  2. Passage A, above: Chekhov, “Misery,” 1886 (Garnett).

    His little mare is white and motionless too. Her stillness, the angularity of her lines, and the stick-like straightness of her legs make her look like a halfpenny gingerbread horse.

    The description of the little mare functions chiefly to

    The gingerbread horse is an odd, almost funny image, but calling it relief assumes the passage is trying to lighten something. The comparison is made of stiffness and straight lines, and it lands on a creature described one sentence earlier as “white and motionless too”: the humor, such as it is, points back at the stillness rather than away from it.

    Poverty is a reasonable inference about a sledge-driver, but the sentences are about posture, not condition: stillness, angularity, straightness. Reading a detail for the social fact behind it instead of the effect it produces is how a foil gets missed.

    Correct. A foil need not be another person. The word “too” welds the mare's whiteness and immobility to Iona's, and the second description does not add information so much as double the first: the passage now contains two motionless white figures and no one who speaks. A different reader might argue the mare is simply scenery; the repetition of “white” and “motionless” is what makes the foil reading defensible.

    This is true of the story as a whole, where Iona finally tells his grief to the mare, but it is not true of these sentences, which give her stillness and nothing else. An answer that is right about the work and wrong about the lines quoted is still wrong.

  3. Passage A, above: Chekhov, “Misery,” 1886 (Garnett). The passage's last sentence.

    She is probably lost in thought.

    The narration's relationship to the figures it describes is best characterized by this sentence as

    Correct. “Probably” is the whole sentence. The narration stands at the edge of both bodies and guesses, and it has spent the preceding sentences reporting Iona entirely from the outside: posture, whiteness, what he would not bother to do. Distance is being held evenly, and the grief the title promises is still locked inside a man the telling will not open.

    The hedge rules this out. A narration with access would say what the mare thinks, or what Iona thinks; this one says “probably” and stops. Note how quickly an omniscience claim collapses when you read the modal verbs.

    The sentence is dry, and dryness invites the word satire, but satire attacks, and nothing here is being attacked. This is a tone word one notch too strong, the error that costs students the tone question every year: choose the smallest word the evidence will carry.

    Nothing in the passage suggests a change of narrator, and the voice that says “probably” is plainly not the mare's. Distance between a narrator and a character is not the same as a narrator becoming that character.

  4. Passage A, above: Chekhov, “Misery,” 1886 (Garnett).

    Big flakes of wet snow are whirling lazily about the street lamps … He sits on the box without stirring, bent as double as the living body can be bent.

    The juxtaposition that organizes the whole passage sets

    Only evening appears; there is no morning in the passage to set it against. A contrast requires two things actually on the page, not one thing and its absent opposite.

    The story does eventually turn on what Iona has left, but this passage names no countryside. Importing a contrast from elsewhere in the work, or from a summary you half-remember, is the fastest way to lose a structure question.

    Correct. Every verb given to the weather moves, snow “whirling,” lamps just “lighted,” flakes “lying” down in a layer, and every verb given to the two figures refuses to: he “sits … without stirring,” she is “motionless,” and even a snowdrift would not make him shake it off. The passage is built out of that opposition, which is why the stillness registers as grief rather than as rest.

    Iona says nothing in the passage and no thought of his is reported. A contrast between speech and thought needs at least one of them to appear.

  5. Passage A, above: Chekhov, “Misery,” 1886 (Garnett).

    A student claims that the opening presents Iona's grief as something that has already stopped him rather than something he is about to feel. Which sentence from the passage, taken up next, would most advance that line of reasoning?

    The fragment establishes atmosphere, and atmosphere can support almost any claim, which is precisely the problem: evidence that would fit five different arguments advances none of them. A line of reasoning needs each step to narrow the case.

    Correct. The claim is about a grief that has already finished its work, and this sentence supplies a body held at the limit of what a body can do: “bent as double as the living body can be bent” is an end state, not a reaction in progress. Taking it second lets the next claim ask what could bend a man that far, which is how a paragraph earns Row B's third and fourth points.

    This is strong evidence, but it is evidence for the same point a step later: it extends the stillness outward to the mare. Used second, it repeats the claim instead of advancing it: save it for the move about doubling, once the human stillness has been established.

    The gingerbread horse is the passage's most memorable image, and students reach for it first for that reason. It describes the animal's shape, not the man's condition, so it cannot carry a claim about Iona without a bridge you have not yet built.

  6. Passage B. About the text: James Joyce, “Counterparts,” from Dubliners, first published 1914. The opening of the story, in the office where Farrington works as a copying clerk. Joyce marks speech with a dash rather than quotation marks.

    The bell rang furiously and, when Miss Parker went to the tube, a furious voice called out in a piercing North of Ireland accent:

    — Send Farrington here!

    Miss Parker returned to her machine, saying to a man who was writing at a desk:

    — Mr Alleyne wants you upstairs.

    The man muttered Blast him! under his breath and pushed back his chair to stand up. When he stood up he was tall and of great bulk. He had a hanging face, dark wine-coloured, with fair eyebrows and moustache: his eyes bulged forward slightly and the whites of them were dirty. He lifted up the counter and, passing by the clients, went out of the office with a heavy step.

    The exchange between Miss Parker and the man at the desk is most notable for

    Neither of them says anything hostile to the other; the only heat in the passage belongs to a bell that rings “furiously” and a voice that is “furious,” both of which come from upstairs. Hostility in the room is atmosphere borrowed from elsewhere, not an attitude between these two.

    Sympathy has to be shown by something: a look, a softened phrase, a hesitation. Miss Parker “returned to her machine” and delivers eight words. Reading warmth into a neutral report is how a relationship claim becomes unprovable.

    He does obey: he pushes back his chair, stands, lifts the counter, and goes out. The muttered curse is what obedience sounds like when it cannot be refused, and mistaking the curse for the action is the misreading this item is built on.

    Correct. Nuance in a relationship often lives in what two people decline to make of the same minute. Her sentence names Alleyne, not herself; his sentence, “Blast him!”, is addressed to no one present and answers nobody. Two people share the exchange and neither is really in it, which is the office's arrangement rather than a quarrel between them.

  7. Passage B, above: Joyce, “Counterparts,” 1914.

    The man muttered Blast him! under his breath and pushed back his chair to stand up.

    Throughout the passage the narration calls Farrington “the man,” even after Mr Alleyne's voice has supplied his name. In context, this choice primarily serves to

    The narration reports the shouted name in its own second line, so the name is available to it. A narrator who withholds what he has just told you is choosing, not failing.

    Correct. The order is exact: the name arrives as an order (“Send Farrington here!”), and the moment we reach the desk the narration switches to “the man” and stays there through “he was tall and of great bulk.” The telling adopts the office's own way of seeing him, which sets up the story's tone: close enough to hear the muttered curse, cold enough to withhold the name that would make him a person.

    There is no revelation to delay: the reader already has the name. Suspense requires information the reader lacks, and this passage gives the name away before it withholds it, which is the opposite move.

    Miss Parker plainly knows him: she walks straight to his desk with the message. Attributing the narration's word choice to a character's memory confuses who is speaking; “the man” is the narrator's phrase, not hers.

  8. Passage B, above: Joyce, “Counterparts,” 1914.

    … a furious voice called out in a piercing North of Ireland accent … When he stood up he was tall and of great bulk.

    The contrast the passage establishes between Mr Alleyne and Farrington is chiefly one of

    Correct. Alleyne exists in the passage as sound only (a bell, a tube, a “furious voice,” an accent described as “piercing”), while Farrington is given nothing but physical mass: “tall and of great bulk,” a hanging face, a heavy step. A foil makes something visible that nothing else could, and this pairing makes visible that size is worth nothing here and a voice is worth everything.

    Nothing in the passage measures what either man knows. Farrington is a copying clerk, but copying tells you about his job, not his education, and Alleyne's accent tells you where he is from, not what he has read.

    No ages are given, and neither man is described in terms that imply one. This distractor is the kind of ready-made opposition students supply when they have not checked which contrasts the text actually builds.

    Deceit belongs to later parts of the story, not to these lines, where nobody makes a claim that could be false. Keep a contrast question inside the quoted text.

  9. Passage B, above: Joyce, “Counterparts,” 1914.

    When he stood up he was tall and of great bulk. He had a hanging face, dark wine-coloured, with fair eyebrows and moustache …

    The shift from rapid dialogue to this sustained physical description functions to

    He does not reach the street; he goes out of the office and up, and the passage ends with the step, not the destination. Watch the verbs at a shift, “lifted,” “passing,” “went out”, before you relocate a scene.

    The tenses stay put. “When he stood up he was tall” is simultaneous description, not retrospect; nothing earlier is being explained.

    Farrington has already been named by Alleyne's shout and already acted at his desk. A description is not an introduction simply because it is the first time we see someone's face.

    Correct. Notice where the slowdown falls: the sentences pile up size (“tall,” “great bulk,” a hanging face, bulging eyes) in the seconds between the summons and the exit. Structure is doing the argument here, because the reader is made to weigh all that body just as it stands up to be scolded by a voice. Another reader might call the description mere portraiture; its placement is what makes the structural reading defensible.

  10. Passage B, above: Joyce, “Counterparts,” 1914.

    All of the following suggest that the office acts on Farrington as a condition rather than serving as a background EXCEPT

    The bell does act on him: it starts the passage, it is “furious” before any human is, and the room reorganizes around it. A setting that issues the first sound is a setting with authority over the people in it.

    The tube is the room's machinery for carrying power downward, and it lets Alleyne reach Farrington without being present. That is architecture doing work a character would otherwise have to do.

    Correct: this is the exception. The eyebrows, moustache, and wine-coloured face describe the man himself, and no amount of the office made them; they would be true of him on any street in Dublin. The other three details are things the room does to him, which is what SET 2.C asks you to separate from what he simply is.

    The counter is a small, precise humiliation: a grown man must lift a piece of furniture and file past the clients to answer a summons. Setting presses on him physically in the act of obeying, which is the pattern the other correct choices share.

Lesson 5.1 · Unit 5 · Poetry II · NAR 4.A, CHR 1.E

The speaker as a character: the dramatic monologue

In a dramatic monologue one character talks, at length, to a listener who never gets a line. You hear only his side, and that is the method, not a limitation.

Everything you learn about him he handed over himself, and the useful parts are the ones he did not mean to hand over. Read for the gap between what he thinks he is proving and what his sentences establish.

Key terms
  • Dramatic monologue (NAR 4.A): a poem spoken by a character, not the poet, at a particular moment to a particular listener. The occasion is evidence.
  • Silent listener (NAR 4.A): the person addressed. What the speaker thinks he must explain tells you what he fears is visible.
  • Self-revelation (CHR 1.E): information given without meaning to. His word choice is testimony he does not know he is giving.
  • Complex character (CHR 1.E): one whose account of himself and the account his words support do not match.
  • Irony of a speaking voice (NAR 4.A): the reader’s conclusion arriving over the speaker’s head. Nobody contradicts him; his own syntax does.
Text

About the text: Robert Browning, “My Last Duchess,” first published 1842 in Dramatic Lyrics. Lines 1–24 of 56; the Duke of Ferrara shows a portrait to a marriage envoy.

That’s my last Duchess painted on the wall,
Looking as if she were alive. I call
That piece a wonder, now: Frà Pandolf’s hands
Worked busily a day, and there she stands.
Will’t please you sit and look at her? I said
“Frà Pandolf” by design, for never read
Strangers like you that pictured countenance,
The depth and passion of its earnest glance,
But to myself they turned (since none puts by
The curtain I have drawn for you, but I)
And seemed as they would ask me, if they durst,
How such a glance came there; so, not the first
Are you to turn and ask thus. Sir, ’twas not
Her husband’s presence only, called that spot
Of joy into the Duchess’ cheek: perhaps
Frà Pandolf chanced to say “Her mantle laps
Over my lady’s wrist too much,” or “Paint
Must never hope to reproduce the faint
Half-flush that dies along her throat”: such stuff
Was courtesy, she thought, and cause enough
For calling up that spot of joy. She had
A heart—how shall I say?— too soon made glad,
Too easily impressed; she liked whate’er
She looked on, and her looks went everywhere.

Model analysis

The Duke means the curtain to prove his connoisseurship, and it convicts him of something closer to jailing. He points out that “none puts by / The curtain I have drawn for you, but I”: a boast about access that admits the painted woman is now looked at only by permission. Fourteen lines later he complains that “her looks went everywhere,” and the two statements lock: the wife whose glance would not stay put has been replaced by an image whose glance he can close a cloth over. He never states the exchange; his own parenthesis supplies it. A reader could call him vain rather than sinister, but the vanity still has to explain the curtain.

Exam tip: in a dramatic monologue the claim is yours, not the speaker’s. Row B’s fourth point goes to commentary showing how his wording outruns his intention, so quote the phrase he thought was harmless.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the Duke reveals about himself without meaning to. Make a claim a reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each supports it.

Show a model response

Browning lets the Duke build the case against himself out of the vocabulary of good taste. He calls the portrait “That piece a wonder, now”, and the “now” does the damage, dating his admiration from the moment his wife stopped being a person and became a possession he could hang. He offers her fault as if it were obvious: she was “too easily impressed.” The charge is that she responded to other people at all. Both remarks are delivered as connoisseurship, to a stranger he wants to impress, which is why they work as evidence: he does not think either one needs defending.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation, not a summary (Row A); each quotation is followed by a sentence explaining how its wording works (Row B).

Lesson 5.2 · Unit 5 · Poetry II · STR 3.D

Structural contrast and the volta

A volta is not a mood swing. It is an argumentative move: the poem builds one case, and at a particular line turns on that case and answers it.

So find the turn, name it by line, and then ask what the poem was arguing before it and what the delay bought. A late turn is one the poem made you wait for, and the waiting is evidence.

Key terms
  • Volta (STR 3.D): the turn in a sonnet’s argument. In the English form it often waits for the couplet; when it comes earlier, the choice is arguable.
  • Before-and-after structure (STR 3.D): a poem built as two unequal halves, the second revising rather than continuing the first.
  • Juxtaposition (STR 3.D): two parts set against each other. The meaning lives in the seam.
  • Suspended syntax (STR 3.C): a sentence that withholds its main clause. A reader feels the delay before noticing the grammar causing it.
  • Placement as evidence (STR 3.D), where a turn happens is a claim you can defend. Ask what the poem would lose if it came three lines sooner.
Text

About the text: William Shakespeare, Sonnet 29, “When, in disgrace with fortune and men’s eyes,” first published 1609 in Shake-speares Sonnets. Complete, 14 lines.

When, in disgrace with fortune and men’s eyes,
I all alone beweep my outcast state,
And trouble deaf heaven with my bootless cries,
And look upon myself and curse my fate,
Wishing me like to one more rich in hope,
Featured like him, like him with friends possessed,
Desiring this man’s art and that man’s scope,
With what I most enjoy contented least;
Yet in these thoughts myself almost despising,
Haply I think on thee, and then my state,
(Like to the lark at break of day arising
From sullen earth) sings hymns at heaven’s gate;
For thy sweet love remembered such wealth brings
That then I scorn to change my state with kings.

Model analysis

Shakespeare makes the turn a grammatical rescue before it is an emotional one. The poem opens with “When,” and that one word holds the next eight lines in suspension: everything the speaker does there (beweep, trouble, curse, wish) happens inside a clause that cannot finish itself. Relief comes at line 9 with “Yet,” and only after “Haply I think on thee” does the sentence reach a main verb, “sings hymns at heaven’s gate.” The despair is subordinate by construction; the remembered love is what lets the sentence, and the speaker, stand up. A reader could call the couplet the real turn, but it only confirms what line 10 has already changed.

Exam tip: cite the turn by line and name both sides of it. “There is a shift in tone” is a label; “at line 9 the poem stops cataloguing what he lacks and starts measuring what he has” is a claim.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Shakespeare gains by turning at line 9 rather than saving the turn for the couplet. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

Turning at line 9 lets the poem spend more time in envy than in comfort, which is what makes the comfort credible. Eight lines go to wanting other men’s lives, “Featured like him, like him with friends possessed,” a line that repeats itself because envy repeats itself, so the reader is tired of the complaint before the speaker is. When the turn comes, the phrase carrying it is casual: “Haply I think on thee,” as if the thought wandered in. A turn saved for line 13 would have to be sudden and loud. This one can be small and still outweigh everything above it.

Rubric: the claim is about placement, not mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what the positioning does to the reader (Row B).

Lesson 5.3 · Unit 5 · Poetry II · STR 3.C

Punctuation, syntax, and the line

A line break and a sentence break are different instruments, and a poet can play them together or against each other. Where they disagree, a reader’s attention snags, and the snag is arguable.

Punctuation belongs to structure, not decoration. A dash holds a sentence open; a period shuts it. When a poem ends without shutting, ask what the refusal does rather than calling the style unconventional.

Key terms
  • End-stopped line (STR 3.C): a line whose grammar and whose line break end together, giving a reader a small, satisfied stop.
  • Enjambment (STR 3.C): a sentence running past the end of its line. The eye pauses where the grammar will not, which weights the word left hanging.
  • Caesura (STR 3.C): a pause inside a line, often made by punctuation. It breaks the line into unequal pieces and changes its pace.
  • The dash (STR 3.C): a mark that suspends rather than concludes: interruption, a gap in knowledge, or a thought still being assembled.
  • Unclosed syntax (STR 3.C): a sentence a poem never finishes. Ask what the missing full stop denies the reader.
Text

About the text: Emily Dickinson, “I heard a Fly buzz — when I died —” (Fr591), written about 1862, first published 1896. Complete, 16 lines; the dashes and capitalization follow the standard editions.

I heard a Fly buzz — when I died —
The Stillness in the Room
Was like the Stillness in the Air —
Between the Heaves of Storm —

The Eyes around — had wrung them dry —
And Breaths were gathering firm
For that last Onset — when the King
Be witnessed — in the Room —

I willed my Keepsakes — Signed away
What portion of me be
Assignable — and then it was
There interposed a Fly —

With Blue — uncertain — stumbling Buzz —
Between the light — and me —
And then the Windows failed — and then
I could not see to see —

Model analysis

Dickinson uses punctuation to make the reader die at the poem’s pace rather than hear about it afterward. In the third stanza the business of the will runs over a line ending, “What portion of me be / Assignable”, so the word deciding what can be given away hangs a line beyond the giving, which is roughly the speaker’s position too. Then the last stanza breaks into pieces: “With Blue — uncertain — stumbling Buzz —” admits three dashes to a single line, and the interruptions do what the adjectives only describe. The poem stops on a dash, not a period. Nothing closes; the sentence is simply no longer being said.

Exam tip: a punctuation claim must name an effect. “Dickinson uses dashes” earns nothing: Row B pays for the sentence explaining what the dash does to pace, to grammar, or to the reader’s certainty.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the punctuation of the final stanza contributes to the poem’s account of dying. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

In the last stanza Dickinson lets the punctuation do the job the speaker can no longer do. The dashes in “Blue — uncertain — stumbling Buzz —” cut the line into unequal pieces, so the reader moves the way the fly moves instead of being told about it. The next line puts the insect “Between the light — and me —,” and the dash inside the phrase holds the two apart on the page as well as in the room. By “I could not see to see —,” the dash is the only thing still going. The poem does not end; it stops being available.

Rubric: the claim names a function, not a feature of style (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what its marks do to the reading (Row B).

Lesson 5.4 · Unit 5 · Poetry II · FIG 5.D

Imagery and the shift in mood

Poems rarely hold one image steady. A picture is introduced, repeated with a difference, and then either enlarged or taken away, and the reader’s mood follows the picture without being told to.

Your job is to track the pattern and pin the change to a line. “The tone becomes sadder” is a feeling; “at line 10 the poem stops naming things” is an observation someone can check.

Key terms
  • Imagery (FIG 5.D): language addressed to the senses. Ask which sense, and how precise.
  • Image pattern (FIG 5.D): a set of related images across a poem. The relation between them, not any one of them, carries the argument.
  • Tonal shift (FIG 5.D): a change in the speaker’s stance. Locate it at a line and say what changed there: the diction, the addressee, the scale.
  • Scale (FIG 5.D): the move from one thing to all such things, or back. A poem that goes from a grove to “worlds” has widened deliberately.
  • Coinage (FIG 5.D): an invented or compounded word. No dictionary softens it, so the reader builds the image from the parts.
Text

About the text: Gerard Manley Hopkins, “Spring and Fall: to a young child,” written 1880, first published 1918 in Poems. Complete, 15 lines; the stress marks follow the standard text.

Márgarét, áre you gríeving
Over Goldengrove unleaving?
Leáves, líke the things of man, you
With your fresh thoughts care for, can you?
Ah! ás the heart grows older
It will come to such sights colder
By and by, nor spare a sigh
Though worlds of wanwood leafmeal lie;
And yet you wíll weep and know why.
Now no matter, child, the name:
Sórrow’s spríngs áre the same.
Nor mouth had, no nor mind, expressed
What heart heard of, ghost guessed:
It ís the blight man was born for,
It is Margaret you mourn for.

Model analysis

Hopkins builds an image only to take it away, and the taking away is the argument. The child’s grief has a place and a name at the start: “Goldengrove unleaving,” gilded, particular, losing its leaves in a verb Hopkins invented for it. By line 8 the same falling has become “worlds of wanwood leafmeal lie,” where the leaves are no longer countable and the grove is no longer anywhere. The shift completes at line 10: “Now no matter, child, the name.” Having widened the picture past recognition, the speaker drops pictures and names the subject instead: Margaret. Consolation and verdict arrive in one sentence, which is why the ending does not comfort.

Exam tip: pin a shift to a line number and say what changed there. A reader will pay Row B for “the imagery loses its proper nouns after line 8,” not for “the mood darkens.”

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing where this poem’s imagery shifts and what the shift accomplishes. Name the line and quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

The poem’s images move from something a child can point at to something no one can, and that movement is how Hopkins gets from leaves to mortality without changing the subject. At the start the loss is local and even pretty: Margaret grieves over “Goldengrove unleaving,” a place with a name and a gold in it. Eight lines later the autumn has swollen into “worlds of wanwood leafmeal lie,” a phrase built from words that barely exist, so the reader cannot picture it and is left with the sound of rot. After that the poem gives up on images. Once nothing can be pictured, the only thing left to name is the child herself.

Rubric: the claim locates a pattern and a change, not a mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what its wording does to the reader’s picture (Row B).

Lesson 5.5 · Unit 5 · Poetry II · FIG 6.B

Extended metaphor and conceit

A metaphor compares two things once. An extended metaphor keeps the comparison running, and every further line commits the poet to more of it. A conceit pushes until the pairing is openly improbable.

The weak paragraph explains what the image means. The strong one tests it: which features of the vehicle get used, which are quietly dropped, and where the logic strains. Strain is usually the point, not a flaw to excuse.

Key terms
  • Extended metaphor (FIG 6.B): one comparison sustained across lines or stanzas, developing instead of repeating.
  • Conceit (FIG 6.B): an extended metaphor between things a reader would never pair, held together by argument rather than by resemblance.
  • Tenor and vehicle (FIG 6.B): the subject being described and the thing it is described as. Name both before you interpret either.
  • Mapping (FIG 6.B): the point-by-point fit between them. Ask which parts of the vehicle do work and which the poem leaves unused.
  • Strain (FIG 6.B), where the comparison starts to cost something. The place a conceit nearly breaks is where its argument is most exposed.
Text

About the text: John Donne, “A Valediction: Forbidding Mourning,” written about 1611, first published 1633 in Poems. The final three stanzas, lines 25–36 of 36; the speaker is explaining his departure.

If they be two, they are two so
As stiff twin compasses are two;
Thy soul, the fixed foot, makes no show
To move, but doth, if the other do.

And though it in the center sit,
Yet when the other far doth roam,
It leans and hearkens after it,
And grows erect, as that comes home.

Such wilt thou be to me, who must,
Like th’ other foot, obliquely run;
Thy firmness makes my circle just,
And makes me end where I begun.

Model analysis

Donne’s compasses look like an image of equality and work as an image of divided labour. The vehicle is introduced as a pair, “stiff twin compasses”, but the stanzas immediately give the two feet different jobs: hers is “the fixed foot,” which “makes no show / To move, but doth,” while he is the one who must “obliquely run.” Constancy here is not stillness but motion made invisible, and it is hers. The circle he draws is only “just” because she stayed at the center, so the poem’s consolation is also a request: a strain worth naming rather than smoothing over.

Exam tip: a paragraph that only restates a conceit (“the compass shows they are connected”) tops out at Row B level 2. Level 4 commentary tests the mapping: which parts of the vehicle carry the claim, and what the pairing costs.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the compass conceit establishes about this relationship that a plain promise of faithfulness could not. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

The compass lets Donne argue that separation is a shape rather than a loss, which no promise of faithfulness could do alone. He makes her “the fixed foot,” a part that is precisely not inert: it “leans and hearkens after it” as he travels, so her constancy has a posture instead of being a feeling she reports. Then the geometry closes the case, “Thy firmness makes my circle just”, because a compass held steady at the center is the only reason the far leg comes back where it started. The image proves the return instead of promising it, though it also puts all the traveling on his side.

Rubric: the claim argues what the comparison accomplishes, not what it means (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary testing how the vehicle supports it (Row B), and the last sentence opens a Row C tension.

Lesson 5.6 · Unit 5 · Poetry II · LAN 7.C

Commentary that explains rather than restates

Most essays that lose Row B points are not missing evidence. They quote well and then say the quotation again in their own words. Naming a device is the same mistake with a technical term attached.

Commentary is the sentence that answers so what: how does this particular wording produce the effect you claimed? If your sentence would still be true with a different quotation pasted in, it is restatement.

Key terms
  • Commentary (LAN 7.C): the explanation of how quoted language supports the claim. Row B’s top point requires it after every piece of evidence.
  • Restatement (LAN 7.C): the quotation paraphrased. It looks like analysis because it sits in the analysis position.
  • Device-naming (LAN 7.C): “this is personification.” A label identifies; it does not explain, and alone it caps a paragraph at level 2.
  • The “so what” sentence (LAN 7.C): the move from what the words say to what they do. Write it after every quotation.
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.C): claims ordered so each depends on the one before. Level 4 needs commentary throughout it.
Text

About the text: Edna St. Vincent Millay, “What lips my lips have kissed, and where, and why,” first published in book form in The Harp-Weaver and Other Poems, 1923. Complete, 14 lines.

What lips my lips have kissed, and where, and why,
I have forgotten, and what arms have lain
Under my head till morning; but the rain
Is full of ghosts tonight, that tap and sigh
Upon the glass and listen for reply,
And in my heart there stirs a quiet pain
For unremembered lads that not again
Will turn to me at midnight with a cry.
Thus in the winter stands the lonely tree,
Nor knows what birds have vanished one by one,
Yet knows its boughs more silent than before:
I cannot say what loves have come and gone,
I only know that summer sang in me
A little while, that in me sings no more.

Model analysis · the same claim at two levels

Row B, level 2. Millay shows that the speaker is sad about the lovers she has forgotten. She uses personification when she says the rain “Is full of ghosts tonight,” which makes the weather seem haunted. She also compares herself to a “lonely tree” in winter, showing that she has lost a lot of people. At the end she says summer “sings no more,” a metaphor meaning her youth is over. These devices convey the poem’s sad tone.

Row B, level 4. Millay separates memory from feeling and gives the grief to the faculty that cannot name what it lost. The ghosts in the rain “tap and sigh / Upon the glass and listen for reply”: they do not appear, they behave, repeating the conduct of a lover at a window at night, so the weather performs the visits the speaker has just said she has forgotten. The tree makes the division explicit: it “Nor knows what birds have vanished one by one, / Yet knows its boughs more silent than before,” where one verb governs an ignorance and a certainty, and what survives is not the birds but the quiet they left. That is why the closing turn is so cold: “summer sang in me” puts the song inside her, so the loss she can still register is of her own capacity, not of the lads. A reader could call the sonnet an elegy for the lovers, but the last line insists that what stopped singing was in her.

Exam tip: both paragraphs use nearly the same evidence. The second explains how each phrase works and orders its claims so each builds on the last, which is what Row B’s fourth point asks for.

Write it

Write one paragraph on the poem’s final six lines, arguing something a reader could dispute. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and after each write a sentence explaining how its wording works.

Show a model response

In the closing six lines Millay turns forgetting from a failure into the condition the poem is mourning. The tree “knows its boughs more silent than before” without knowing which birds are gone, and the comparative does the work: silence is measured against a fullness the tree can no longer name, so absence registers as a quantity rather than a memory. The speaker then applies the figure to herself in the plainest words available, “I cannot say what loves have come and gone”, and the flatness matters, because a woman grieving particular lovers would reach for particulars. What she has left is the shape of a loss with the contents removed.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation, not a summary (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on how the wording works, and the second claim depends on the first (Row B, level 4).

Unit 5 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 5 review: structure, shift, and metaphor

Ten exam-style items on two poems this unit did not teach, a ballad by Keats and a lyric by Dickinson, with line numbers printed every fifth line so that you can cite the way a reader will expect you to.

Multiple choice

  1. Passage A. About the text: John Keats, “La Belle Dame sans Merci: A Ballad,” written 1819. Stanzas 1–5 (lines 1–20) of a twelve-stanza poem, in the version printed in Keats's 1820 volume.

    O what can ail thee, knight-at-arms,
    Alone and palely loitering?
    The sedge has withered from the lake,
    And no birds sing.

    5 O what can ail thee, knight-at-arms,
    So haggard and so woe-begone?
    The squirrel's granary is full,
    And the harvest's done.

    I see a lily on thy brow,
    10 With anguish moist and fever-dew,
    And on thy cheeks a fading rose
    Fast withereth too.

    I met a lady in the meads,
    Full beautiful—a faery's child,
    15 Her hair was long, her foot was light,
    And her eyes were wild.

    I made a garland for her head,
    And bracelets too, and fragrant zone;
    She looked at me as she did love,
    20 And made sweet moan.

    Lines 1–12 are best understood as spoken by

    The pronouns rule this out: “thee,” “thy brow,” “thy cheeks.” A speaker who says thee is addressing someone else, and the man addressed does not begin speaking until line 13.

    Correct. The opening voice asks twice “O what can ail thee” and then reports what he can see: a lily, a fading rose. He is a character in the scene, not a frame around it, and the poem's whole design depends on our getting the knight's story secondhand, through someone who met him only after the damage was done.

    The lady never speaks in the poem; she is reported. Assigning a speech to the figure a poem talks about, rather than to the voice doing the talking, is a common first-read error worth training yourself out of.

    Omniscience would not need to ask. The speaker's questions are real questions, and his information is limited to what a face shows, which is precisely why the knight has to answer at line 13.

  2. Passage A, above: Keats, “La Belle Dame sans Merci,” 1819, lines 3–8.

    The sedge has withered from the lake,
    And no birds sing. … The squirrel's granary is full,
    And the harvest's done.

    The images in lines 3–8 work together primarily to

    That is what the images report, not what they accomplish. Late autumn is the literal content; a function question asks what the content is being used for, and a pattern of completed and emptied things is doing more than telling time.

    There is no farm and no neglect. The granary is full and the harvest is done: everything in the landscape has been managed properly, which is exactly what makes the knight's ruin stand out against it.

    Correct. Read the pattern rather than the items: the sedge has withered, the birds have stopped, the granary is full, the harvest is done. Each image names a process already complete, and the speaker lays them beside a man who is “palely loitering”: living on after his own event is over. The landscape is not scenery here; it is the knight's condition, printed large.

    Nothing in the stanzas looks forward. The poem's images run one way, toward things ending, and the next stanza continues that direction with a rose that “fast withereth.” Supplying a consolation the poem withholds is the most tempting misreading of this ballad.

  3. Passage A, above: Keats, “La Belle Dame sans Merci,” 1819, lines 1–4.

    O what can ail thee, knight-at-arms,
    Alone and palely loitering?
    The sedge has withered from the lake,
    And no birds sing.

    The primary effect of the shortened fourth line that closes every stanza is to

    A gait is regular, and the stanza is not: three long lines and then a short one is a stumble, not a canter. Reaching for a sound-effect explanation is a habit worth breaking: form questions usually reward an argument about expectation, not about imitation.

    The short line is the ballad stanza Keats chose, repeated identically in all twelve stanzas. Treating a deliberate form as damage assumes the poet lost control of the one thing he most obviously controlled.

    The speaker does change, but at line 13: inside a stanza that ends with the same short fourth line as all the others. A feature that occurs every stanza cannot mark an event that occurs once.

    Correct. The ear sets up a four-beat expectation across lines 1–3 and the fourth line refuses to fill it: “And no birds sing,” “And the harvest's done,” “Fast withereth too,” “And made sweet moan.” Structure and subject say the same thing: each stanza runs out early, as the knight has. A reader could argue the short line simply follows ballad convention; the fact that its content is always a subtraction is what makes the stronger reading defensible.

  4. Passage A, above: Keats, “La Belle Dame sans Merci,” 1819, lines 9–12.

    I see a lily on thy brow,
    10 With anguish moist and fever-dew,
    And on thy cheeks a fading rose
    Fast withereth too.

    In context, the lily of line 9 and the fading rose of line 11 primarily serve to

    Correct. The verb is the evidence. “The sedge has withered from the lake” in line 3 returns as a rose that “fast withereth too” in line 12, and the word “too” welds the two withering things together. The metaphors do not decorate the knight's pallor; they enroll him in the landscape's exhaustion, which is why the reader believes in his condition before hearing a word of his story.

    Literalizing a metaphor is the classic FIG error. Nothing is placed on the knight; the speaker sees a lily where the skin is white and a rose where the colour is going, which is how the eye reads a fever.

    Wounds are never mentioned, and “anguish moist and fever-dew” describes sweat and sickness, not injury. Supplying a cause the poem declines to give reduces a mystery to a plot.

    Lilies and roses do belong to courtly praise, which is what makes this choice attractive, but here both flowers are failing, and a compliment that says a man is going pale and losing his colour is not a compliment.

  5. Passage A, above: Keats, “La Belle Dame sans Merci,” 1819, lines 12–13.

    Fast withereth too.

    I met a lady in the meads,

    The shift that occurs at line 13 marks the point at which

    The tense does change, from “I see” to “I met”, but the change belongs to a new speaker recalling his past, not to a dream. A dream comes later in the poem; at line 13 we are still in a man's account of something he says happened.

    Correct. Three stanzas of question are answered by nine stanzas of reply, and the hinge is a single unannounced line. This is why the poem cannot be read as a simple tale: the story of the lady reaches us only through a man the first speaker has already described as pale, haggard, and withering, so every claim in it comes pre-shadowed by its own outcome.

    The stanza form does not change: four lines, three long and one short, right through to the end. Look for the structural break in who is speaking and what is being done, not in a form that stays constant.

    The lady is spoken about, never spoken by. Noticing that a poem gives a character no voice is often the beginning of a strong interpretation, but that silence is exactly why this option is wrong.

  6. Passage B. About the text: Emily Dickinson, “A Bird, came down the Walk —” (Fr359), written about 1862, first published 1891. Complete, in the text of R. W. Franklin's reading edition.

    A Bird, came down the Walk —
    He did not know I saw —
    He bit an Angle Worm in halves
    And ate the fellow, raw,

    5 And then, he drank a Dew
    From a convenient Grass —
    And then hopped sidewise to the Wall
    To let a Beetle pass —

    He glanced with rapid eyes,
    10 That hurried all abroad —
    They looked like frightened Beads, I thought,
    He stirred his Velvet Head. —

    Like one in danger, Cautious,
    I offered him a Crumb,
    15 And he unrolled his feathers,
    And rowed him softer Home —

    Than Oars divide the Ocean,
    Too silver for a seam,
    Or Butterflies, off Banks of Noon,
    20 Leap, plashless as they swim.

    The speaker's position in the first three stanzas is best described as that of

    Correct. Line 2 states the arrangement outright, “He did not know I saw”, and everything through line 12 depends on it: the bird eats a worm raw, drinks from a grass, steps aside for a beetle, all without performing for anyone. The poem is a study of unobserved behaviour, which is what makes the speaker's small intervention at line 14 change the whole poem.

    The vocabulary is against it. A naturalist does not write “the fellow,” “convenient,” “frightened Beads,” or “Velvet Head”; those words carry judgment, affection and surprise. The speaker watches closely but is never neutral.

    The worm is bitten “in halves” and eaten “raw,” and the speaker records it without flinching or commenting. Supplying a horror the poem does not express is a tone error: the flatness of the report is the point.

    The bird is wild and the crumb is refused. Line 13's “Like one in danger, Cautious” tells you the speaker approaches this creature warily, on terms she does not control.

  7. Passage B, above: Dickinson, “A Bird, came down the Walk —”, lines 15–18.

    15 And he unrolled his feathers,
    And rowed him softer Home —

    Than Oars divide the Ocean,
    Too silver for a seam,

    The syntax that carries line 16 across the stanza break into line 17 chiefly serves to

    There is no error to correct. “Softer” sets up a comparison, and the poem simply declines to complete it until the next stanza: that is a syntactic choice, not a repair.

    The voice does not change; the sentence does not even stop. A single unbroken clause running across a stanza break is the strongest possible evidence that one speaker is still going.

    Correct. “Softer” at the end of line 16 leaves the reader holding an incomplete comparison across white space, and “Than” arrives only after the stanza has broken. The reader's sentence and the bird's flight are suspended in the same instant, which is why this break does work that a comma could not do. Notice, too, that the dash after “Home” keeps the line open rather than closing it.

    The bird goes away, not toward: “rowed him softer Home.” The crumb was offered and never taken, and nothing in the last two stanzas brings the bird back.

  8. Passage B, above: Dickinson, “A Bird, came down the Walk —”, lines 16–20.

    And rowed him softer Home —
    Than Oars divide the Ocean,
    Too silver for a seam,
    Or Butterflies, off Banks of Noon,
    20 Leap, plashless as they swim.

    The comparison developed in lines 16–20 is best described as

    “Too silver for a seam” describes the surface the oars divide, not the bird's feathers, and the line is about a wake that closes without a mark. Attaching a modifier to the wrong noun is how a conceit gets shrunk to a simile.

    The ocean is not given human qualities; it is what the oars divide. The rowing belongs to the bird, and the comparison runs from creature to boat, not from sea to person.

    No myth is named or implied. This distractor tests whether you will accept an impressive-sounding label without evidence: allusion questions require a specific text or figure being pointed at.

    Correct. The metaphor is not stated once but extended and then pushed: rowing implies water, water implies a wake, and Dickinson answers the implication by making the surface “Too silver for a seam,” then adds a second measure, butterflies that “Leap, plashless as they swim.” The comparison is being asked how far it can stretch, and its answer is that this flight disturbs nothing at all.

  9. Passage B, above: Dickinson, “A Bird, came down the Walk —”, lines 13–16.

    Like one in danger, Cautious,
    I offered him a Crumb,
    15 And he unrolled his feathers,
    And rowed him softer Home —

    The change in the poem's imagery after line 14 functions to

    Correct. Pin the shift to the line. Through line 12 every image is small, hard and close: an “Angle Worm in halves,” a “convenient Grass,” a “Wall,” “frightened Beads.” From line 15 the vocabulary is vast and frictionless: Oars, Ocean, Banks of Noon, swimming. The tonal change is not a mood the reader supplies; it is a documented change in the kind of noun the poem uses, and it begins the instant the bird declines the crumb.

    The crumb is offered and never accepted. The bird's answer to the offer is to unroll its feathers and go, which is the opposite of taming and the reason the last two stanzas feel like an escape.

    Nothing moves indoors; the poem's final images are the widest it has: an ocean and banks of noon. This choice reverses the poem's actual direction, from close to vast.

    The butterflies of line 19 are a second term in a comparison, not a second creature in the scene. Distinguishing what a poem shows from what it compares something to is half of reading figurative language correctly.

  10. Passage B, above: Dickinson, “A Bird, came down the Walk —”, lines 16–20.

    A student writes: “Dickinson compares the bird's flight to rowing, which shows that the flight is smooth.” Which revision best converts that observation into commentary?

    This names the device more precisely than the original, and naming is where most drafts stop. A reader who knows the term already knows the poem uses it; the sentence still does not say what the metaphor accomplishes, which is why it sits at Row B level 2.

    Listing the words is evidence without commentary. Quotation is necessary and not sufficient: Row B's higher points require the sentence that explains how those particular words support the claim.

    Correct. It starts from the logic of the comparison, uses two short quotations chosen for their wording, and explains what the quoted words do to the claim: a metaphor of rowing would normally imply disturbance, and the poem spends its last lines cancelling exactly that implication. That is the “so what” sentence: the flight is defined by an absence the metaphor makes measurable.

    This is warmer than the original and less useful. “Beautiful” and “love of nature” could be written about almost any Dickinson poem without reading this one, and a claim that survives without the text cannot be supported by it.

Lesson 6.1 · Unit 6 · Longer Fiction or Drama II · CHR 1.B, 1.E

Character evolution across a long work

A short story can build a character. A novel has to change one, and prove the change was earned. Four hundred pages give a writer room to plant a habit, keep it, test it, and break it in a single scene.

So read a long work for the moment a character's own language turns around. Before it she is explaining other people; after it she is explaining herself.

Key terms
  • Dynamic character (CHR 1.B): one whose values or self-understanding differ at the end. Not a change of mood: a change in what the person believes.
  • Recognition scene (CHR 1.E): the moment a character sees what the reader was allowed to suspect. It turns information into self-knowledge.
  • The character's own words (CHR 1.E): a novel marks a turn by giving her new vocabulary for herself. Watch the pronouns and the verbs.
  • Motive for the change (CHR 1.B): what forces it: a letter, a death, a refusal. Naming the cause keeps the claim defensible.
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.B): for a long work: what she was, what pressed on her, what she became.
Text

Description of: Jane Austen, Pride and Prejudice, first published 1813, chapter 36: Elizabeth alone in the lane with Darcy's letter. Paraphrased, not quoted.

Elizabeth reads the letter twice. The first reading is a refutation: she begins certain that Darcy's account of Wickham cannot be true, and puts the letter down believing she has weighed the matter impartially when she has only preferred her own side of it.

The second reading is different, and nothing new has arrived. Austen gives her no fresh evidence: only the facts she already had, re-sorted. She remembers that Wickham poured out his whole grievance to her, a stranger, on their first evening together; that he boasted he had no reason to avoid Darcy and then stayed away from the Netherfield ball; that nobody in Meryton had known anything of him before the militia brought him. Then she turns on herself, judging that she has been blind, partial, prejudiced and absurd (vain rather than in love, pleased by one man's attention and stung by the other's indifference), and ends by saying that until this moment she had never known herself.

Wording here is paraphrase; quote the novel itself when you write on this chapter.

Model analysis

Austen makes Elizabeth's change believable by refusing to give her new information at the turn. The second reading holds exactly the facts of the first (the confidences poured out to a stranger, the boast, the missed ball), and the chapter's work is to reorder them, not add to them. That is what makes the recognition hers. Had fresh evidence arrived, she would only have been misinformed, and a misinformed person needs correcting, not changing. Because the evidence is old, the fault sits in the reader inside the novel, and Elizabeth puts it there: in vanity rather than love, in a preference for the man who flattered her. Another reader could argue the self-punishment runs past what the errors warrant: a reading to argue, not a meaning to announce.

Exam tip: Row B's fourth point goes to commentary explaining how the evidence works. “Elizabeth changes after reading the letter” is plot; “the letter adds no facts, only an order” explains a change.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Austen gains by making Elizabeth's recognition depend on rereading rather than on new evidence. Argue from the sequence of events, and name the two details you lean on.

Show a model response

By staging the turn as a second reading, Austen makes Elizabeth responsible for her own error rather than a victim of someone else's. The two details that carry it are months old: Wickham handing his private history to a woman he had just met, and Wickham promising he would not avoid Darcy and then missing the ball. She had both at the time and made nothing of them, so the letter did not inform her: it removed the motive she had for arranging them charitably. That is why the shame aims inward rather than at Wickham: what she has lost is not a good opinion of him but confidence in her own judgment.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation (Row A); the two named details with the sentences explaining their timing are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 6.2 · Unit 6 · Longer Fiction or Drama II · SET 2.A, 2.B

Setting, atmosphere, and mood across a whole work

In a short story a setting gets one paragraph. In a novel it becomes a climate you live under for three hundred pages.

A long work's setting establishes an expectation and then enforces it. Ask two things of an opening description: what does it promise, and what does it make impossible?

Key terms
  • Atmosphere (SET 2.A): the feeling the place's details produce. Naming it is the first step, never the last.
  • Mood (SET 2.A): the effect on the reader, which need not match what the characters feel. That gap is often the argument.
  • Setting as condition (SET 2.B), in a long work the place is what nobody gets out of. It limits every choice made inside it.
  • Establish and enforce (SET 2.B): the opening states the terms; later chapters collect on them.
  • Frame setting (SET 2.C): a place described by an outsider before the story starts, so we learn the rules before meeting anyone bound by them.
Text

About the text: Edith Wharton, Ethan Frome, first published 1911. From the narrator's prologue: the paragraph on his first winter in Starkfield, complete and unbroken.

During the early part of my stay I had been struck by the contrast between the vitality of the climate and the deadness of the community. Day by day, after the December snows were over, a blazing blue sky poured down torrents of light and air on the white landscape, which gave them back in an intenser glitter. One would have supposed that such an atmosphere must quicken the emotions as well as the blood; but it seemed to produce no change except that of retarding still more the sluggish pulse of Starkfield. When I had been there a little longer, and had seen this phase of crystal clearness followed by long stretches of sunless cold; when the storms of February had pitched their white tents about the devoted village and the wild cavalry of March winds had charged down to their support; I began to understand why Starkfield emerged from its six months' siege like a starved garrison capitulating without quarter.

Model analysis

Wharton's prologue does not settle a mood over Starkfield; it explains a defeat before the reader has met anyone who lost. The narrator's first observation is the “contrast between the vitality of the climate and the deadness of the community,” which forecloses the easy reading: the weather is not draining these people, since the weather is the lively thing here. Light that should “quicken the emotions as well as the blood” succeeds only in “retarding still more the sluggish pulse”: the effect exactly reversed. Then the paragraph turns military, and the village emerges from “its six months' siege like a starved garrison capitulating.” Surrender becomes an annual event with a timetable, which is a harder condition than sadness: expected, survivable, repeated.

Exam tip: “the mood is bleak” is a paraphrase with an adjective in it. A function sentence names what the place makes impossible: here, the hope that better weather would help.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this prologue functions to do to a reader's expectations for the story that follows. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

Wharton uses the prologue to teach the reader that in Starkfield nothing improves, so that later hopes in the story read as errors rather than possibilities. Her first move is to separate the weather from the people: the narrator is struck by “the vitality of the climate” set against a community with none, which removes the obvious excuse for the town's condition. Her second is the sentence where brilliant light produces only the “retarding still more” of a pulse already sluggish: relief arrives and makes things slower. By the time Ethan appears, we have been told what to expect of hope here.

Rubric: the opening sentence claims a function, not a mood (Row A); each quotation is followed by a sentence explaining its wording (Row B).

Lesson 6.3 · Unit 6 · Longer Fiction or Drama II · NAR 4.B, 4.D

Point of view and narrative distance in a long work

In a short story you ask who is speaking. In a long work you also ask how far the teller now stands from what he is telling, and whether the story is even his.

Ishmael is the extreme case: he opens the novel in the first person and then hands most of it to another man's obsession.

Key terms
  • Narrative distance (NAR 4.D): the gap in time, knowledge, or sympathy between the teller and the events. It widens and shrinks within a chapter.
  • Retrospective narration (NAR 4.B): a narrator telling what he already survived. His survival is itself information the reader is given early.
  • Frame narrator (NAR 4.B): a first-person teller who gives most of the book to somebody else's story. Ask why the story needed a witness.
  • Reliability (NAR 4.D), not honesty but fit: does what the narrator notices match what the book shows?
  • Tone as distance (NAR 4.D): irony and comedy are measurements. They say how far the man telling stands from the man he is describing.
Text

About the text: Herman Melville, Moby-Dick; or, The Whale, first published 1851. Chapter 1, “Loomings” (the opening of the first paragraph, ending at “as soon as I can.”

Call me Ishmael. Some years ago—never mind how long precisely—having little or no money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of the world. It is a way I have of driving off the spleen and regulating the circulation. Whenever I find myself growing grim about the mouth; whenever it is a damp, drizzly November in my soul; whenever I find myself involuntarily pausing before coffin warehouses, and bringing up the rear of every funeral I meet; and especially whenever my hypos get such an upper hand of me, that it requires a strong moral principle to prevent me from deliberately stepping into the street, and methodically knocking people's hats off—then, I account it high time to get to sea as soon as I can.

Model analysis

Melville opens by installing a narrator close enough to the despair to report it and far enough away to find it funny) the distance that later lets the book belong to Ahab. “Call me Ishmael” is an instruction rather than an introduction: we are told what to use, not who he is, so the sentence gives a name and withholds a man. “Never mind how long precisely” does the same with time, since a narrator who could date the voyage declines to. Then the long sentence of symptoms builds toward violence and lands on “knocking people's hats off,” a joke the younger man on the wharf was in no condition to make. Distance here is measured in comedy, and a narrator this detached about his own crisis has room to spend the novel watching someone else's.

Exam tip: on a narration question, name the distance and what it permits. “The novel is told in first person” is a label, and labels earn nothing.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Melville gains by having Ishmael tell this from years away rather than from inside the mood. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer.

Show a model response

The distance between Ishmael-then and Ishmael-now lets Melville present a man in real trouble without asking us to worry about him. The present tense does most of it: going to sea is “a way I have of driving off the spleen,” a standing arrangement rather than a rescue, which tells us the crisis has a routine and therefore an end. The same steadiness turns the symptoms into a list he can recite: funerals, coffin warehouses, and at last the urge to go “knocking people's hats off.” Because he is not drowning while he speaks, we can watch him look elsewhere, which is what the novel will ask of him.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation about narration (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what the wording does (Row B).

Lesson 6.4 · Unit 6 · Longer Fiction or Drama II · FIG 5.C

Symbols and motifs

A motif is a thing that comes back. A symbol is a thing the work has made to mean. The difference is not in the object but in what has been done with it by the time you meet it again.

A play has its own way of doing it. It cannot narrate significance, so it puts an object, a sound, or an exit exactly where the significance already is.

Key terms
  • Motif (FIG 5.C): an image, object, or phrase that recurs. Recurrence by itself is a pattern, not yet a meaning.
  • Symbol (FIG 5.C): a detail the work keeps developing until it stands for more than itself. Earned by repetition plus change.
  • Placement (FIG 5.C), where the detail falls. The same object means differently in a first act and a last one.
  • Repetition with difference (FIG 5.C): the later appearance signifies because it is not identical to the earlier. Track what changed.
  • Stage image (STR 3.E): a sound, prop, or exit that carries the argument a speech has just stopped making.
Text

Description of: Henrik Ibsen, A Doll's House, first performed and published 1879, Act III: the last exchange between Nora and Torvald and the closing stage direction. Paraphrased, not quoted.

Nora has changed out of her fancy dress into everyday clothes and made Torvald sit down at the table. She has told him that in eight years they have never exchanged a serious word, that she was her father's doll-child and then his doll-wife, and that she is leaving. He appeals to her duties as wife and mother; she answers that she has duties to herself. Asked whether she still loves him, she says she does not, because the wonderful thing did not happen: when the ruinous letter came, he thought of his own name first.

At the end he asks whether he can never be more to her than a stranger. She picks up her bag and names the most wonderful thing of all, both of them so changed that their life together would be a real marriage, and says she no longer believes in it. She goes. Torvald drops into a chair, covers his face, looks round the empty room, and then hope strikes him and he repeats the phrase. From below comes the sound of a door closing.

Translations of this scene differ in wording, so quote from the edition in front of you rather than from this paraphrase.

Model analysis

Ibsen makes the door a symbol not by repeating it but by putting it where a line of dialogue should be. Doors and the locked letter-box run through the play as a motif of access, and Torvald holds the keys; the front door at the end is the first one Nora works herself. What converts motif into symbol is the timing. Torvald's last utterance is a question, he has just seized on the most wonderful thing of all, and the sound from below answers it. Because the answer is a noise and not a speech, Nora never has to refuse him on stage; the architecture refuses for her, after she has stopped being available to argue. A reader could hold that the sound stays ambiguous, an ending Torvald might still misread, and the play does not settle that either.

Exam tip: naming a symbol earns nothing. Say where the play places it and what the placement makes it do: that sentence is the commentary Row B pays for.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing whether the closing sound is a motif or a symbol, and what its placement accomplishes. Argue from the staging: who acts, who speaks, and what answers whom.

Show a model response

The closing sound is a symbol rather than a motif, because the play has spent three acts teaching the audience who is allowed to open things. Torvald keeps the letter-box key and decides what comes in and out, so doors have belonged to him. When the last one is worked from the other side, the change in who holds the handle is the argument. Placement finishes it: the noise lands on Torvald's revived hope, so his final question gets an answer he cannot negotiate with. Ibsen ends the marriage with a stage effect instead of a speech.

Rubric: the first sentence takes a defensible position on a real distinction (Row A); the staging details and the sentences explaining their effect are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 6.5 · Unit 6 · Longer Fiction or Drama II · STR 3.C, 3.E

The structure of a play: acts, scenes, and the soliloquy

A play wears its structure on the outside. Acts and scenes are labeled, which makes them easy to mistake for the whole of the architecture.

The structure that pays is inside the speeches. A soliloquy is an argument with a shape, and in tragedy the shape is usually a defeat: the character reasons to one conclusion and does the other thing.

Key terms
  • Act and scene (STR 3.C): divisions are choices. Ask what was put offstage, who is left alone, and where the interval falls.
  • Soliloquy (STR 3.E): a character alone, thinking aloud. Treat it as a structure with steps, not a mood with lines.
  • Turning point (STR 3.C): the moment after which the outcome is fixed. Locate it by what has become impossible.
  • An argument against itself (STR 3.E): a speech that assembles reasons and then abandons them. Whatever ends the reasoning is the real motive.
  • Function, not location (STR 3.C): naming where the turn sits earns nothing; say what it does to everything after it.
Text

About the text: William Shakespeare, Macbeth, Act I, scene vii, lines 1–28: Macbeth alone, before the murder of Duncan. First printed in the Folio of 1623; spelling and pointing here follow the Project Gutenberg edition.

If it were done when 'tis done, then 'twere well
It were done quickly. If th' assassination
Could trammel up the consequence, and catch
With his surcease success; that but this blow
Might be the be-all and the end-all—here,
But here, upon this bank and shoal of time,
We'd jump the life to come. But in these cases
We still have judgement here; that we but teach
Bloody instructions, which being taught, return
To plague th' inventor. This even-handed justice
Commends th' ingredience of our poison'd chalice
To our own lips. He's here in double trust:
First, as I am his kinsman and his subject,
Strong both against the deed; then, as his host,
Who should against his murderer shut the door,
Not bear the knife myself. Besides, this Duncan
Hath borne his faculties so meek, hath been
So clear in his great office, that his virtues
Will plead like angels, trumpet-tongued, against
The deep damnation of his taking-off;
And pity, like a naked new-born babe,
Striding the blast, or heaven's cherubin, hors'd
Upon the sightless couriers of the air,
Shall blow the horrid deed in every eye,
That tears shall drown the wind. I have no spur
To prick the sides of my intent, but only
Vaulting ambition, which o'erleaps itself
And falls on th' other—

Model analysis

The speech is built to lose, and the shape of the loss is the scene's event. Macbeth opens on a condition, “If it were done when 'tis done”, and the first twelve lines test it and find it false: the blow cannot be “the be-all and the end-all,” because “even-handed justice” returns the poisoned cup “To our own lips.” That objection is prudential, and self-interested enough to be answerable. So he changes ground. “He's here in double trust” opens a moral case that ends in images too large to argue with: virtues “trumpet-tongued,” pity “like a naked new-born babe.” Having proved it three ways, he finds “no spur” for the deed except “Vaulting ambition, which o'erleaps itself.” Nothing in twenty-eight lines argues for the murder. Shakespeare puts the turning point in a speech that decides against it.

Exam tip: on a structure question, name the unit and then what it does. “Macbeth has doubts” is character; “the soliloquy exhausts its reasons and he proceeds anyway” is structure.

Write it

Map the speech in four steps: the condition, the practical objection, the moral objection, and the sentence that ends the reasoning. Then write one paragraph arguing what Shakespeare gains by letting Macbeth win the argument against himself.

Show a model response

By giving Macbeth the winning argument and the losing will, Shakespeare makes the rest of the play a study of a man who was never persuaded. The speech grants him every reason: the blow cannot be “the be-all and the end-all,” and Duncan's virtues will “plead like angels” against it. Then the reasoning stops, and what is left is “Vaulting ambition”: named as a spur he does not have rather than a case he has made. A Macbeth who talked himself into it could plead confusion; this one has already published the verdict against himself, so every later horror arrives with his own judgment attached.

Rubric: the first sentence is a defensible interpretation of the speech's structure (Row A); the quoted phrases with the sentences explaining their placement are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Unit 6 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 6 review: change, mood, and symbol

Ten exam-style items on a novel and a play this unit did not teach, the interrupted wedding in Jane Eyre and the Ghost's charge in Hamlet, both of them scenes in which a long work turns on a few lines.

Multiple choice

  1. Passage A. About the text: Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre, first published 1847; volume II, chapter 11 (chapter 26 in one-volume editions), at Jane's wedding to Mr. Rochester. Immediately before the excerpt the clergyman has delivered the prayer-book charge that asks whether either party knows of any impediment to the marriage. Jane narrates.

    He paused, as the custom is. When is the pause after that sentence ever broken by reply? Not, perhaps, once in a hundred years. And the clergyman, who had not lifted his eyes from his book, and had held his breath but for a moment, was proceeding: his hand was already stretched towards Mr. Rochester, as his lips unclosed to ask, “Wilt thou have this woman for thy wedded wife?” — when a distinct and near voice said:

    “The marriage cannot go on: I declare the existence of an impediment.”

    The clergyman looked up at the speaker, and stood mute; the clerk did the same; Mr. Rochester moved slightly, as if an earthquake had rolled under his feet: taking a firmer footing, and not turning his head or eyes, he said, “Proceed.”

    In context, the two sentences beginning “When is the pause after that sentence ever broken by reply?” primarily serve to

    Uncertainty is the one thing these sentences do not express. “Not, perhaps, once in a hundred years” is a confident generalisation about weddings in general, made by someone who has had years to think about this one.

    Correct. The present tense gives it away: “When is the pause … ever broken.” For two sentences the novel leaves 1840-something and speaks from the desk where Jane is writing, addressing a reader directly. That distance is the frame this whole scene is delivered through: we are watching a woman narrate the worst minute of her life from safely outside it, which is why the prose can be so composed while the event is not.

    Nothing marks these sentences as speech; the quotation marks in the excerpt belong to the clergyman's formula and to the voice from the back of the church. Attributing a narrator's aside to a character is a distance error worth checking for whenever a sentence changes tense.

    Jane is the bride; she is as present as anyone in the room. A retrospective narrator is not an absent one, and confusing distance in time with distance in place is the misreading this option is built on.

  2. Passage A, above: Brontë, Jane Eyre, 1847, ch. 26.

    … his hand was already stretched towards Mr. Rochester, as his lips unclosed to ask, “Wilt thou have this woman for thy wedded wife?” — when a distinct and near voice said …

    The placement of the interruption, after the clergyman's hand is already out and his lips already open, chiefly functions to

    The text says the opposite: he “had not lifted his eyes from his book,” and a moment later he “looked up at the speaker, and stood mute.” Surprise, not collusion.

    The objection is not a delay; it is an impediment declared, and the paragraph's own diction, “cannot go on”, refuses the idea of resumption. Treating a structural turning point as a pause in the schedule flattens the scene into plot summary.

    Correct. Brontë spends a full clause getting the clergyman's hand up and his mouth open, and then cuts across him with a dash. Structure is doing the work of shock here: a reader who has been told nothing ever breaks this pause is made to watch the machinery of the ceremony get all the way to its last question before it is stopped mid-sentence. Move the interruption two lines earlier and the scene loses precisely this.

    No layout is given: we learn only that the voice is “distinct and near.” A true observation about a different kind of detail cannot answer a question about placement.

  3. Passage A, above: Brontë, Jane Eyre, 1847, ch. 26.

    Mr. Rochester moved slightly, as if an earthquake had rolled under his feet: taking a firmer footing, and not turning his head or eyes, he said, “Proceed.”

    Mr. Rochester's reaction is best described as

    Calm is the surface, but the simile beneath it is an earthquake, and a man genuinely surprised does not need to take “a firmer footing.” The sentence gives you the shock and the suppression in the same clause; an answer that takes only the suppression has read half of it.

    He conceals it almost entirely: he does not turn his head or his eyes, and he speaks one steady word. What the reader sees is not visible to the congregation; it reaches us only through Jane's simile, which is a different thing from public panic.

    Indifference would not move at all. “Moved slightly” and “taking a firmer footing” are the actions of a man bracing against something he has felt, and “Proceed” is a command issued against an interruption, not a dismissal of one.

    Correct. This is a character revealing himself in a gesture rather than a speech. The earthquake registers the recognition; the firmer footing and the refusal to turn register the decision to go on anyway; and “Proceed” is the whole of his answer. A reader could argue he is merely stubborn: the tell is that he does not ask who is speaking or what the impediment is, which suggests he already knows both.

  4. Passage A, above: Brontë, Jane Eyre, 1847, ch. 26.

    The clergyman looked up at the speaker, and stood mute; the clerk did the same …

    The detail that the clergyman “stood mute” and that “the clerk did the same” contributes most to the mood of the scene by

    Correct. Atmosphere in this passage is made of who is allowed to speak. The clergyman had a script and loses it; the clerk, whose whole office is to answer, copies the silence; and into that vacuum fall exactly two utterances, “I declare the existence of an impediment” and “Proceed.” The church becomes a room with no official voice in it, which is what makes the scene feel less like a ceremony than a standoff.

    Muteness here is shock, not judgment. The clergyman was mid-question and had not so much as lifted his eyes; nothing in the excerpt gives either man an opinion about the marriage.

    “Did the same” makes the clerk an echo, not a rival: the phrase exists to double the silence, not to rank the two men. A detail included for its repetition should be read for what the repetition produces.

    No such arrival is hinted at in the excerpt. Importing the novel's later developments into a mood question replaces what the scene is doing with what you remember happening next.

  5. Passage A, above: Brontë, Jane Eyre, 1847, ch. 26. The clergyman's charge, just before the excerpt, asks whether either party knows of any impediment.

    The word “impediment” carries unusual weight in the excerpt chiefly because

    The excerpt gives no such earlier use, and an item about a word's weight has to be answerable from the text in front of you. Build the case from the repetition you can point to.

    The narrator explains nothing; she comments only on how seldom the pause is broken. A word that stops a wedding does not need glossing, and the scene's speed depends on its not being glossed.

    Correct. This is how a repeated word turns into a symbol: the first use is liturgy (a formula the narrator has just told us is never answered, “not, perhaps, once in a hundred years”), and the second use is a declaration, in a “distinct and near voice,” that the thing the formula names exists. The word does not change meaning; the church's relation to it does, and the whole second half of the novel proceeds from that reversal.

    Frequency is not weight, and a claim about the whole novel cannot be checked against this excerpt. Notice that the passage's power comes from the word appearing twice within a page, not once in five hundred.

  6. Passage B. About the text: William Shakespeare, Hamlet, Act I, scene v (first printed 1603–1623), the Ghost's first speech to Hamlet on the battlements. Lines are numbered as printed here, from the beginning of the excerpt.

    GHOST. I am thy father's spirit,
    Doom'd for a certain term to walk the night,
    And for the day confin'd to fast in fires,
    Till the foul crimes done in my days of nature
    5 Are burnt and purg'd away. But that I am forbid
    To tell the secrets of my prison-house,
    I could a tale unfold whose lightest word
    Would harrow up thy soul, freeze thy young blood,
    Make thy two eyes, like stars, start from their spheres,
    10 Thy knotted and combined locks to part,
    And each particular hair to stand an end,
    Like quills upon the fretful porpentine.
    But this eternal blazon must not be
    To ears of flesh and blood. List, list, O, list!
    15 If thou didst ever thy dear father love—

    HAMLET. O God!

    GHOST. Revenge his foul and most unnatural murder.

    The Ghost's speech is organized chiefly as

    No crime is narrated at all until the last line, and even there it is named, not described. The speech is remarkable precisely for how much it declines to say.

    Correct. Track the turns: “I am forbid / To tell” (a prohibition), “I could a tale unfold” (a withheld narrative), five lines of consequences, “But this eternal blazon must not be” (the refusal repeated), and then the swerve, “List, list, O, list!”, into a demand that has nothing to do with the tale. Structure is the argument here: the Ghost builds enormous pressure around a secret and then spends it on an order.

    The Ghost addresses Hamlet throughout, “thy father's spirit,” “thy young blood,” “thy dear father”, and asks nothing of God. The fires and the prison-house are description, not petition.

    Distrust of the official account is a fair summary of Hamlet's position later; it is not what the speech does. The Ghost never mentions what Denmark has been told, and reading the play's premise back into its lines is a habit to catch.

  7. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Hamlet, I.v, excerpt lines 8–12.

    Would harrow up thy soul, freeze thy young blood,
    Make thy two eyes, like stars, start from their spheres,
    10 Thy knotted and combined locks to part,
    And each particular hair to stand an end,
    Like quills upon the fretful porpentine.

    All of the following describe the function of the figurative language in lines 8–12 EXCEPT

    This is a function the lines perform. The tale itself is withheld, so its size can only be given indirectly, by what “whose lightest word” would do to a listener. Measuring the unsaid by its effects is the speech's central manoeuvre.

    This is also a function they perform. Soul, blood, eyes, hair: the Ghost translates “the secrets of my prison-house” into a sequence of things that happen to flesh, which is the only vocabulary “ears of flesh and blood” could receive.

    This too is accurate. The comparisons fall from eyes like stars leaving “their spheres” to hair standing like “quills upon the fretful porpentine”: cosmic to barnyard in four lines, so that the horror ends up close enough to touch.

    Correct: this is the exception. The lines specify nothing about the crime; the word “murder” does not arrive until the excerpt's last line, and its manner is never given here. An EXCEPT item usually hides the right answer among three true statements, so test each option against the quoted lines rather than against the play.

  8. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Hamlet, I.v, excerpt lines 3–5.

    And for the day confin'd to fast in fires,
    Till the foul crimes done in my days of nature
    5 Are burnt and purg'd away.

    In context, these lines most clearly reveal that

    Correct. “The foul crimes done in my days of nature” are his own, committed while he was alive, and the adjective “foul” returns twelve lines later attached to the murder he wants avenged. A character who uses the same word for what was done to him and what he did is a complicated figure to take orders from, and the play never resolves the question this opening raises about the authority of its own ghost.

    The lines say the reverse. He is serving a term for crimes of his own, which is why he walks at night and fasts in fires by day. Reading a character as innocent because he is wronged is a habit the exam is designed to catch.

    The punishment is explicitly temporary: “for a certain term,” and “Till” the crimes “Are burnt and purg'd away.” A sentence with an end is not hell, and the difference matters to how much trust the speech asks for.

    He is mid-sentence in every sense: doomed, confined, fasting, and waiting to be purged. Nothing here is finished, and rest is what he does not have.

  9. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Hamlet, I.v.

    The Ghost's relationship to the events he reports is best characterized as that of

    He is the least disinterested figure available: the victim, asking for revenge. And there is no other testimony: the speech forbids the very disclosures that would produce any.

    Correct. Notice how the prohibition and the demand fit together: “But that I am forbid / To tell the secrets of my prison-house” closes off the ground on which he stands, and “Revenge his foul and most unnatural murder” asks Hamlet to act on what remains. A narrator whose credibility cannot be examined is a structural problem for a play, not merely a character trait: Hamlet spends two acts inventing a way to test it.

    Nobody sends him and nobody supplies his words; he speaks as the father himself, in the first person, from his own punishment. A messenger can be checked against the one who sent him, which is exactly the safeguard this speech lacks.

    He is not a bystander: the murdered man is himself, named in the third person only in the final line, where “his … murder” means his own. Watch for pronouns doing quiet work at the end of a speech.

  10. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Hamlet, I.v, excerpt lines 14–17.

    To ears of flesh and blood. List, list, O, list!
    15 If thou didst ever thy dear father love—

    HAMLET. O God!

    GHOST. Revenge his foul and most unnatural murder.

    The interruption of line 15 by Hamlet's “O God!” primarily functions to

    The cry is the sound of listening too well. He has just been told his father's spirit walks in fire, and “List, list, O, list!” has demanded his whole attention; the interruption proves the demand worked.

    The Ghost's most important line has not yet been spoken. A speech broken off mid-clause is a speech about to continue, and the shape of the conditional, “If thou didst ever …”, guarantees a demand is coming.

    Correct. Shakespeare sets the hinge of the play across three speeches. Line 15 opens a condition and stops; Hamlet fills the gap with two syllables; and the imperative lands alone, at the head of its own line, where nothing softens it. Had the Ghost said it all in one breath, “Revenge” would be the end of a sentence; broken this way, it is the beginning of everything after it.

    He does not: he learns the manner of the death only later in the scene, and his reaction here is horror at the speaker, not recognition of a suspect. Confusing an emotional outburst with knowledge is how readers over-read a two-word line.

Lesson 7.1 · Unit 7 · Short Fiction III · CHR 1.B, STR 3.E

Sudden change and what a late reversal asks of a reader

A story can spend forty pages building a man and then undo him in a paragraph. When the undoing comes at the end, it is not one more event in the sequence. It is an instruction about how to read the sequence.

So do not stop at what changed. Ask what caused the change, what it costs, and what the earlier pages mean now that you cannot unread it.

Key terms
  • Reversal (STR 3.E): a late turn in a character's situation or understanding. Its function is to put the earlier text under a new light, not to add an episode to it.
  • Change in a character (CHR 1.B): what he was, what pressed on him, what he became. A claim that skips the pressure is a summary of two states, not an argument.
  • Epiphany (CHR 1.B): a recognition that arrives suddenly. The test is whether the text supplied its cause: an unearned epiphany is a device, an earned one is evidence.
  • Retrospective reading (STR 3.E): the rereading a late turn forces. Ask which earlier sentence means something different now.
  • Function over event (LAN 7.B): “he changes at the end” reports plot; “the change converts his whole career into evidence” makes a claim.
Text

Description of: Leo Tolstoy, “The Death of Ivan Ilyich,” first published 1886, the final chapter: Ivan Ilyich's last two hours. Paraphrased from the public-domain English translation by Louise and Aylmer Maude; no wording below is quoted.

For three days Ivan Ilyich screams almost without stopping, in a voice the household can hear through two closed doors. His struggle is not with the pain alone. It is with the conviction that his life has been a correct and decent one and that he is being destroyed anyway.

In the last two hours something gives way. His schoolboy son slips into the room, catches his father's hand, presses it to his lips and cries. At that moment Ivan Ilyich sees a light, and with it a recognition: his life has not been what it should have been, and it may still be possible to set that right. He feels sorry for the boy, and then, for the first time in years, sorry for his wife. He tries to ask their forgiveness, mispronounces the word, and decides that whoever needs to understand will understand.

Then he looks for the fear he has fought for three days and cannot find it. Where death had been, there is light. He says aloud that it is finished, draws one more breath, and stops.

Wording here is paraphrase; quote a public-domain translation directly when you write on this story.

Model analysis

Tolstoy makes the reversal believable by giving it the smallest possible cause. Nothing arrives in those last two hours except a boy's hand and a kiss, no doctor, no argument, no new fact about the life Ivan Ilyich has led. What changes is not his information but his position: he is for the first time the object of someone's plain, unembarrassed tenderness, and the pity he receives is what lets him feel pity for his wife. That one movement outward dissolves a terror three days of screaming could not. The reversal therefore turns the whole earlier story into evidence: every correct dinner and well-managed promotion becomes the thing that had to be argued away. A reader could object that the ending grants him more comfort than his life earned; the text leaves room for that argument too.

Exam tip: a STR 3.E question wants a function. “Ivan Ilyich changes at the end” reports the event; “the change makes his respectability the evidence against him” says what the change does.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Tolstoy gains by making a child's gesture (rather than an argument, a doctor, or a confession) the thing that turns Ivan Ilyich. Name two details from the passage and explain how each supports your claim.

Show a model response

Tolstoy lets a schoolboy end a struggle that three days of adult attendance could not, and that choice is the argument. The two details that carry it are small. The boy catches his father's hand and puts it to his lips; then Ivan Ilyich mispronounces his request for forgiveness and decides not to repair it. Neither is an explanation. The first offers him something none of the people nursing and managing him have offered, attention with nothing wanted back, and the second shows him surrendering the precision he built a career on. Once getting it right stops mattering, the case he had been making for his own life stops mattering too, and the fear goes out with it.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation (Row A); the two named details with the sentences explaining what each makes possible are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 7.2 · Unit 7 · Short Fiction III · NAR 4.D

Unreliable narration: reading past the teller

A narrator can be wrong without ever being caught in a lie. Unreliability is rarely a false statement you can disprove; it is a way of speaking that gives you reason to doubt the speaker while he is busy being convincing.

That doubt has to be built out of his own sentences. Disliking a narrator proves nothing. Being able to point at the word where he overplays his hand proves something.

Key terms
  • Unreliable narrator (NAR 4.D): a narrator whose account the text itself gives you grounds to distrust. The grounds must come from his words, not your judgment of him.
  • Self-justification (NAR 4.D): a case argued before anyone has brought a charge. The defense is the evidence; note what it assumes you were about to say.
  • Over-insistence (NAR 4.D): a claim pressed harder than it needs. Adverbs of manner give it away: calmly, healthily, definitively.
  • Gap between report and reaction (NAR 4.D): the distance between what he reports and what he feels about it. A steady tone laid over a horror is a signal.
  • What unreliability does to interpretation (NAR 4.D, LAN 7.B): it doubles the text: one story the narrator means to tell, another the reader assembles. A thesis may argue about either, but it has to say which.
Text

About the text: Edgar Allan Poe, “The Cask of Amontillado,” first published 1846. The story's opening paragraph, complete and unbroken.

The thousand injuries of Fortunato I had borne as I best could, but when he ventured upon insult I vowed revenge. You, who so well know the nature of my soul, will not suppose, however, that I gave utterance to a threat. At length I would be avenged; this was a point definitively settled—but the very definitiveness with which it was resolved precluded the idea of risk. I must not only punish, but punish with impunity. A wrong is unredressed when retribution overtakes its redresser. It is equally unredressed when the avenger fails to make himself felt as such to him who has done the wrong.

Model analysis

Montresor establishes his unreliability in the same breath as his competence. He opens with “the thousand injuries of Fortunato,” a round number standing in for a specific one, and it is the only account of the offense the story will ever give. He then borrows credibility instead of earning it: “You, who so well know the nature of my soul” addresses a listener already on his side, which spares him from proving anything to anyone else. By the time he arrives at his rule, that he must “punish with impunity,” he has quietly replaced a grievance with a definition and a wrong with a syllogism. A different reader could take that logic as evidence of a mind in full control rather than a mind concealing a gap; both readings begin in the same three sentences.

Exam tip: NAR 4.D wants the signal and its consequence. “Montresor is unreliable” is a label; “the injuries are never itemized, so the reader is handed a motive without a cause” is analysis.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what this opening asks you to accept and what it gives you no way to check. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each does the work you name. It may help to set Montresor beside the narrator of “The Tell-Tale Heart” in Lesson 1.4: both insist, but not on the same thing.

Show a model response

Montresor's first paragraph asks the reader to agree to a crime whose cause it never produces. He says he bore “the thousand injuries of Fortunato,” a phrase that sounds like a tally and is not one, no injury is named here or anywhere in the story, so the offense stays whatever a sympathetic reader is willing to supply. He also skips the work of persuading a stranger: “You, who so well know the nature of my soul” speaks to someone who already believes him. Poe's other confessing narrator protests his sanity and destroys it by protesting; Montresor never protests at all, and his composure is the problem. The doubt has to be assembled from what he leaves out.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation about the narration, not the plot (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary explaining how its wording produces the effect (Row B).

Lesson 7.3 · Unit 7 · Short Fiction III · STR 3.D, FIG 5.A

Irony: who knows what, and when

Irony is not a tone you sprinkle on a paragraph. It is a relationship between two kinds of knowledge: what is said and what is meant, what was intended and what arrived, what a character knows and what you know.

So the word is useful only once you can say who holds which knowledge. Name the two parties first; the label follows.

Key terms
  • Verbal irony (FIG 5.A): a gap between what a speaker says and what the speaker means, which context lets the reader cross. The speaker is in on it.
  • Situational irony (STR 3.D): a gap between what an action was meant to produce and what it produced. Surprise is not enough: the outcome must reverse the intention.
  • Dramatic irony (STR 3.D): a gap between what a character knows and what the reader knows. It is made by structure: what you were told, and when.
  • Irony as a structural relation (STR 3.D): each kind is defined by who is mistaken and who can see it. Irony is architecture, not mood.
  • Test before you label (FIG 5.A, LAN 7.B): fill three blanks: who is mistaken, about what, and who watches. If you cannot, “ironic” is decoration.
Text

Description of: Anton Chekhov, “The Bet,” first published 1889, part II: the letter the lawyer leaves on the last night of his fifteen years of confinement, and what follows it. Paraphrased from the public-domain English translation by Constance Garnett; no wording below is quoted.

The banker, ruined and afraid of paying, creeps into the lodge before dawn meaning to kill the lawyer. He finds him asleep at the table with a written page beside him.

The letter says that fifteen years of books have given the lawyer everything the world can offer at second hand (mountains and oceans, women's love, the songs of poets), and have also taught him to despise all of it. Human wisdom, he writes, is a mirage; the people outside have taken lies for truth and ugliness for beauty, and will die as their ancestors did. To prove in action how completely he despises what the banker lives by, he renounces the two million he once dreamed of as paradise, and in order to lose every right to it he will climb out five hours before the appointed time and so break the agreement.

The banker reads it, kisses the sleeping man, and goes out weeping at himself. In the morning the watchmen report that the prisoner has gone over the wall. The banker takes the letter and locks it in his safe.

Wording here is paraphrase; quote a public-domain translation directly when you write on this story.

Model analysis

Chekhov builds the ending out of one reversal and then refuses to let it settle. The lawyer wins the argument the bet existed to decide, he lasts the fifteen years, and destroys the win himself by leaving five hours early. That is situational irony in the strict sense: not a surprise, but an outcome that reverses the intention, produced by the very person who held it. Around it sits a second, structural irony only the reader is placed to see, since we know the banker has come to murder a man who has already decided to make the murder pointless. Every step across the garden means something to us it cannot mean to him. The safe is the last turn: the banker files a letter despising money in the one place he keeps money.

Exam tip: before writing the word ironic, fill the three blanks, who is mistaken, about what, and who can see it. A sentence that cannot fill them has named a tone, not a structure.

Write it

Write one paragraph naming the kind of irony that governs this ending and arguing what it does to the reader's judgment of the two men. Lean on two specific details and explain how each supports your claim. Because the passage is described rather than quoted, argue from the events, not from wording.

Show a model response

The ending of “The Bet” runs on situational irony, and Chekhov uses it to make both men lose at once. The first detail is the lawyer's exit five hours early: he has proved he could endure the fifteen years and then throws the proof away, turning a victory into a gesture with no witness. The second is the safe. A man who walked into the lodge intending murder is spared by his intended victim, and his response is to lock the letter up with his money, because valuables are the only category he has. Neither man is improved by what happens. The irony denies the reader a winner, and that refusal is what makes it structural rather than a joke at someone's expense.

Rubric: sentence one names a kind of irony and makes a claim about its effect (Row A); the two details with the sentences explaining what each reverses are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 7.4 · Unit 7 · Short Fiction III · NAR 4.D, LAN 7.B

Ambiguity: when a text refuses to resolve

Some gaps do not close on rereading. The Turn of the Screw has one at its center: either the governess sees ghosts at Bly, or she supplies them, and both readings survive to the last page.

That is not a licence to write “it could mean anything.” A text that supports two readings still rules out a hundred others, and your thesis has to do the ruling out.

Key terms
  • Ambiguity (NAR 4.D): a place where a text sustains two readings at once. Not vagueness and not an error: both are supported, and the text declines to choose.
  • Unverified narration (NAR 4.D): an account with no second account to check it against. It puts the narrator's reliability inside the argument rather than behind it.
  • Defensible interpretation (LAN 7.B): a claim a reader could dispute and the text gives you means to support. “The story is ambiguous” names the problem, not a position.
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.B): what the text establishes, what it withholds, and what follows from the pair.
  • Accounting for the alternative (LAN 7.C): naming the strongest form of the reading you reject and showing what your evidence does with it. A Row C move, not a hedge.
Text

Description of: Henry James, The Turn of the Screw, first published 1898, chapter 3: the governess's first sighting of a figure on the tower. Paraphrased, not quoted.

It is a June evening at Bly. The governess has left the children and walks the grounds in the free hour before dinner, pleased with the place and with herself in it. She has been indulging a small recurring daydream: that at the turn of a path someone would appear, stand before her, smile and approve, the handsome employer who hired her in London and asked never to be troubled about the children again.

Then the fancy comes true, and does not. A man is standing at the top of one of the two square towers of the house. She feels the shock twice over: first that what she had been imagining is actually there, and then a violent correction, the man looking down at her is not the person she had assumed. The evening goes still around her, the rooks stop calling, and the gold stays in the sky. He is bareheaded. He holds her eyes, moves the length of the battlements without once looking away, and goes. She does not know him, and there is no one at Bly he could be.

Wording here is paraphrase; quote James's own sentences when you write on this chapter.

Model analysis

James makes the ambiguity structural rather than atmospheric by giving the governess a wish before he gives her a witness. The daydream of a man appearing on the path comes first; the man on the tower comes second, and her own report frames him as the fancy turned real. That order lets a reader take the figure as something the house produces or as something her imagination has just finished building, and the chapter supplies no third person to settle it. A defensible thesis therefore argues one side and then says what the other rests on: the apparition reading on a stranger who matches no one at Bly, the projection reading on his arriving exactly where she had put him.

Exam tip: “the text is ambiguous” names the problem, not a position. Readers reward the essay that chooses a reading and then accounts for the one it turned down: that is Row C sophistication, not fence-sitting.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing which reading chapter 3 better supports: a figure the governess encounters, or a figure her expectation supplies. Take the side in your first sentence, argue from the order of the details, and give one sentence to the reading you reject.

Show a model response

Chapter 3 supports the apparition reading slightly better, because what the governess sees refuses the shape of her wish. Her daydream is warm and specific: a man at the turn of a path, near enough to smile at her, and it is her employer. What arrives is a stranger on a roof, silent and far too high up to smile at anyone, and her account registers the mismatch as a second shock: a correction her own mind had no reason to invent against itself. The projection reading is strongest on timing, since he appears the moment she has finished imagining him. But a mind conjuring its own comfort does not usually interrupt itself to say the comfort is the wrong man.

Rubric: sentence one takes a disputable position rather than describing the ambiguity (Row A); each detail is followed by a sentence explaining what it does (Row B); granting what the rejected reading rests on is the Row C move.

Lesson 7.5 · Unit 7 · Short Fiction III · FIG 5.C

Symbol and theme in short fiction

A symbol is not assigned; it is earned. A writer puts an object in front of you, then brings it back under different pressure, and the second appearance means what the first one could not.

Theme works the same way. The exam does not want a moral about life: “people are hypocrites” fits a thousand stories. It wants a claim about this work, in the terms the work uses.

Key terms
  • Symbol (FIG 5.C): an object whose meaning a text builds by repeating it in changed circumstances. The repetition does the assigning, not the reader.
  • Motif (FIG 5.C): a repeated image or phrase. It becomes a symbol when the repetitions begin to argue with each other.
  • Context of the repetition (FIG 5.C): what has changed between appearances: place, hour, who holds the thing. Where the change is, the meaning is.
  • Theme as a claim about the work (LAN 7.B): a sentence about what this text does with an idea, not a proverb it illustrates. Arguable, and impossible to make without the text.
  • Naming versus explaining (LAN 7.C): “the ribbon symbolizes innocence” is a label; the sentence saying how its fall changes what a character can believe is analysis.
Text

About the text: Nathaniel Hawthorne, “Young Goodman Brown,” first published 1835. From the opening paragraph and, after a cut, from the forest scene at the story's midpoint; the ellipsis marks the cut.

And Faith, as the wife was aptly named, thrust her own pretty head into the street, letting the wind play with the pink ribbons of her cap…

The cry of grief, rage, and terror was yet piercing the night, when the unhappy husband held his breath for a reply. There was a scream, drowned immediately in a louder murmur of voices, fading into far-off laughter, as the dark cloud swept away, leaving the clear and silent sky above Goodman Brown. But something fluttered lightly down through the air and caught on the branch of a tree. The young man seized it and beheld a pink ribbon.

“My Faith is gone!” cried he, after one stupefied moment. “There is no good on earth; and sin is but a name. Come, devil; for to thee is this world given.”

Model analysis

Hawthorne never tells you the ribbon means anything. He makes it mean something by returning it in the wrong place. In the village it is an ornament the wind is allowed to play with, part of a wife's cap; in the forest the same lightness becomes a descent: it “fluttered lightly down through the air” out of a sky the sentence has just left “clear and silent,” so nothing else is on hand to account for it. Brown reads the object as testimony and convicts on it in one line: “My Faith is gone!” The pun is his, not the narrator's, which is where the theme sits. The story is less about whether the wilderness is real than about how little evidence a man needs before sin “is but a name.”

Exam tip: a theme must be arguable and must require this story. “People are hypocrites” fits any story; “Brown's despair rests on one object he never examines” can only be argued from this one.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the pink ribbon does in this story, not what it stands for. Use both appearances, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and close with a theme stated as a claim about the story.

Show a model response

The ribbon does its work by changing hands: Faith wears it, the forest returns it, and Brown never asks how. In the village it is ordinary enough for the wind to play with, one of “the pink ribbons of her cap.” In the forest the same lightness falls: something that “fluttered lightly down through the air” from a sky Hawthorne has just cleared and silenced, leaving no rival explanation in the scene. Brown accepts it as proof in a single line and gives up the world. Hawthorne's story is therefore about the speed of that surrender: it takes one piece of evidence, unexamined, for a man to convict everyone he loves.

Rubric: the claim concerns what the object does (Row A); the two quotations with the sentences explaining what changes between appearances are evidence and commentary (Row B); the last sentence states a theme as a claim about the story, not a moral.

Lesson 7.6 · Unit 7 · Short Fiction III · LAN 7.C

Sophistication: tension, complexity, and alternative readings

Row C is worth one point, and it is the point students chase hardest and miss most. It is not paid for a beautiful last sentence, a thought about the human condition, or “some readers might argue.”

It goes to an argument that stays complicated on purpose: a tension named and held open, an alternative reading taken seriously, or a reading set in a wider context. You earn it by refusing to tidy the text up.

Key terms
  • Sophistication (LAN 7.C): the Row C point: a complex argument sustained through the essay, not a sophisticated phrase dropped into it.
  • Tension (LAN 7.C): two things a text does that pull against each other, both supported by its words. Naming both and keeping both is the move.
  • Alternative reading (LAN 7.C): the strongest case against your thesis, stated fairly and then answered with evidence. A hedge answers nothing.
  • False sophistication (LAN 7.C): a grand generalization, a balanced gesture, an ornate closing chord. Readers are trained to see past all three.
  • Broader context (LAN 7.D): the writer's other work, the genre, the period, used to sharpen a claim rather than to decorate it.
Text

About the text: James Joyce, “The Dead,” from Dubliners, first published 1914. The closing paragraph of the story, complete.

A few light taps upon the pane made him turn to the window. It had begun to snow again. He watched sleepily the flakes, silver and dark, falling obliquely against the lamplight. The time had come for him to set out on his journey westward. Yes, the newspapers were right: snow was general all over Ireland. It was falling on every part of the dark central plain, on the treeless hills, falling softly upon the Bog of Allen and, farther westward, softly falling into the dark mutinous Shannon waves. It was falling, too, upon every part of the lonely churchyard on the hill where Michael Furey lay buried. It lay thickly drifted on the crooked crosses and headstones, on the spears of the little gate, on the barren thorns. His soul swooned slowly as he heard the snow falling faintly through the universe and faintly falling, like the descent of their last end, upon all the living and the dead.

Model analysis

Earns Row C. Joyce's snow does two incompatible things in the same sentences, and the paragraph declines to choose. It erases: it falls “on every part of the dark central plain,” on the hills, the bog, the churchyard, until Ireland is one surface and Michael Furey's grave is no more marked than anything else. Yet the prose keeps restoring what it buries, “the crooked crosses and headstones,” “the spears of the little gate,” “the barren thorns”, so the levelling arrives as an inventory of particulars. That is why the final phrase can hold “the living and the dead” in one object without consoling anybody: Gabriel's new generosity toward a dead boy and his diminishment as a husband are the same event, and Joyce stops before either one wins.

Only sounds like it. Ultimately, Joyce reminds us that death comes for us all. The snow falls on rich and poor alike, and in the end we are all equal beneath it. Some readers might argue the ending is hopeful; others might argue it is despairing. Both are valid, and perhaps that is the beauty of great literature: a haunting image that stays with the reader long after the story ends.

Exam tip: the second paragraph has a general truth, a balanced gesture and a closing flourish, and not one sentence a reader could dispute. Row C is earned inside the argument, by quoting the words that create the tension, never by a final chord after it.

Write it

Name one tension in this paragraph, something the snow does that works against something else it does, and write four or five sentences holding both sides open. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and do not resolve the tension in your last sentence.

Show a model response

The snow both covers Ireland and itemizes it. Joyce sends it “on every part of the dark central plain” and then west into “the dark mutinous Shannon waves,” a sweep in which local differences disappear into one weather. But when it lands it lands on particulars, “the crooked crosses and headstones” and “the barren thorns,” each named separately, so the burying keeps producing a list of what is being buried. Gabriel is caught in the same double motion: a dead boy has just made him smaller, and the paragraph hands him a vision wide enough to hold the whole country. The last phrase sets “the living and the dead” side by side without saying which the snow has come for.

Rubric: the tension is named in the first sentence and still open in the last (Row C); each quotation is followed by a sentence explaining what the wording does, and the paragraph moves between imagery and Gabriel's situation (Row B).

Unit 7 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 7 review: Short Fiction III

Ten questions on two passages you have not met in the lessons, the opening sentences of a Poe confession and of a Hawthorne marriage, covering the unit's work on late reversal, unreliable narration, irony, ambiguity, theme, and the kind of claim that actually earns Row C; click an option to see why it is right or wrong.

Multiple choice

  1. About the text: Edgar Allan Poe, “The Black Cat,” first published in the Saturday Evening Post, 19 August 1843. Passage A: the opening paragraph, quoted through its seventh sentence.

    For the most wild, yet most homely narrative which I am about to pen, I neither expect nor solicit belief. Mad indeed would I be to expect it, in a case where my very senses reject their own evidence. Yet, mad am I not—and very surely do I not dream. But to-morrow I die, and to-day I would unburthen my soul. My immediate purpose is to place before the world, plainly, succinctly, and without comment, a series of mere household events. In their consequences, these events have terrified—have tortured—have destroyed me. Yet I will not attempt to expound them.

    The movement from “Mad indeed would I be to expect it” to “Yet, mad am I not” serves chiefly to

    No examination and no verdict appear anywhere in the passage; the narrator is the only person who has brought his sanity up, and a denial that no one asked for is the reason a reader cannot treat it as a finding.

    Correct. He introduces the word mad twice before a single event is described, first as a concession and then as a denial, so the first thing the passage puts in front of a reader is not the household events but the mind reporting them.

    He does say that he dies tomorrow and would unburthen his soul, but the two clauses named in the stem are about his mind rather than his guilt, and no word of regret appears in these sentences.

    “Very surely do I not dream” does insist on waking fact, but that is a different claim from “mad am I not”; treating sanity and wakefulness as one assurance is the misreading, since a man may be wide awake and still unreliable.

  2. Passage A, above: Poe, “The Black Cat,” 1843.

    My immediate purpose is to place before the world, plainly, succinctly, and without comment, a series of mere household events.

    In context, the promise to set the events down “plainly, succinctly, and without comment” is ironic chiefly because

    He calls the events mere household events, but the next sentence says they terrified, tortured, and destroyed him, so the passage does not let a reader treat them as ordinary.

    Refusing to expound the events is consistent with promising no comment, not at odds with it; a narrator who withholds explanation is keeping that promise rather than breaking it.

    Correct. Before this sentence he has called his narrative “most wild, yet most homely,” argued twice about his sanity, and announced his execution: self-commentary in a heavily dashed, inverted style, which is exactly what plainness and no comment would rule out.

    Publishing rather than hiding the account explains why he is writing at all; it says nothing about the manner he promises, and irony here depends on manner.

  3. Passage A, above: Poe, “The Black Cat,” 1843.

    Placing “But to-morrow I die” before any account of the events has the primary effect of

    Correct. The ending is handed over in the fourth sentence, so there is no suspense left about what becomes of him; what remains for the reader to judge is the chain of causes, which is the pressure the story wants.

    The clause dates the writing, not the events: the household events are said to lie behind him, and the passage never places them on a calendar.

    He addresses “the world” and speaks of unburthening his soul, which is the language of a confession written for readers; nothing marks this as testimony filed with a court.

    “To-morrow I die” is flat and unhedged, and the urgency of unburthening his soul today depends on there being no reprieve; hope would undo the sentence's work.

  4. Passage A, above: Poe, “The Black Cat,” 1843.

    … a series of mere household events. In their consequences, these events have terrified—have tortured—have destroyed me.

    The phrase “a series of mere household events” stands in sharpest tension with

    That clause is about whether readers will accept the story, not about how large the events are; a narrator can ask for no belief at all and still call his material small.

    This clause concerns the reliability of his perceptions rather than the scale of what he perceived, so it presses on the narrator, not on the word mere.

    Declining to expound fits the word mere rather than fighting it: a man who thinks his material ordinary has nothing much to explain.

    Correct. Mere household promises the small and the domestic, and the next clause escalates through three verbs to destroyed; holding the ordinary word and the catastrophic one in adjacent sentences is the paragraph's method.

  5. Passage A, above: Poe, “The Black Cat,” 1843.

    Which of the following claims about Passage A would be most defensible on the evidence of these sentences alone?

    Nothing here suggests a motive to deceive: he expects to die tomorrow and asks for no belief, which is the opposite of pleading. A thesis has to be defensible from the text, not merely dramatic.

    Correct. Every sentence before the events arrive is about the teller: his expectations, his senses, his sanity, his death, his manner. That is evidence for a claim about what the opening does, and it leaves the question of his madness genuinely open.

    The passage denies this outright and offers no event to support it either way. Choosing a reading the text explicitly contests, with nothing to answer the denial, is the error this unit keeps warning about.

    This is the “it could mean anything” non-thesis. Unreliability narrows the questions a reader can settle; it does not cancel interpretation, and an ambiguous text still supports arguable claims about how its ambiguity is built.

  6. About the text: Nathaniel Hawthorne, “The Birth-Mark,” first published in The Pioneer, March 1843, collected in Mosses from an Old Manse, 1846. Passage B: the opening; the second paragraph is quoted to the end of its first sentence.

    In the latter part of the last century there lived a man of science, an eminent proficient in every branch of natural philosophy, who not long before our story opens had made experience of a spiritual affinity more attractive than any chemical one. He had left his laboratory to the care of an assistant, cleared his fine countenance from the furnace smoke, washed the stain of acids from his fingers, and persuaded a beautiful woman to become his wife.

    In those days when the comparatively recent discovery of electricity and other kindred mysteries of Nature seemed to open paths into the region of miracle, it was not unusual for the love of science to rival the love of woman in its depth and absorbing energy. …

    The order of the actions in the first paragraph (leaving the laboratory, cleaning his face and hands, persuading a woman to marry him) characterizes Aylmer chiefly as

    The sentence says he left the laboratory to the care of an assistant, which is delegation, not renunciation, and it keeps the marriage inside the same list as washing acid off his fingers.

    The smoke and the acid stains are removed in the course of a single clause and treated as the ordinary residue of the work; the paragraph never reports a social cost.

    Correct. Four verbs run in one series (left, cleared, washed, persuaded), so the wife arrives as the fourth item on a list of arrangements, and the order of the sentence is itself the characterization.

    Nothing in the paragraph is involuntary: he had already “made experience of a spiritual affinity” and weighed it against the chemical ones, and every verb in the list is something he does on purpose.

  7. Passage B, above: Hawthorne, “The Birth-Mark,” 1843.

    … who not long before our story opens had made experience of a spiritual affinity more attractive than any chemical one.

    In describing Aylmer's marriage as “a spiritual affinity more attractive than any chemical one,” the narrator

    Correct. Affinity and attraction are the chemist's words for what makes substances combine, and the comparison rates the wife against reagents; the marriage is reported in the vocabulary of the work it supposedly interrupts.

    This is the paraphrase trap. The sentence ranks one affinity above another at one moment, which is a comparison of attractions, not a declaration about the whole of his life, and the next paragraph immediately reminds us how often science wins that contest.

    The narrator calls him “an eminent proficient in every branch of natural philosophy,” so his standing is established, not questioned; the sentence is about what drew him away, not about failure.

    “Spiritual” here is set against “chemical” to mark a difference of kind, a person rather than a compound, and the story treats the attachment as an earthly one; reading it as piety loses the joke the pairing is making.

  8. Passage B, above: Hawthorne, “The Birth-Mark,” 1843.

    The second paragraph differs from the first chiefly in that it

    The wife is still only “a beautiful woman” who has been persuaded; she is given no thought, no speech, and no name in either paragraph, and that silence is itself worth noticing.

    The second paragraph supports the first rather than undercutting it: it explains why a man of that period might weigh a wife against a discovery at all.

    Time does not advance here. “In those days” steps back from the story's clock to describe a whole period, which is why the paragraph can generalize about what was “not unusual.”

    Correct. Paragraph one reports one marriage; paragraph two names the era of electricity and “the region of miracle” and tells us how common such a rivalry was, so Aylmer becomes a specimen of his age rather than an oddity.

  9. Passage B, above: Hawthorne, “The Birth-Mark,” 1843.

    All of the following contribute to the narrator's ironic distance from Aylmer EXCEPT

    This does create distance: measuring a woman on the scale of attractions invites a reader to see the habit of mind that Aylmer cannot see, which is how ironic distance is built.

    This creates distance too. The syntax equates persuading a wife with washing his hands, a judgment the sentence delivers by order alone, without a word of criticism.

    Correct. This is the one piece of plain plot in the paragraph: an arrangement he made, reported without evaluation. It tells you the laboratory is still running; it does not invite you to look down on him.

    This creates distance by making the narrator visible: “our story” admits a teller who has chosen where to begin, and a visible teller is one a reader can stand beside.

  10. Passage B, above: Hawthorne, “The Birth-Mark,” 1843.

    Which of the following states a theme suggested by Passage B as an arguable claim about the story rather than as a moral about life?

    This is advice, not interpretation. A theme statement has to be arguable about the text, someone must be able to disagree with it and go to the words to check, and no one will argue against a maxim.

    Correct. It makes a claim about what the author's presentation does, it names the evidence that would prove it (the list of verbs, the chemical vocabulary), and a reader could defend the opposite view that the marriage genuinely draws him out of the laboratory.

    This is accurate summary. Plot restated is the most common substitute for a thesis, and it earns nothing in Row A because there is no interpretation in it to defend.

    This is historical context, and the second paragraph does supply it, but a theme must be a claim about the work; background belongs in commentary that explains the text, not in place of it.

Lesson 8.1 · Unit 8 · Poetry III · FIG 5.A, 5.B

Ambiguity in diction: words that hold two meanings

A poem can mean two things at once without being confused. When a word carries two live senses and the lines around it support both, the doubleness is the poem's work, not a puzzle to solve and throw away.

So when a word could go two ways, don't choose the reading you like and move on. Run each sense through the rest of the poem and see what it forces the other lines to mean. Sometimes one reading breaks a later line and drops out. Sometimes both survive, and saying so, with the evidence for each, is the strongest thing you can write about the poem.

Key terms
  • Ambiguity (FIG 5.A): a word or phrase that sustains more than one meaning, each supported by the text. Vagueness means less; ambiguity means more.
  • Denotation and connotation (FIG 5.A): the dictionary sense and the associations it drags along. A second meaning usually arrives through the connotations.
  • Double meaning (FIG 5.B): one word doing two jobs in the same line, so the line can be read twice without a syllable changing.
  • Testing a reading (FIG 5.B): take the sense you suspect and run it through the whole poem. A reading that contradicts a later line is out.
  • Held tension (LAN 7.D), when two readings both survive the test, argue why the poem needs both. Naming the conflict is worth more than settling it.
Text

About the text: Emily Dickinson, “Tell all the truth but tell it slant —”, written about 1872 and published after her death; Dickinson printed almost nothing in her lifetime. Complete, eight lines, one stanza; her dashes and capitals as the manuscript-based editions give them.

Tell all the truth but tell it slant —
Success in Circuit lies
Too bright for our infirm Delight
The Truth's superb surprise
As Lightning to the Children eased
With explanation kind
The Truth must dazzle gradually
Or every man be blind —

Model analysis

Dickinson builds her advice out of a word that could convict her of it. “Success in Circuit lies” reads two ways at once: lies as is located, so truth succeeds by taking the long way round, and lies as tells falsehood, so the same line admits that going around is a kind of lying. Neither sense breaks anything later in the poem, and the second is why “slant” in line one never feels entirely innocent. The doubleness reaches the verb too: truth “must dazzle gradually,” and to dazzle is both to delight the eye and to overwhelm it, which is precisely the blindness the last line holds in reserve. A reader could argue this is simply a poem about kindness in teaching. The second sense of lies is what makes that reading incomplete.

Exam tip: when two readings both hold, don't pick one to look decisive. Write the sentence that names the tension and shows which words make each reading possible: that sentence is doing Row C work.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing that Dickinson's advice carries a warning about itself. Make a claim a reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how the wording of each produces the double sense you name.

Show a model response

Dickinson recommends indirection in language that keeps admitting what indirection costs. The poem tells us to “tell it slant,” a word that means angled rather than false, but the very next line puts success where truth “in Circuit lies,” and lies will not stay in its harmless sense. The line can say that truth is found in the roundabout route and that the roundabout route is a lie, and the poem gives no way to rule either out. That is why the final threat lands on us rather than on the liar: handled badly, gradual truth leaves “every man be blind.” The advice is sound and slightly guilty at the same time.

Rubric: the first sentence is a defensible interpretation (Row A); the quoted phrases followed by sentences explaining their double sense are evidence and commentary (Row B), and the refusal to resolve the two readings is a sophistication move (Row C).

Lesson 8.2 · Unit 8 · Poetry III · STR 3.C

Form as argument: what a sonnet's shape is for

A sonnet is not fourteen lines with a rhyme scheme attached. It is a machine for staging an argument: a stretch of lines to make a charge, a turn where the footing changes, and an ending that claims to settle the case.

That is why “the poem is a sonnet” earns nothing on its own. The point is what each part is given to do, and whether the closing lines actually win the argument or only sound like they have.

Key terms
  • Sonnet (STR 3.C): fourteen lines whose rhyme divides the thinking. The division is what the form is for; the count is just how you recognize it.
  • Octave and sestet (STR 3.C): the Italian eight-and-six: eight lines to set a problem or bring a charge, six to answer it.
  • Volta (STR 3.C): the turn where the argument changes its method. Locate it by the sentence that starts doing a different job, not by the line number.
  • Closing couplet (STR 3.C): the English finish, two rhymed lines that pronounce a verdict. Always ask what the verdict rests on.
  • Apostrophe (FIG 5.C): direct address to someone absent, dead, or abstract. It supplies an argument with an opponent who has to stand there and take it.
Text

About the text: John Donne, “Death, be not proud” (Holy Sonnet 10), first published in Poems, 1633, two years after Donne's death. Complete, fourteen lines, rhyming abba abba cddc ee: an Italian frame with an English couplet at the end. Spelling modernized as in standard editions.

Death, be not proud, though some have called thee
Mighty and dreadful, for thou art not so;
For those whom thou think'st thou dost overthrow
Die not, poor Death, nor yet canst thou kill me.
From rest and sleep, which but thy pictures be,
Much pleasure; then from thee much more must flow,
And soonest our best men with thee do go,
Rest of their bones, and soul's delivery.
Thou art slave to fate, chance, kings, and desperate men,
And dost with poison, war, and sickness dwell,
And poppy or charms can make us sleep as well
And better than thy stroke; why swell'st thou then?
One short sleep past, we wake eternally
And death shall be no more; Death, thou shalt die.

Model analysis

Donne wins this argument by changing tactics exactly where the form lets him. The octave only contradicts Death's reputation, “thou art not so”, and then offers comfort, which is the weaker move, since a mourner can refuse comfort. At line nine the sestet stops disputing Death's power and reassigns his rank: “Thou art slave to fate, chance, kings, and desperate men” puts him last in his own line, and “poppy or charms can make us sleep as well” makes him replaceable as well as servile. The couplet then passes sentence, and its grammar turns: for thirteen lines Death has been the thing spoken to, and in “Death, thou shalt die” he becomes at last the subject of a verb: his own. Whether that is proof or only rhyme is worth arguing, since the verdict rests on “we wake eternally,” which the poem asserts and never demonstrates.

Exam tip: a structure question wants the job each section performs and the consequence of the order. Charting the rhyme scheme is description; saying that the octave argues and the sestet demotes is analysis.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the sestet (lines 9–12) does that the octave could not do. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each wording produces the effect you claim.

Show a model response

The octave argues with Death's reputation; the sestet takes away his employment. Donne first insists “thou art not so,” which only denies a claim and leaves Death standing where he was. In the sestet the speaker changes the terms and calls him “slave to fate, chance, kings,” a list in which Death arrives after three masters and is therefore staff rather than sovereign. Then the ordinary world underbids him: “poppy or charms can make us sleep as well.” If a drug does the job, the office is worthless. A grieving reader can dispute a denial; an itemized demotion is much harder to argue with.

Rubric: the opening sentence claims a difference in function between the parts (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what the wording accomplishes (Row B).

Lesson 8.3 · Unit 8 · Poetry III · STR 3.D, NAR 4.C

Mapping the shifts in a poem

Most poems change direction more than once, and the changes are rarely announced. A shift can be a tense, a person addressed, a new image, a conjunction, even a piece of punctuation. Each one is a decision, and the pattern they make together is usually your thesis.

So before you write anything on Q1, spend five minutes marking the poem: bracket every place something changes and write one word beside it for what the change does. The map costs almost nothing and it stops you from writing a paragraph on the first stanza and running out of poem.

Key terms
  • Shift (STR 3.D): any point where a poem changes tense, addressee, image, syntax, or punctuation. Look for the change first, then argue its function.
  • Shift map (STR 3.D): the marked-up poem: brackets at each change, one word each for what it does. Pre-writing, not decoration.
  • Anaphora (STR 3.D): a repeated opening phrase. Repetition is structural before it is musical: it tells you exactly when the pattern breaks.
  • Syntactic turn (STR 3.D): a change in sentence shape: a conjunction, a long subordinate clause, a question. “But” is a shift even when the images do not move.
  • Speaker (NAR 4.C): the voice inside the poem, not the poet. What the speaker declines to say is part of how the poem characterizes him.
Text

About the text: Robert Frost, “Acquainted with the Night,” first published in 1928, the year it was collected in West-Running Brook. Complete: four tercets and a closing couplet in terza rima.

I have been one acquainted with the night.
I have walked out in rain—and back in rain.
I have outwalked the furthest city light.

I have looked down the saddest city lane.
I have passed by the watchman on his beat
And dropped my eyes, unwilling to explain.

I have stood still and stopped the sound of feet
When far away an interrupted cry
Came over houses from another street,

But not to call me back or say good-bye;
And further still at an unearthly height,
One luminary clock against the sky

Proclaimed the time was neither wrong nor right.
I have been one acquainted with the night.

Model analysis

Every shift in this poem moves toward another person and then turns away, so that the repetition at the end reads as a result rather than a refrain. The first four lines are four sealed sentences, each one beginning “I have” and stopping at a period. The syntax only opens out when someone else appears: the watchman arrives and the sentence runs over its line, “And dropped my eyes, unwilling to explain”, the one moment of contact, refused in the act of being noticed. The cry two lines later is corrected the same way, by a conjunction: “But not to call me back.” Then the gaze goes up, and the only voice with authority “Proclaimed the time was neither wrong nor right,” a verdict that declines to judge. Line one returns because nothing in between was allowed to change it.

Exam tip: map the shifts before you draft a thesis. A thesis built from the pattern the shifts make will already contain a line of reasoning; a thesis written from the first stanza usually leaves you summarizing the rest.

Write it

Mark every shift you can find, then write one paragraph arguing what the return of the first line at the end accomplishes. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each supports your claim.

Show a model response

Frost repeats his first line last so that the poem's shape becomes its argument: the speaker's night is a circuit, not a journey. The middle of the poem keeps offering exits (a watchman, and a cry that “Came over houses from another street”), and the speaker closes each one, dropping his eyes and then noting that the cry was “not to call me back.” When the clock finally speaks, it “Proclaimed the time was neither wrong nor right,” refusing the judgment that might have given the walk a direction. Returning to the opening line admits that nothing has been resolved; the word “acquainted” is exact, since an acquaintance is a relation you keep having without it ever developing.

Rubric: the first sentence makes a defensible claim about structure (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on what the shift does (Row B); reading “acquainted” as the poem's own name for a circuit is a sophistication move (Row C).

Lesson 8.4 · Unit 8 · Poetry III · FIG 5.C, 6.D

Symbol, allusion, and context

An allusion is a poem borrowing a scene you already know and expecting you to bring it. That makes outside knowledge useful, and dangerous, because it is easy to spend a paragraph proving you recognized the reference and never return to the poem.

The rule is simple: context comes in to make the poem's own words mean more, then you go straight back to those words. And when your knowledge and the poem disagree, don't correct the poet. Ask what the figure is being asked to do.

Key terms
  • Allusion (FIG 6.D): a reference to something outside the text that the reader is expected to supply. It makes a claim by borrowing one you already accept.
  • Symbol (FIG 5.C): a concrete image the poem keeps developing until it stands for more than itself. Establish the literal before you argue the rest.
  • Context (FIG 6.D): knowledge from outside the poem: a myth, a date, a translator's name. Evidence for the reading, never a substitute for it.
  • Vehicle and tenor (FIG 5.C): in a simile, the borrowed picture and the thing it illuminates. Analyze the vehicle for what it makes the tenor feel like.
  • A reading problem (FIG 6.D): the moment outside knowledge conflicts with the text. Treat it as a question about function, not a factual scorecard.
Text

About the text: John Keats, “On First Looking into Chapman's Homer,” written October 1816, printed in Leigh Hunt's Examiner that December and collected in Poems, 1817. Complete Italian sonnet, fourteen lines; spelling as in the 1817 text. Chapman is George Chapman, whose English Homer appeared between 1598 and 1616.

Much have I travell'd in the realms of gold,
And many goodly states and kingdoms seen;
Round many western islands have I been
Which bards in fealty to Apollo hold.
Oft of one wide expanse had I been told
That deep-brow'd Homer ruled as his demesne;
Yet did I never breathe its pure serene
Till I heard Chapman speak out loud and bold:
Then felt I like some watcher of the skies
When a new planet swims into his ken;
Or like stout Cortez when with eagle eyes
He star'd at the Pacific—and all his men
Look'd at each other with a wild surmise—
Silent, upon a peak in Darien.

Model analysis

Keats spends the octave turning reading into territory, “the realms of gold,” islands held by bards “in fealty to Apollo”, so that the sestet can treat a book as a coastline. Then comes the famous problem: it was Balboa, not Cortés, who first stood above the Pacific at Darién. Naming the error settles nothing, because the simile does not need the right explorer; it needs a man looking at more water than his language has a word for. That is why the last two lines drop the leader entirely and give us “all his men” who “Look'd at each other with a wild surmise”: the response is guesswork, shared, and wordless. Keats has picked the wrong conqueror and the exactly right posture: the instant before knowledge arrives, which is what a first reading of Homer felt like.

Exam tip: outside knowledge earns nothing by itself. Bring the context in, then spend the next sentence on the poem's wording: that sentence is the one Row B pays for.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the Cortez simile does for the poem, given that the historical detail is wrong. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each supports your claim.

Show a model response

The misnamed explorer costs Keats nothing because the simile is built out of silence, not out of history. What the poem needs from Darién is a group of Europeans facing an ocean they have no account of, and that is exactly what it stages: the men “Look'd at each other with a wild surmise,” turning to one another because there is nothing to say to the water. The final line then withholds even that, “Silent, upon a peak in Darien”, and ends the sonnet on a word for a place none of them can yet describe. A reader could object that precision should matter in a poem about a translator's accuracy. The answer is that Keats is imitating the moment before accuracy, when a reader has seen something and not yet named it.

Rubric: the claim concerns the figure's function rather than the error (Row A); the quotations with the sentences explaining their wording are evidence and commentary (Row B); answering the strongest objection is a sophistication move (Row C).

Lesson 8.5 · Unit 8 · Poetry III · LAN 7.B, 7.C, 7.E

Writing the poetry essay under time

Forty minutes is enough for a six-point essay and not enough for a good one written badly. The students who run out of time almost never run out of ideas; they run out because they started writing before they knew what they were arguing.

So spend the first nine minutes not writing. Read twice, mark the shifts, and commit to a thesis that names an interpretation and the two techniques you will use to prove it. Everything after that is execution.

Key terms
  • Thesis (LAN 7.B): one sentence naming a defensible interpretation and the two techniques that will carry it. Not a plan, a claim.
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.C): the order of your body paragraphs, each one made possible by the last. If they could be shuffled, you have a list.
  • Commentary (LAN 7.C): the sentences after a quotation explaining how its wording produces the effect. Row B's fourth point requires this consistently.
  • Sophistication (LAN 7.E): one deliberate move: a tension held open, an objection answered, or the poem placed in a wider context. One, done well.
  • Triage (LAN 7.E): what you sacrifice when the clock beats you. Cut the third body paragraph and the conclusion; never cut commentary.
Text

About the text: Gerard Manley Hopkins, “God's Grandeur,” written 1877, first published in Poems of Gerard Manley Hopkins, edited by Robert Bridges, 1918. Complete sonnet, fourteen lines. Some printings indent several lines; set flush left here.

The world is charged with the grandeur of God.
It will flame out, like shining from shook foil;
It gathers to a greatness, like the ooze of oil
Crushed. Why do men then now not reck his rod?
Generations have trod, have trod, have trod;
And all is seared with trade; bleared, smeared with toil;
And wears man's smudge and shares man's smell: the soil
Is bare now, nor can foot feel, being shod.

And for all this, nature is never spent;
There lives the dearest freshness deep down things;
And though the last lights off the black West went
Oh, morning, at the brown brink eastward, springs —
Because the Holy Ghost over the bent
World broods with warm breast and with ah! bright wings.

Model analysis

The clock, and then the essay it produces:

  1. 0–5. Read twice: once for sense, once with a pencil marking every shift in tense, image, syntax, or punctuation.
  2. 5–9. Choose the interpretation and the two techniques, and write the thesis before anything else.
  3. 9–33. Three body paragraphs, eight minutes each: one claim, one or two short quotations, two sentences of commentary per quotation.
  4. 33–38. The sophistication move, placed where it belongs.
  5. 38–40. Edit the thesis to match the essay you actually wrote. No conclusion beats a rushed one.

Thesis. Hopkins makes the world's exhaustion loud but shallow: his sound repetitions turn human damage into monotony, while the sonnet's turn relocates renewal underneath that damage rather than after it. Paragraph plan: (1) the octave's consonants and rhyme make different harms sound identical; (2) “have trod, have trod, have trod” performs wear as repetition; (3) the sestet's prepositions (deep down, over) put freshness below and grace above the worn surface. Sophistication: the sestet's proof is finally an interjection, “ah!”, so the poem's confidence arrives as feeling rather than argument.

Body paragraph one, written out. The octave's damage is audible before it is intelligible. Hopkins runs one rhyme through three verbs, the world is “seared with trade; bleared, smeared with toil”, so that burning, blurring and staining stop being separate injuries and become a single noise the line cannot get out of. The next half-line keeps the trick going with alliteration instead: the earth “wears man's smudge and shares man's smell,” where the repeated man's makes the ruin possessive and habitual, something owned rather than done once. The sound is doing the argument's work: industry here is not dramatic but relentless, and sameness is what makes wear invisible to the people causing it.

Exam tip: that paragraph earns Row B level 4 because the sentence after each quotation explains how the wording works. Two quotations and one sentence of commentary is level 3; the second sentence is where the point lives.

Write it

Write body paragraph two of this essay: the one on “Generations have trod, have trod, have trod.” Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and give two sentences of commentary after each.

Show a model response

The fifth line stops describing wear and starts performing it. “Generations have trod, have trod, have trod” repeats a two-syllable phrase until the line has no room for an object, so the walking has nowhere to go and nothing to reach. The effect is that history arrives as traffic rather than as events. The damage this causes is then measured in what people can no longer feel: the soil “Is bare now, nor can foot feel, being shod.” The loss named there is sensation, not fertility (the ground is still there, and the foot is simply insulated from it), which is why the sestet does not need to repair anything, only to reach under a surface that the octave has worn smooth.

Rubric: the claim is defensible and specific (Row A); each quotation is followed by two sentences explaining how its wording produces the effect, which is the consistency Row B's fourth point requires.

Unit 8 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 8 review: Poetry III

Two complete short poems and ten questions on the unit's work: diction that holds two meanings, form used as an argument, every shift mapped and given a function, an allusion the reader has to supply, and the thesis you would write if the clock were running.

Multiple choice

  1. About the text: Walt Whitman, “A Noiseless Patient Spider,” first published 1868 and collected in Leaves of Grass. Passage A: complete, ten lines; the numbers 5 and 10 mark those lines.

    A noiseless patient spider,
    I mark'd where on a little promontory it stood isolated,
    Mark'd how to explore the vacant vast surrounding,
    It launch'd forth filament, filament, filament, out of itself,
    5 Ever unreeling them, ever tirelessly speeding them.

    And you O my soul where you stand,
    Surrounded, detached, in measureless oceans of space,
    Ceaselessly musing, venturing, throwing, seeking the spheres to connect them,
    Till the bridge you will need be form'd, till the ductile anchor hold,
    10 Till the gossamer thread you fling catch somewhere, O my soul.

    The relation of the second stanza to the first is best described as

    Nothing is reversed: the soul is given the spider's own posture and verbs (isolated, ever unreeling, ceaselessly throwing), so the second stanza agrees with the first rather than arguing against it.

    The spider is not looked at again after line 5. What returns is its behavior, transferred to something that has no body at all, which is a change of subject, not of distance.

    Correct. Stanza one supplies the terms (a thing isolated on a promontory, launching filament out of itself into vacancy) and stanza two spends them on the soul, surrounded and detached in “measureless oceans of space”: the two halves are the two sides of one comparison.

    The poem never reports an outcome for the spider or the soul. The last two lines are still waiting, “till … till … till”, and that unfinished grammar is the point of the ending.

  2. Passage A, above: Whitman, “A Noiseless Patient Spider,” 1868.

    It launch'd forth filament, filament, filament, out of itself,
    5 Ever unreeling them, ever tirelessly speeding them.

    The primary effect of the repetition in “filament, filament, filament” (line 4) is to

    Correct. The word is spent three times where one would do, so the line takes as long to read as the work takes to do, and line 5 then names that duration outright with “ever … ever.”

    Waste is not in view anywhere in the poem; the filaments come “out of itself,” which measures cost to the spider rather than surplus, and the soul's version of the act is urgent, not extravagant.

    The poem's first word is noiseless, so sound is ruled out by line 1. This is the trap of naming a device's usual effect instead of testing it against the poem in front of you.

    Fragility does arrive, but later and in a different word: the “gossamer thread” of line 10. Repeating a noun three times insists on quantity and persistence, not on delicacy.

  3. Passage A, above: Whitman, “A Noiseless Patient Spider,” 1868.

    And you O my soul where you stand,
    Surrounded, detached, in measureless oceans of space,

    The shift that occurs at the opening of the second stanza functions chiefly to

    The poem gives no time of day at all. Reading a shift as a change of scene is the habit to break: mark what changes in the language first; here, the grammar of who is being spoken to.

    Correct. The verbs in stanza one are past and observed (“I mark'd”); stanza two turns to “you O my soul” and never returns to the spider, so a scene that was being studied becomes a charge laid on the speaker himself.

    There is one voice throughout. The apostrophe addresses a part of the speaker, which is why the last three words circle back to “O my soul” rather than to another person.

    The comparison is not dropped but carried out: the soul receives the spider's isolation, its throwing, and its thread, and the poem ends inside the analogy rather than stepping out of it.

  4. Passage A, above: Whitman, “A Noiseless Patient Spider,” 1868.

    Till the bridge you will need be form'd, till the ductile anchor hold,
    10 Till the gossamer thread you fling catch somewhere, O my soul.

    The apparent contradiction in “the ductile anchor” (line 9) serves chiefly to

    Doubt would need a word like if; the line says till, which assumes the holding will come and only leaves its timing open. Tone one notch too dark is a common wrong turn here.

    The spider comparison is being extended, not corrected: a web is exactly a structure that is spun out and then must catch, which is why bridge, anchor, and thread can share three lines.

    Ductile does describe metals that can be drawn into wire, and that literal sense is worth knowing; but taking the line as a fact about materials leaves the soul out of a sentence addressed entirely to it.

    Correct. Ductile means able to be drawn out and anchor means able to hold fast, so the phrase asks one object to do both at once, which is the condition the soul's reaching would have to meet, stated in two words.

  5. Passage A, above: Whitman, “A Noiseless Patient Spider,” 1868.

    You have forty minutes and this poem. Which of the following would work best as the essay's thesis?

    True, and a reader who has finished the poem already knows it. A thesis has to be arguable; identifying the vehicle of a comparison is where the thinking starts, not where it stops.

    This is an inventory. Naming devices without saying what they accomplish is capped low in Row B, and it gives the essay no line of reasoning to follow from paragraph to paragraph.

    Correct. It names an interpretation someone could contest, it points at two elements (the transferred verbs and the unresolved “till” construction), and it tells you what each body paragraph has to prove.

    Nothing in this sentence could be checked against the poem's words, and it would fit a hundred other poems. Row C is not earned by widening the claim until it cannot be wrong.

  6. About the text: Robert Frost, “Nothing Gold Can Stay,” first published in The Yale Review, October 1923, and collected in New Hampshire, 1923. Passage B: complete, eight lines.

    Nature's first green is gold,
    Her hardest hue to hold.
    Her early leaf's a flower;
    But only so an hour.
    Then leaf subsides to leaf.
    So Eden sank to grief,
    So dawn goes down to day.
    Nothing gold can stay.

    The relation of the poem's second half (lines 5–8) to its first half is best described as

    Correct. Lines 1–4 stay inside one budding tree; line 5 states the sequence, and lines 6 and 7 apply the same verb pattern to the Fall and to daybreak, so the span widens with every line until line 8 can say nothing.

    The second half confirms the first. Each “So” clause is offered as another instance of the same motion, something bright settling into something ordinary, not as an exception to it.

    Repetition of shape is not repetition of content: Eden and dawn are not the leaf restated, they are two further cases, and the poem's argument depends on the difference in scale between them.

    The poem never looks ahead to another spring. Its tenses stay general (subsides, goes down, can stay), which is how an observation becomes a rule.

  7. Passage B, above: Frost, “Nothing Gold Can Stay,” 1923.

    Nature's first green is gold,
    Her hardest hue to hold.

    In line 1, “gold” works chiefly by

    No criticism of wealth appears anywhere in the eight lines, and the color is not replaced: “green is gold” insists that the literal tint is the valuable thing, which is a stranger and better claim.

    Correct. New leaves really do come in with a yellow cast, so the word is accurate description; and because gold also means precious, line 8 can generalize to everything worth keeping without changing a word.

    The poem's one allusion arrives in line 6, and it is biblical rather than classical. Importing a myth the text does not invoke is the opposite of using context to illuminate a poem.

    Line 1 assigns the color to “Nature's first green”, to the foliage, and line 2 calls it a hue that Nature struggles to hold, which keeps the gold in the leaf rather than in the sky.

  8. Passage B, above: Frost, “Nothing Gold Can Stay,” 1923.

    Then leaf subsides to leaf.
    So Eden sank to grief,

    “So Eden sank to grief” (line 6) requires the reader to supply

    An allusion points; it does not quote. Frost gives one proper noun and one verb and trusts you to bring the rest, which is why hunting for the exact verse misses the work the line is doing.

    Correct. The name carries a whole narrative of perfection that did not last, and once it is set beside the leaf and the dawn, the poem can claim the pattern holds for everything: a scale it could never earn from foliage alone.

    The golden apples belong to the Hesperides, and Frost's word is Eden; answering with the nearest myth that contains gold is the reading to avoid when an allusion is named precisely.

    There is no first-person speaker in this poem and no memory in it. The context a reader must supply here is public and shared, which is exactly what makes the shorthand work.

  9. Passage B, above: Frost, “Nothing Gold Can Stay,” 1923.

    The turn at “Then leaf subsides to leaf” (line 5) chiefly

    No “I” enters the poem at any point. When you map shifts, check whether the change is in person, tense, image, or syntax: here it is a move from particular to general, with the voice unchanged.

    Lines 1–4 were already the tree; line 5 leaves it. The tell is Then, which starts a sequence, and the two “So” lines that immediately extend it beyond any orchard.

    Correct. An hour of flowering becomes a sequence, a sequence becomes the history of Eden, and Eden becomes every sunrise: three lines, three widenings, which is what lets the last line speak as law.

    Nothing returns. Subsides, sank, and goes down all point the same way, and the poem closes on a denial rather than a promise.

  10. Passage B, above: Frost, “Nothing Gold Can Stay,” 1923.

    All of the following help the final line land as a law rather than as one more observation EXCEPT

    The parallel clauses do help: two cases stated in the same shape imply a rule that a third case would also fit, so the last line arrives as the rule they were both instances of.

    This helps as well. By line 7 the claim has already been applied to the largest available examples, so “nothing” in line 8 sounds like a summary of ground the poem has covered rather than an overstatement.

    This helps too: no almost, no seems, no subject with a name: the sentence drops every qualifier a description would carry, which is how a line sounds like a statute.

    Correct. The hammering h's are a pleasure of line 2 and they keep attention on that one tree, but sound-patterning inside an early descriptive line does nothing to widen the poem's claim; the generalizing work is done by the sequence in lines 5–7.

Lesson 9.1 · Unit 9 · Longer Fiction or Drama III · CHR 1.E

Complex characters and competing motives

A long work gives a character room to want two incompatible things at once, and to act on both. When that happens, students often write as though the author slipped. Read it the other way: the contradiction is the characterization.

Your job is not to resolve it. It is to say what the work gains by leaving it open, and to point at the words where the two motives touch.

Key terms
  • Complex character (CHR 1.E): one whose choices, actions, and speech pull in more than one direction at the same moment. Complexity is a design feature; name its function, not just its presence.
  • Competing motives (CHR 1.E): two wants held at once, where satisfying one costs the other. Locate both before you argue about either.
  • Contradiction versus change (CHR 1.B): a changed character moves from one state to a later one; a contradictory character holds both at once. Say which you are claiming.
  • Function of complexity (CHR 1.E, LAN 7.C): the sentence explaining what the contradiction does to the work. That sentence is the one the rubric pays for.
Text

About the text: William Shakespeare, Hamlet, Act III, scene i, lines 56–68; first printed in quarto 1604, modern-spelling text. The excerpt stops mid-line at “Must give us pause.”

To be, or not to be, that is the question:
Whether ’tis nobler in the mind to suffer
The slings and arrows of outrageous fortune,
Or to take arms against a sea of troubles
And by opposing end them. To die—to sleep,
No more; and by a sleep to say we end
The heart-ache and the thousand natural shocks
That flesh is heir to: ’tis a consummation
Devoutly to be wish’d. To die, to sleep;
To sleep, perchance to dream—ay, there’s the rub:
For in that sleep of death what dreams may come,
When we have shuffled off this mortal coil,
Must give us pause.

Model analysis

Shakespeare builds the speech so that one word carries both of Hamlet’s motives. Death first arrives as “sleep,” the thing he calls “a consummation / Devoutly to be wish’d”: rest, and an end to an inventory of suffering he has just made sound endless. Then the same word turns on him, because sleepers dream: “there’s the rub.” The turn is not a change of mind but the discovery that his consolation and his terror are a single image, so there is no position left from which to choose. That is the complexity worth arguing: not indecision about dying, but a man whose only route to relief runs through the one thing he cannot face. A reader could call the speech philosophical rather than personal, and that reading deserves an answer rather than a shrug.

Exam tip: readers reward the sentence that says what a contradiction does. “Hamlet is conflicted” paraphrases the scene; “his comfort and his fear are the same image” makes a claim about design.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Shakespeare gains by letting Hamlet reason about his own death without once saying “I.” Make a claim a reader could dispute, quote two phrases of eight words or fewer, and explain how each supports it.

Show a model response

By keeping the speech impersonal, Shakespeare lets Hamlet weigh his own death without ever admitting that he is the one who would die. The opening line hands the decision to a noun rather than a person, “that is the question”, and a question can be examined for as long as you like. The plural does the rest of the work: it is “we” who “have shuffled off this mortal coil,” and it is “flesh,” not Hamlet’s flesh, that inherits the shocks. The distance is what makes the thinking bearable, and also what makes it endless, since a question put to nobody has nobody to answer it.

Rubric: sentence one is a defensible interpretation (Row A); each quotation followed by a sentence on what the wording does is evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 9.2 · Unit 9 · Longer Fiction or Drama III · SET 2.B, FIG 5.C

Setting as symbol: a place that becomes an idea

A place stops being scenery when a book keeps returning to it. Each return adds something (a mood, a conversation, a refusal) until the place is carrying an idea the novel never states outright.

That accumulation is what turns a setting into a symbol, and it is also what makes your claim provable. You argue from the returns, not from one beautiful sentence.

Key terms
  • Function of setting (SET 2.B): what a place does to the story: what it permits, forbids, or makes inevitable. Begin here, before you reach for symbolism.
  • Symbol (FIG 5.C): a detail whose figurative meaning the text keeps developing. One appearance is an image; a developed pattern is a symbol.
  • Accumulation (SET 2.B, FIG 5.C): meaning built by return. Ask what the second and third visits add that the first did not have.
  • Personified place (FIG 5.B): a setting given a voice, a touch, or a will. Once a place can act, it can take a side in the argument.
  • Whole-work evidence (LAN 7.D): for a novel, two or three widely separated moments are worth more than one long quotation.
Text

About the text: Kate Chopin, The Awakening, first published 1899; the closing paragraphs of chapter 6, complete and unbroken.

Mrs. Pontellier was beginning to realize her position in the universe as a human being, and to recognize her relations as an individual to the world within and about her. This may seem like a ponderous weight of wisdom to descend upon the soul of a young woman of twenty-eight—perhaps more wisdom than the Holy Ghost is usually pleased to vouchsafe to any woman.

But the beginning of things, of a world especially, is necessarily vague, tangled, chaotic, and exceedingly disturbing. How few of us ever emerge from such beginning! How many souls perish in its tumult!

The voice of the sea is seductive; never ceasing, whispering, clamoring, murmuring, inviting the soul to wander for a spell in abysses of solitude; to lose itself in mazes of inward contemplation.

The voice of the sea speaks to the soul. The touch of the sea is sensuous, enfolding the body in its soft, close embrace.

Model analysis

The sea earns its meaning in this novel by being the one thing that addresses Edna directly. Chopin gives it a “voice” and then a “touch”, the two ways a person is persuaded rather than instructed, and places both immediately after Edna has begun “to realize her position in the universe as a human being.” The order is the argument: her awakening is first stated in the dry vocabulary of philosophy, and then the sea says the same thing in a register she can feel. Notice the syntax as well: the five participles “never ceasing, whispering, clamoring, murmuring, inviting” trail after a sentence that has already finished its statement, so the prose keeps going the way the water does. A reader could hear only invitation here; the novel’s last chapter puts that reading under pressure.

Exam tip: a symbol claim needs more than one appearance. One passage proves an image; a pattern across chapters proves a symbol, and Row B’s evidence point goes to the pattern.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the sea functions to do at this point in the novel, not what it stands for. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer and explain how each produces the effect you name.

Show a model response

Chopin uses the sea here to give Edna’s new self-knowledge a body. The paragraph before it keeps her awakening in abstractions: she is beginning “to realize her position in the universe,” language that belongs in a lecture rather than on a porch in Louisiana. Then the sea arrives with a voice that is “seductive” and a touch that is “sensuous,” and the same discovery becomes something happening to her skin. The setting functions to translate an idea into an appetite, which is why what follows in the novel is not a decision but a run of wants Edna never explains.

Rubric: the opening sentence claims a function rather than a meaning (Row A); each quotation is followed by commentary on how the wording produces the effect (Row B).

Lesson 9.3 · Unit 9 · Longer Fiction or Drama III · STR 3.C, 3.E

Structure, pacing, and the function of an ending

A novel does not run out; it stops. Where it stops is the last move in its argument, and the move is often a refusal: the scene the book has taught you to want, withheld on the final page.

So read an ending the way you read a plot. What do the last pages get spent on, and what does the writer decline to stage at all?

Key terms
  • Function of structure (STR 3.C): what an arrangement does, including what it leaves out. An ending is an arrangement.
  • Function of a significant event (STR 3.E): a scene’s weight is measured by what it changes, not by how loud it is.
  • Pacing (STR 3.C): page space is a writer’s plainest statement of value. Count the pages given to the scene you were promised.
  • Withheld climax (STR 3.E): a meeting the book prepares and then refuses. Ask what the refusal protects and what it costs.
  • Accurate paraphrase (LAN 7.D), when you cannot quote you can still cite the chapter, the order of events, and who does what. Never invent a sentence to fill a gap.
Text

Description of: Edith Wharton, The Age of Innocence, first published 1920; the final chapter: Newland Archer beneath Ellen Olenska’s window in Paris. Described rather than quoted, because a paraphrase you can trust is worth more than a quotation you cannot. The events and their order are accurate.

Roughly a quarter of a century after the events of the novel, Newland Archer (in his late fifties, his wife May dead) is in Paris with his grown son Dallas, who has arranged for the two of them to call that afternoon on the Countess Olenska, the woman Archer loved and gave up.

They walk to the square below her apartment and Archer looks up at the balcony and its awning. At the door he tells Dallas to go up alone; he will follow in a few minutes. Dallas goes in. Archer sits down on a bench across from the building.

He never follows. He tells himself the scene is more real to him from the bench than it would be upstairs, and that thought keeps him where he is. He watches the balcony through the failing light until a lamp is lit inside and a manservant steps out, draws in the awning, and closes the shutters. Then Archer gets up and walks back alone to his hotel.

Model analysis

Wharton ends the novel by giving its most anticipated scene to somebody else. Everything the book has built (the renunciation, the long correct marriage, the decades of deferred feeling) points at a meeting between Archer and Ellen, and the last chapter walks him to the door of it and seats him on a bench. Converting the reunion into an errand for his son is the sharper stroke, because Dallas can climb the stairs only by not having been raised the way his father was. Then the last staged action in the book belongs to a manservant drawing the shutters: a household routine, performed by someone with no stake in any of it, closing the window on exactly the terms Archer’s society always used. Whether his refusal is fidelity or failure of nerve, the chapter declines to say.

Exam tip: an ending question wants a function, not a feeling. “The ending is sad” reports your reaction; “the ending hands the scene to the one character who never had to give anything up” describes a design.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what Wharton gains by ending with Archer on the bench rather than in Ellen Olenska’s drawing room. You are working from a summary, so build the argument out of the order of events and out of who is given what: and paraphrase precisely, the way Q3 requires.

Show a model response

Wharton ends outside the room because her subject is what a life looks like when its central event never happens. The final chapter carries Archer the whole distance (Paris, the square, his son going in ahead of him), and then stops him on a bench, so the reader waits exactly as long as he does and gets exactly as little. Sending Dallas up in his place turns the reunion into an ordinary social call, which is what it would have been for anyone raised after the rules changed. Ending on a servant closing the shutters lets a piece of evening housework do what the old society did to Archer for years: shut the window, politely, without anyone deciding anything.

Rubric: the claim is about structure rather than plot (Row A); each sentence after a piece of the summary explains what the arrangement does to the reader, which is the commentary Row B pays for.

Lesson 9.4 · Unit 9 · Longer Fiction or Drama III · FIG 5.C, LAN 7.B

Theme: from pattern to interpretation

Theme is not a topic. “Guilt” is a topic. “The novel argues that guilt kept private does not stay private” is a theme: a claim a reader could refuse.

A claim that size has to be earned across the whole book, and the dependable way to earn it is to find something the work repeats and then argue about what the repetition changes.

Key terms
  • Theme as claim (LAN 7.B): an arguable statement about what the work as a whole asserts. A one-word topic is not a thesis.
  • Symbol across a work (FIG 5.C): an object or place the book keeps returning to; the differences between the returns carry the meaning.
  • Pattern (FIG 5.C): two instances are a coincidence, three are a design. Go looking for the third.
  • Counter-instance (LAN 7.B): the place the pattern breaks. Use it; a thesis that handles its exception beats one that hides it.
  • Line of reasoning (LAN 7.B): the order of your claims about the pattern, each one made possible by the one before it.
Text

About the text: Nathaniel Hawthorne, The Scarlet Letter, first published 1850; chapter 23, “The Revelation of the Scarlet Letter”: the moment Dimmesdale bares his breast before the crowd. One paragraph, unbroken.

With a convulsive motion he tore away the ministerial band from before his breast. It was revealed! But it were irreverent to describe that revelation. For an instant the gaze of the horror-stricken multitude was concentrated on the ghastly miracle; while the minister stood with a flush of triumph in his face, as one who, in the crisis of acutest pain, had won a victory. Then, down he sank upon the scaffold!

Model analysis

Hawthorne puts the same platform under his characters three times, and the differences between the visits are the argument. In chapter 2 Hester stands on the scaffold at midday, alone, with the town watching. In chapter 12 Dimmesdale climbs it at midnight, when the town is asleep; Hester and Pearl join him and Chillingworth watches, but no one who could hold him to it ever hears. In chapter 23 he climbs it at noon, with Hester and Pearl beside him and the whole colony in front of him. Taken as a pattern, the scaffold is not a symbol of shame so much as a test of who can bear to be looked at, which makes the novel’s claim arguable rather than obvious. The last scene even withholds the letter from us: “it were irreverent to describe that revelation” keeps the reader outside the crowd’s gaze at the instant Dimmesdale steps into it.

Exam tip: Row A wants a thesis about the whole work, and a pattern is what makes such a thesis defensible. A claim built on one paragraph is a claim about one paragraph.

Write it

Write one paragraph arguing what the three scaffold scenes together let Hawthorne claim about concealment. Quote two phrases of eight words or fewer from this passage, and refer accurately, by chapter, to the two earlier scenes.

Show a model response

Hawthorne returns to the scaffold three times so that the novel can argue about visibility rather than about sin. Hester is set on it in public in chapter 2 and lives seven years afterward; Dimmesdale climbs it in the dark in chapter 12 and nothing changes; he climbs it in daylight in chapter 23 and is dead before the chapter ends. The wording makes the exchange plain. What the town sees is a “ghastly miracle,” a phrase that refuses to choose between horror and grace, and Dimmesdale meets the moment “with a flush of triumph in his face,” as though being seen were a prize he had finally won. The pattern claims that concealment takes the body as payment, and that the public gaze this novel elsewhere treats as cruel is the same thing that let Hester survive.

Rubric: the claim is about the whole work, not the passage (Row A); the quoted phrases with the sentences explaining their wording are evidence and commentary (Row B).

Lesson 9.5 · Unit 9 · Longer Fiction or Drama III · LAN 7.C, 7.D, 7.E

The Q3 argument: sustaining a claim about a whole work

Q3 hands you a prompt and no text. Everything comes out of a book you already carry, which changes what counts as evidence: not the passage you can quote, but the scene you can describe exactly and locate.

So choose a work you know at chapter level, and organize by idea. An essay that walks the plot in order is a summary with a thesis on the front.

Key terms
  • Choosing the work (LAN 7.D): pick the book whose scenes you can locate, not the grandest title you have heard of.
  • Evidence from memory (LAN 7.D): accurate paraphrase with a location beats a half-remembered quotation.
  • Organization by idea (LAN 7.C): sections named for steps in your argument, each free to reach across the book.
  • Commentary (LAN 7.C): the sentence tying a remembered scene back to the thesis. Without it the paragraph is a recap.
  • Sophistication (LAN 7.E): one real move: a tension held open, an objection answered, or the work set in a wider context.
Text

About the text: Mary Shelley, Frankenstein; or, The Modern Prometheus, first published 1818; volume 2, chapter 2: the creature’s first speech to Victor on the sea of ice above Montanvert. Victor’s reply between the two speeches is cut, and the ellipsis marks a cut inside the second.

I expected this reception. All men hate the wretched; how, then, must I be hated, who am miserable beyond all living things! Yet you, my creator, detest and spurn me, thy creature, to whom thou art bound by ties only dissoluble by the annihilation of one of us. You purpose to kill me. How dare you sport thus with life? Do your duty towards me, and I will do mine towards you and the rest of mankind. If you will comply with my conditions, I will leave them and you at peace; but if you refuse, I will glut the maw of death, until it be satiated with the blood of your remaining friends.

Be calm! I entreat you to hear me, before you give vent to your hatred on my devoted head. Have I not suffered enough, that you seek to increase my misery? … Remember, that I am thy creature; I ought to be thy Adam, but I am rather the fallen angel, whom thou drivest from joy for no misdeed.

Model analysis

A Q3 prompt: Choose a novel or play in which a character is denied something he believes he is owed, and analyze how that denial contributes to an interpretation of the work as a whole.

Shelley makes the creature argue like a plaintiff rather than a beggar. He proposes a contract, “Do your duty towards me, and I will do mine towards you and the rest of mankind”, the grammar of an exchange between parties with standing, and grounds it in a bond “only dissoluble by the annihilation of one of us.” What he wants from Victor is a hearing, not mercy. That is why the same speech can carry “I will glut the maw of death” without turning into plain villainy: the threat is what a claimant does when no court will sit.

That paragraph is section two of the outline below. Each section is an idea, and each reaches across the book rather than following it:

  1. Thesis: the creature’s ruin follows from Victor’s refusal to answer him, not from his making.
  2. He asks in the language of justice: the demand on the ice, volume 2, chapter 2: duty, conditions, a bond between parties.
  3. The form withholds the hearing too: his speech reaches us inside Victor’s narration, inside Walton’s letters, so his case survives in the mouth of the man refusing it.
  4. The ending tests the claim: on Walton’s ship he speaks at last to someone who is not his creator, and what comes out is grief, not vengeance.
  5. Sophistication: the speech is a plea and a threat at once, and Shelley never lets a reader take one without the other.

Exam tip: Row B’s fourth point goes to commentary that keeps returning to the thesis. A section that ends by telling us what happened next has stopped arguing.

Write it

Take the same outline to a different work you know in detail: a thesis, three section headings named for ideas rather than plot, one located piece of evidence per section, and a sentence naming your sophistication move.

Show a model response

Work: Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre (1847). Thesis: Jane is denied a hearing before she is denied anything else, and the novel judges every household she enters by whether it will listen to her.

  1. She asks in the language of justice: the red-room and the charge she brings against Mrs. Reed at Gateshead: she argues fairness, not affection.
  2. The narration supplies what the houses withhold: retrospective first person, and the address to the reader, give Jane the hearing Lowood and Thornfield deny her.
  3. She refuses a hearing on bad terms: leaving Thornfield after the failed wedding costs her everything and is the first time anyone answers her on hers.

Sophistication: the ending grants Jane equality only after a fire has cleared the obstacles to it: a settlement the novel needs more than it argues for.

Rubric: the thesis is a defensible interpretation of the whole work (Row A); idea-shaped headings with located evidence set up the line of reasoning Row B pays for; the last note is a real Row C move because it answers an objection instead of avoiding it.

Unit 9 review · 10 multiple-choice

Unit 9 review: Longer Fiction or Drama III

Run this one like a piece of Section I (a prose passage and a passage of dramatic verse, five questions each, about twenty minutes), and answer every item before you open a single rationale, since the click is where the review starts rather than where it ends.

Multiple choice

  1. About the text: Mary Shelley, Frankenstein; or, The Modern Prometheus, first published 1818; volume 1: the night the creature wakes (chapter 4 in the 1818 text, chapter 5 in the 1831 revision). Victor Frankenstein is telling his story to Robert Walton. Passage A: the paragraph complete, and the first sentence of the next.

    It was on a dreary night of November, that I beheld the accomplishment of my toils. With an anxiety that almost amounted to agony, I collected the instruments of life around me, that I might infuse a spark of being into the lifeless thing that lay at my feet. It was already one in the morning; the rain pattered dismally against the panes, and my candle was nearly burnt out, when, by the glimmer of the half-extinguished light, I saw the dull yellow eye of the creature open; it breathed hard, and a convulsive motion agitated its limbs.

    How can I describe my emotions at this catastrophe, or how delineate the wretch whom with such infinite pains and care I had endeavoured to form? …

    The narrator's relation to the night he describes is best characterized as

    The tenses are all past and the last sentence steps outside the scene to ask “How can I describe”: a question put by someone at a distance from the night, with the work of telling in front of him.

    He is the one who collected the instruments and infused the spark; the whole passage runs on the first person. A narrator inside the events he judges is precisely what makes the judgments worth testing.

    Correct. He calls the moment “this catastrophe” before anything catastrophic has happened in the scene, and “the accomplishment of my toils” is the phrase of a man who has since learned what the accomplishment cost: hindsight is doing the describing.

    Nothing is secondhand here. He reports his own hands, his own candle, and his own emotions, which is why the question a reader must keep asking is how far to trust him, not whether he was there.

  2. Passage A, above: Shelley, Frankenstein, 1818.

    … the rain pattered dismally against the panes, and my candle was nearly burnt out, when, by the glimmer of the half-extinguished light, I saw the dull yellow eye of the creature open …

    The rain on the panes and the candle nearly burnt out function chiefly to

    The date and the hour are given plainly elsewhere in the sentence (November, one in the morning), so the rain and the candle are not carrying that information; they are doing something the clock cannot do.

    Correct. The one thing in the room that is dying is the candle, and Shelley makes its “half-extinguished light” the only means by which the eye can be seen, so the creature's first instant is lit by something guttering out.

    Expense is never mentioned. Reading physical detail as a signal of the character's finances is the kind of guess that survives only until you check it against the words on the page.

    The weather stays outside the panes and threatens nothing; the eye opens in the same sentence. Setting here builds atmosphere and meaning rather than plot pressure.

  3. Passage A, above: Shelley, Frankenstein, 1818.

    With an anxiety that almost amounted to agony, I collected the instruments of life around me …

    The phrase “an anxiety that almost amounted to agony” most clearly indicates that

    Correct. The sentence that contains near-agony is the sentence in which he keeps working, and it sits between “the accomplishment of my toils” and “a spark of being”: triumph and torment in one motion, which is what a complex character looks like on the page.

    His confidence in the method is not in question: he is collecting the instruments and expecting them to work, and the creature does wake. Anxiety about an outcome is not doubt about a technique.

    Secrecy is a real strand of the novel, but nothing in these sentences mentions discovery, and the anxiety is fastened by the grammar to the act of infusing life, not to the risk of being seen.

    Regret belongs to the telling rather than to the night: the retrospective words are “catastrophe” and “wretch.” In the moment itself he completes the work, so reading abandonment here collapses the two time frames.

  4. Passage A, above: Shelley, Frankenstein, 1818.

    It was already one in the morning; the rain pattered dismally against the panes, and my candle was nearly burnt out, when, by the glimmer of the half-extinguished light, I saw the dull yellow eye of the creature open …

    The clauses that stand between “It was already one in the morning” and “I saw the dull yellow eye of the creature open” serve chiefly to

    No procedure is described anywhere in the passage. Shelley withholds the method entirely, which is one reason the novel can keep its attention on the maker rather than on the machinery.

    Suspense would need a doubt, and the sentence supplies none; its middle is filled with rain and a candle, the two least suspenseful things in the room.

    He is watching closely enough to see one eye open by a failing glimmer, so his attention is on the table. The clock, the rain, and the candle are the room's furniture, not evidence of distraction.

    Correct. The hour, the weather, and the guttering candle come first, and the eye opens in a subordinate clause introduced by “when”: the most important event in the novel is given the grammar of an interruption to an ordinary night.

  5. Passage A, above: Shelley, Frankenstein, 1818.

    Which of the following states, as an arguable claim about the passage, an interpretation its language will support?

    This is a moral, and one the passage does not state. It also cannot be argued from these sentences, which mention no divine prohibition: a thesis must be defensible from the text a reader has in front of them.

    Correct. It is contestable, and it is checkable: the creature has breathed and moved its limbs, nothing more, while the words catastrophe and wretch both come from the man who wanted it and are supplied by hindsight.

    The creature does nothing in the passage but breathe hard and move convulsively. Taking Victor's language as a report of the creature's nature is to accept the narrator's judgment as fact, which is the habit this unit works to break.

    Accurate, and therefore useless as a thesis: a summary no one would dispute gives an essay nothing to prove and earns nothing in Row A.

  6. About the text: William Shakespeare, Macbeth, Act V, scene v: Macbeth's reply when he is told that the queen is dead. First printed in the Folio of 1623; spelling as in standard modern editions. Passage B: twelve lines, numbered from the start of the excerpt.

    She should have died hereafter;
    There would have been a time for such a word.
    To-morrow, and to-morrow, and to-morrow,
    Creeps in this petty pace from day to day,
    5 To the last syllable of recorded time;
    And all our yesterdays have lighted fools
    The way to dusty death. Out, out, brief candle!
    Life's but a walking shadow, a poor player
    That struts and frets his hour upon the stage,
    10 And then is heard no more. It is a tale
    Told by an idiot, full of sound and fury,
    Signifying nothing.

    Macbeth's response to the news of his wife's death is best described as

    There is no struggle and no outpouring: two flat lines about timing, and then she is not mentioned again. The absence of grief-language in a speech occasioned by a death is the fact an essay should start from.

    Guilt never appears. He indicts time, life, and the fools lighted to dusty death: a general arraignment that leaves his own conduct carefully out of the charge.

    Correct. Line 1 declines the occasion by quarrelling with its timing, and by line 3 the subject has become tomorrow, yesterday, and “recorded time,” so a wife's death is answered with a theory of duration.

    Relief would be a feeling about her, and the speech has none; every figure after line 2 is about existence in general, which is what makes the coldness structural rather than personal.

  7. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Macbeth, V.v.

    She should have died hereafter;
    There would have been a time for such a word.

    In context, “She should have died hereafter” (line 1) most nearly means

    Correct. Line 2 glosses line 1: hereafter means at some later time, and “a time for such a word” is what he says he lacks now. Readers also hear a second sense, she would have died sooner or later in any case, and the line is strong enough to hold both.

    This reverses the direction of hereafter, which points forward, not back. Test a paraphrase against the next line: “There would have been a time” can only mean a time still to come.

    Nothing in these lines weighs the manner of her death or its honor; his complaint is about when the news arrives, which is a stranger and colder objection than wounded dignity.

    This mistakes hereafter for posterity. The word here belongs to the clock he is about to attack in lines 3–5, not to memory or reputation.

  8. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Macbeth, V.v.

    Out, out, brief candle!
    Life's but a walking shadow, a poor player
    That struts and frets his hour upon the stage,
    10 And then is heard no more. It is a tale
    Told by an idiot, full of sound and fury,
    Signifying nothing.

    The sequence of figures in lines 7–12 (candle, walking shadow, poor player, tale told by an idiot) develops chiefly by

    Light is only the first figure; shadow, player, and tale are not darker versions of a candle but different kinds of thing altogether, and a light-to-dark reading has nothing to say about the idiot or the stage.

    Violence belongs to “sound and fury,” which the last line then cancels as meaningless noise. The movement is toward emptiness, and emptiness is the opposite of escalation.

    The speech began with his wife and with timing, not with a candle, and it never returns to her: that failure to circle back is itself worth an essay's attention.

    Correct. Snuff the candle and the light goes; a walking shadow has no body; a player is heard no more when his hour ends; a tale told by an idiot still makes noise but signifies nothing: each figure removes one more thing a life might have.

  9. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Macbeth, V.v.

    Told by an idiot, full of sound and fury,
    Signifying nothing.

    The primary effect of ending the speech on the short line “Signifying nothing” is to

    Correct. Every other line here runs its full length; this one stops several syllables short, so the pentameter that has carried the whole speech gives out on the word nothing: the line is missing exactly what it says life lacks.

    The messenger arrives after the sentence has closed, not inside it: the grammar is complete and the thought is finished. A short line is a metrical fact first, and only sometimes an interruption.

    The lines around it are regular verse, including the two immediately before, so nothing has broken down in his speech; what has been cut is one line's length, deliberately and at the end.

    The effect is a stop, not a fade. A truncated line lands hard because the ear is still waiting for the missing feet, which is the opposite of trailing off.

  10. Passage B, above: Shakespeare, Macbeth, V.v.

    A student arguing that this speech marks the end of Macbeth's capacity to be moved would best support that claim with

    The repetition is strong evidence: for a claim about tedium and the crawl of time. Choosing the most famous phrase rather than the one that fits the argument is the most common evidence error on Q3.

    Correct. The claim is about feeling, so the evidence has to be about feeling: told that his wife is dead, he objects to the scheduling, and never mentions her again. Evidence should touch the exact nerve of the thesis.

    This supports a claim about mortality or about the futility of ambition, and it is about “all our yesterdays” rather than about Macbeth's response to a particular loss.

    This supports a claim about meaninglessness, which is related but not the same: a man can find life absurd and still be capable of grief, so the line does not by itself close the argument.

Poetry analysis 1 · 40 minutes

Read the poem carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Shakespeare uses structure and figurative language to convey the speaker's complex attitude toward memory and loss.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Read the poem twice before you write anything, once for the sense, once with a pencil on the words that repeat. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the poem: a claim about what the speaker's attitude actually is, stated so that another reader could disagree with you and argue back from the same fourteen lines. Support that interpretation with specific evidence from the poem (short quoted phrases, cited by line), and make your commentary do the explaining: say how the words you quoted produce the effect you claim, and arrange your paragraphs so that each one advances a single line of reasoning rather than restarting it. Explain how more than one literary element contributes to the poem's meaning; this prompt names two, so the essay that only handles the metaphors has left half the question alone. Finally, aim for sophistication: identify a tension the poem holds open, answer a reading a sensible person could prefer to yours, or place the poem in a wider context, but earn it with the text, not with a closing sentence about love and loss.

The poem

Source: William Shakespeare, Sonnet 30, first published in Shake-speares Sonnets, 1609. Complete, 14 lines, in modern spelling; printed as a single block, as the 1609 quarto prints it.

When to the sessions of sweet silent thought
I summon up remembrance of things past,
I sigh the lack of many a thing I sought,
And with old woes new wail my dear time’s waste:
5Then can I drown an eye, unused to flow,
For precious friends hid in death’s dateless night,
And weep afresh love’s long since cancelled woe,
And moan the expense of many a vanished sight:
Then can I grieve at grievances foregone,
10And heavily from woe to woe tell o’er
The sad account of fore-bemoaned moan,
Which I new pay as if not paid before.
But if the while I think on thee, dear friend,
All losses are restored, and sorrows end.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that names the complexity, not the subject. “Shakespeare shows that memory is painful but friendship heals it” restates the poem and earns nothing. A defensible interpretation says what the speaker's attitude is and what is odd about it: that he convenes his grief rather than suffering it, that the consolation is stated in the same commercial vocabulary as the loss, that twelve lines of accumulation are answered by two.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording, not its content. The words worth quoting here belong to law and money: “sessions” (line 1), “summon up” (line 2), “the expense of many a vanished sight” (line 8), “The sad account of fore-bemoaned moan” (line 11), “new pay as if not paid before” (line 12), “All losses are restored” (line 14). A paper that quotes “precious friends hid in death's dateless night” for its sadness is quoting the right poem for the wrong reason.
  • The line of reasoning this poem invites. Establish the metaphor, then show it compounding: a court is called, the losses are itemized, the bill is presented, and line 12 discovers that paying it does not retire it. Every paragraph should move that argument one step, so that by the couplet the reader already knows what “restored” will have to mean.
  • Two elements worth pairing: figurative language and structure. The financial-legal metaphor supplies the terms; the form supplies the repetition: the parallel openings “Then can I” (lines 5 and 9), the chain of “And” across lines 7, 8, and 10, the doubling inside “grieve at grievances” and “fore-bemoaned moan,” and the 12-against-2 imbalance the couplet has to absorb. Explain how they work together; naming them side by side is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: the couplet does not escape the ledger. “Losses” and “restored” are the words of the account, and “if the while I think on thee” makes the relief conditional and renewable rather than final, so the poem can be read as consolation or as a habit the speaker has learned to interrupt. Hold that tension open instead of choosing quickly, or set the poem beside the sonnet sequence's other bargains with time and see what the friend is being asked to pay for.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Sonnet 30 does not remember the past so much as audit it. Shakespeare hands the speaker the vocabulary of courtrooms and account books, then hands him a form that adds for twelve lines and subtracts for two, so the comfort of the couplet arrives as a bookkeeping entry rather than as a change of heart. The speaker's attitude toward memory is double: grief is treated as a debt that can be settled, and the settling is exactly what shows the debt will come due again.

Evidence The first quatrain makes remembering an official proceeding. The speaker calls his own reflection “the sessions of sweet silent thought” (line 1) and says he “summon[s] up remembrance of things past” (line 2). Commentary A session is a court in sitting, and a summons compels a witness to appear; together they turn what might have been an involuntary ache into something the speaker convenes on purpose. That is a strange way to describe missing someone: if memory is a court, the speaker is the judge who calls it into session, which also means he is the one who could have left it closed. Evidence The metaphor then gets more expensive. He “sigh[s] the lack of many a thing I sought” (line 3), mourns “the expense of many a vanished sight” (line 8), and finally itemizes “The sad account of fore-bemoaned moan” (line 11), a bill he must “new pay as if not paid before” (line 12). Commentary “Account” is the hinge word, because it means both a story and a debt, and the pun lets Shakespeare say that telling the story of a loss is the same act as paying for it over again. Line 12 is the hardest line in the poem for that reason: a debt paid twice was never really settled, and a man who keeps books on his dead has guaranteed himself a lifetime of payments.

Second element The sonnet's structure makes that arithmetic audible instead of merely stating it. Evidence The second and third quatrains open identically (“Then can I drown an eye” (line 5), “Then can I grieve at grievances foregone” (line 9)), and the lines between them run on a chain of “And”: “And weep afresh,” “And moan the expense,” “And heavily from woe to woe tell o’er” (lines 7, 8, 10). Commentary The anaphora is the accounting in sound. Each “Then can I” opens a fresh column and each “And” adds a line to it, and because the two quatrains are parallel rather than progressive, nothing is resolved by moving from the first to the second; the speaker simply totals the same losses in a new hand. The diction does the same thing on a smaller scale. “Grieve at grievances” and “fore-bemoaned moan” double back onto their own roots, so a reader hears the words repeating inside a structure that is already repeating.

Then line 13 turns: “But if the while I think on thee, dear friend, / All losses are restored, and sorrows end.” Twelve lines of accumulation are answered by two, and the answer is absolute: “all,” “end.” Commentary After so much adding, that speed reads less like relief than like a hand sweeping a table clear. Sophistication The couplet never actually leaves the ledger: “losses” and “restored” are the same commercial words the grief was written in, so the friend enters the poem as a credit in an account rather than as a reason to stop keeping one, and a metaphor that survives the turn will still be there in the morning. The grammar says so too. “If the while I think on thee” is a conditional with a time limit built into it, and it sets the restoration to last precisely as long as the thought does, which is not what the word “end” usually promises.

Commentary A reader could take the couplet at its word and call this a poem about a friendship strong enough to cancel grief, and the closing rhyme certainly lands with confidence. But the sonnet has spent twelve lines teaching the reader its own vocabulary, and once “restored” has been defined as a payment, a restored loss is not a loss undone: it is a loss covered, this time. Shakespeare's speaker has learned how to adjourn a session. The complexity is that the poem lets us see he also knows how to call the next one.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “Sonnet 30 does not remember the past so much as audit it… the settling is exactly what shows the debt will come due again.” This is an interpretation, not a summary: it claims the poem's consolation is undercut by the terms it is stated in, and a reader who thinks the couplet is sincere has something specific to argue against.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Every claim is anchored in quoted phrases cited by line (“sessions,” “summon up,” “the expense of many a vanished sight,” “The sad account of fore-bemoaned moan,” “new pay as if not paid before,” “Then can I” (lines 5, 9), the “And” chain (lines 7, 8, 10), and the couplet), and the commentary explains how each one works rather than restating it: the court metaphor makes grief voluntary, the pun on “account” equates telling with paying, the anaphora performs the adding it describes. The essay carries one line of reasoning from the summons in line 2 to the conditional in line 13, and it explains two elements working together (figurative language (the legal and financial metaphor) and structure (parallel quatrain openings, the repeated “And,” the twelve-against-two imbalance of the couplet)), which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The fourth paragraph identifies a tension in the poem and holds it open rather than resolving it: the couplet's relief is written in the same commercial vocabulary as the grief and is grammatically conditional, so the poem's ending is at once a settlement and a renewal. The final paragraph earns the point a second way by naming the alternative reading (the sincere, consoled couplet), and answering it from the poem's own diction instead of dismissing it.

Poetry analysis 2 · 40 minutes

Read the poem carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Hardy uses setting, imagery, and the poem's final stanza to convey the speaker's complex attitude toward the remembered relationship.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Read the poem twice, once straight through, once reading the last stanza against the first, because this poem asks you to compare them. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation: a claim about what the speaker's attitude toward the remembered relationship actually is, phrased so that a reader who thinks he is simply bitter has something to argue with. Support the claim with specific evidence from the poem, quoted in short phrases and cited by line, and let your commentary carry the weight: explain how the words you quoted produce the effect you claim, and build the paragraphs into a single line of reasoning instead of a tour of the stanzas. The prompt names three things to work with, so explain how more than one literary element contributes to the poem's meaning; an essay that only catalogues gray images has answered a third of the question. Finally, aim for sophistication: find a tension the poem will not resolve, take seriously a reading you do not hold, or place the poem in a wider context, and earn it from the text rather than from a last sentence about the pain of love.

The poem

Source: Thomas Hardy, “Neutral Tones,” dated 1867 by the poet and first published in Wessex Poems and Other Verses, 1898. Complete, 16 lines; Hardy's indentation of the fourth line of each stanza is not reproduced here.

We stood by a pond that winter day,
And the sun was white, as though chidden of God,
And a few leaves lay on the starving sod;
— They had fallen from an ash, and were gray.

5Your eyes on me were as eyes that rove
Over tedious riddles of years ago;
And some words played between us to and fro
On which lost the more by our love.

The smile on your mouth was the deadest thing
10Alive enough to have strength to die;
And a grin of bitterness swept thereby
Like an ominous bird a-wing….

Since then, keen lessons that love deceives,
And wrings with wrong, have shaped to me
15Your face, and the God-curst sun, and a tree,
And a pond edged with grayish leaves.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that accounts for the last stanza, not just the first three. “Hardy uses bleak imagery to show that love ends badly” is the poem's weather report, not an interpretation. A defensible claim reckons with “have shaped to me” (line 14): the scene the poem has been describing is presented, at the end, as something later experience built, so the speaker's attitude involves what he has done to the memory, not only what the memory did to him.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording. The useful phrases are the ones doing more than setting a mood: “chidden of God” (line 2) and “the starving sod” (line 3), where feeling is transferred onto sun and ground; “On which lost the more by our love” (line 8), which preserves the score of a quarrel and none of its words; “the deadest thing / Alive enough to have strength to die” (lines 9–10); and the four-item list of line 15 to line 16.
  • The line of reasoning this poem invites: read stanza four back against stanza one and show what has changed in the retelling. “An ash” (line 4) has become “a tree”; “gray” (line 4) has become “grayish” (line 16); the sun “chidden of God” has been promoted to “the God-curst sun.” The details blur as the verdict hardens, and an essay that traces that drift has an argument with a spine rather than a list of grim nouns.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: imagery and syntax. The images give the poem its coldness, but the grammar of the final stanza gives it its meaning: “keen lessons… have shaped” makes experience the sculptor and the scene the sculpture, and the flat chain of “and” demotes “Your face” to the same rank as a sun, a tree, and a pond. Explain how the two work together; naming them in sequence is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: the poem is at once an accusation and an act of keeping. The speaker says love deceives, yet he has preserved the afternoon in four exact, unbroken abba stanzas and can still produce it whole decades later. Hold that contradiction open rather than settling it, or set the poem against the stubborn returns of Hardy's later elegies for his first wife, where the same habit of revisiting a scene is treated as devotion rather than injury.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis “Neutral Tones” looks like the memory of one winter afternoon, but the last stanza admits the picture was assembled afterward: “keen lessons that love deceives… have shaped to me” the very images the poem has just finished showing us (lines 13–14). The setting and imagery are therefore evidence about the speaker rather than about the day, and because his final version of the scene has quietly changed from his first one, the poem shows a man still working on a memory he insists is fixed. His attitude is not plain bitterness. It is a kind of loyalty to a wound he keeps recutting.

Evidence Nothing in the opening is as neutral as the title claims. The sun is “white, as though chidden of God” (line 2), the leaves lie on “the starving sod” (line 3), and they “had fallen from an ash, and were gray” (line 4). Commentary “Chidden” is a word for a scolded child, so the sun has not merely gone pale, it has been told off; “starving” moves hunger off the two people and onto the ground beneath them. Hardy is letting the landscape carry the feeling so the speaker never has to describe his own, which is exactly how a man behaves when he does not want to be the subject of his own story. Evidence The same withholding shapes the quarrel. All we get of it is “some words played between us to and fro / On which lost the more by our love” (lines 7–8). Commentary Not one line of the argument survives: only its scoreboard. “Played” turns the exchange into a game, and what the speaker has kept is the standings, which tells us more about him than any remembered insult would.

Evidence The third stanza pushes the method to its limit: her smile is “the deadest thing / Alive enough to have strength to die” (lines 9–10), and “a grin of bitterness swept thereby / Like an ominous bird a-wing” (lines 11–12). Commentary The superlative runs the wrong way. Hardy is not ranking degrees of life but degrees of death, and he grants the smile just enough life to perform its own dying. Then the only movement in the whole poem turns out to be a bird that is not there, a simile, passing over her face the way weather passes over the pond. Even her expression has been handed to the setting.

Second element The final stanza changes the poem by changing its grammar. Evidence “Since then, keen lessons that love deceives, / And wrings with wrong, have shaped to me / Your face, and the God-curst sun, and a tree, / And a pond edged with grayish leaves” (lines 13–16). Commentary “Have shaped” is the most important verb here, because it makes the lessons the sculptor and the scene the sculpture: the images were not recorded that afternoon, they were formed later by everything that happened since. The flat chain of “and” does the rest of the work, setting “Your face” in the same grammatical rank as a sun, a tree, and a pond, so the woman ends the poem as one item on a list of scenery. Sophistication And the list is not a repetition of stanza one; it is a revision of it. The “ash” of line 4 has become simply “a tree,” “gray” has become “grayish,” and the sun that was “chidden of God” is now “God-curst.” Every change runs the same direction, the details lose definition while the judgment gets harsher, so the poem holds two claims at once and settles neither: the scene is burned into him, and the scene is being edited.

Commentary A reader could fairly call this simply a bitter poem, and the last stanza's verdict on love supports that. But bitterness does not usually take this much care. Hardy gives the speaker four exact stanzas and an abba rhyme that closes back on itself every time, and a scene he can still produce whole years later. The poem is as much preservation as complaint, and its complexity is that the two turn out to be one act: the lessons that taught him love deceives are also what keep the pond in front of him, and the last line leaves him standing at the edge of it.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “The setting and imagery are therefore evidence about the speaker rather than about the day… he is still working on a memory he insists is fixed.” That is an interpretation of the whole poem, grounded in a reading of line 14, and a reader who takes the images as a faithful record of the afternoon has a specific claim to dispute.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Each claim rests on quoted phrases cited by line, “chidden of God,” “the starving sod,” “On which lost the more by our love,” “the deadest thing / Alive enough to have strength to die,” “Like an ominous bird a-wing,” “have shaped to me,” and the list in lines 15–16, and the commentary explains their working rather than paraphrasing them: “chidden” personifies a scolding, “played” reduces a quarrel to a score, the superlative ranks degrees of death, the chain of “and” levels a face into scenery. One line of reasoning runs from the transferred feeling of stanza one to the retroactive shaping of stanza four, and the essay explains two elements working together, imagery and the syntax of the final stanza, which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The fourth paragraph identifies a real tension and keeps it open by reading stanza four back against stanza one word by word: “ash” becomes “a tree,” “gray” becomes “grayish,” “chidden of God” becomes “God-curst,” so the memory is simultaneously indelible and under revision. The closing paragraph earns it again by granting the bitter reading its due and then answering it from the poem's form: the care of the abba stanzas makes the poem an act of keeping as well as of blame.

Poetry analysis 3 · 40 minutes

Read the poem carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Dickinson uses personification, the ordering of the journey, and shifts in the final stanzas to convey the speaker's complex understanding of death.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Read the poem twice, once for the story it tells, once for the places where the speaker's manners and the poem's facts disagree. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation: a claim about what the speaker understands about death, phrased so that a reader who finds the poem consoling and a reader who finds it terrifying would both have to argue with you. Support that claim with specific evidence from the poem (short quoted phrases, cited by line, with Dickinson's capitals and dashes kept as she wrote them), and make the commentary explain how those words produce the effect you claim, building one line of reasoning across the essay instead of one paragraph per stanza. The prompt names three things to work with, so explain how more than one literary element contributes to the poem's meaning. Finally, aim for sophistication: name a tension the poem refuses to settle, take seriously an interpretation you do not hold, or place the poem in a wider context; earned from the text, not from a final sentence about mortality.

The poem

Source: Emily Dickinson, “Because I could not stop for Death —” (Fr479), written about 1862; first published, in an edited version, in Poems by Emily Dickinson, 1890. Complete, 24 lines; the capitals, the dashes, and the fourth stanza follow the manuscript text rather than the 1890 printing.

Because I could not stop for Death —
He kindly stopped for me —
The Carriage held but just Ourselves —
And Immortality.

5We slowly drove — He knew no haste
And I had put away
My labor and my leisure too,
For His Civility —

We passed the School, where Children strove
10At Recess — in the Ring —
We passed the Fields of Gazing Grain —
We passed the Setting Sun —

Or rather — He passed Us —
The Dews drew quivering and Chill —
15For only Gossamer, my Gown —
My Tippet — only Tulle —

We paused before a House that seemed
A Swelling of the Ground —
The Roof was scarcely visible —
20The Cornice — in the Ground —

Since then — ’tis Centuries — and yet
Feels shorter than the Day
I first surmised the Horses’ Heads
Were toward Eternity —

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that does something with the poem's politeness. “Dickinson personifies death as a gentleman to show that death is not scary” is a paraphrase with a moral attached. A defensible interpretation explains what the courtesy is for: that “kindly” (line 2) and “His Civility” (line 8) let the speaker narrate her own death in the register of a social call, and that the poem never lets her drop the register even when the facts change under her.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording. The phrases that repay quoting are the ones where diction is doing more than description: the causal “Because” of line 1; “He kindly stopped for me” (line 2); “Immortality” as a passenger rather than a destination (line 4); the bargain in “I had put away / My labor and my leisure too, / For His Civility” (lines 6–8); “Gazing Grain” (line 11); the correction in line 13; “Gossamer” and “Tulle” (lines 15–16); “A Swelling of the Ground” (line 18); and “surmised” (line 23).
  • The line of reasoning this poem invites: follow the courtesy until it stops matching what is happening. The ride begins as an appointment kept by a considerate caller, becomes a review of a life passed at speed, then reverses at line 13, “Or rather — He passed Us —”, after which the cold reaches her clothing and the destination turns out to be a grave described as a house. An essay that traces that drift has an argument; one that walks stanza by stanza usually only has a summary.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: personification and structure. The gentleman caller supplies the poem's manners; the ordering supplies its meaning: the triple “We passed” (lines 9, 11, 12) puts school, ripened fields, and sunset in the order of a life, and the single short line 13 breaks both the sequence and the meter to take the motion away from her. Explain how they work on each other; listing them is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: the poem supplies a courteous form for dying and then withholds the conclusion that form promises. “Surmised” (line 23) means that after centuries the speaker is still inferring where she is going, and the final dash leaves the sentence open. Hold the consoling reading and the frightening one together instead of choosing, or set the poem beside the deathbed of “I heard a Fly buzz — when I died —,” where Dickinson also lets a ceremony be interrupted by a physical detail.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Dickinson's speaker treats her own death as a matter of etiquette. Death arrives as a considerate caller, she answers with matching manners, and the poem never lets the manners break, not when the cold gets through her clothes, not when the destination turns out to be a grave. What makes her understanding complex is that the courtesy does two jobs: it makes the ride bearable to describe, and it keeps her from ever asking the question the poem leaves unanswered, whether she was escorted or collected.

Evidence The personification is built out of ordinary social vocabulary. “Because I could not stop for Death — / He kindly stopped for me —” (lines 1–2) makes his arrival a favor done for a woman who was too busy, and the carriage “held but just Ourselves — / And Immortality” (lines 3–4). Commentary The causal “Because” is the strangest word in the stanza, because it puts her schedule at the center of the universe: Death came since she could not. “Kindly” belongs to thank-you notes, and it arrives in the same breath as the fact that she has been stopped for good. Making Immortality a passenger rather than a destination is the second move: it rides along in silence and never once confirms what it is doing there. Evidence The bargain follows: she has “put away / My labor and my leisure too, / For His Civility” (lines 6–8). Commentary She gives up work and rest, everything a day contains, and receives good manners in exchange. A speaker who noticed that exchange rate would be writing a protest; this one is being polite.

Second element The ordering of the ride turns that politeness into an argument. Evidence “We passed the School, where Children strove / At Recess — in the Ring — / We passed the Fields of Gazing Grain — / We passed the Setting Sun —” (lines 9–12). Commentary Three repetitions of “We passed” put childhood, ripeness, and the end of a day in exactly that order, so the carriage is not crossing a county but a life, reviewed from outside and at speed. “Gazing Grain” reverses who is watching whom: the crop looks back, and for one line the world is a row of spectators. Evidence Then line 13 corrects the whole sequence in five words: “Or rather — He passed Us —.” Commentary The line is short, the meter drops, and the grammar takes the motion away from her: up to that point she travels through the world; afterward the world moves and she does not, which is as close as the poem comes to saying she has left time.

Evidence The last stanzas let the body say what the manners will not. “The Dews drew quivering and Chill — / For only Gossamer, my Gown — / My Tippet — only Tulle —” (lines 14–16), and the carriage “paused before a House that seemed / A Swelling of the Ground — / The Roof was scarcely visible — / The Cornice — in the Ground —” (lines 17–20). Commentary Gossamer and tulle are bridal fabrics, not traveling clothes: she is dressed for the social occasion she thought this was, and the dews get straight through them. The house gets the same treatment: the euphemism holds (a roof, a cornice, like any house), but the architecture keeps sinking until the word “Ground” has swallowed both.

Sophistication The final stanza is where the poem declines to finish. “Since then — ’tis Centuries — and yet / Feels shorter than the Day / I first surmised the Horses’ Heads / Were toward Eternity —” (lines 21–24): centuries compress to less than a day, and the day that outlasts them is not the day she arrived but the day she guessed. “Surmised” is the word that will not let the poem settle, because after centuries she is still inferring her destination, and the closing dash leaves the sentence open instead of landing it. Commentary That is why both of the usual readings are defensible and neither is enough. Taken one way it is consolation: an escort, a chaperone named Immortality, a courteous ride. Taken the other way it is Dickinson at her coldest: a woman collected while she was busy, still only surmising where she is being taken. The poem gives death a perfectly good form and then withholds the ending that form exists to deliver, and her manners, which never falter, are why she can tell us so calmly that she does not know.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “The courtesy is doing two jobs at once: it is what makes the ride bearable to describe, and it is what keeps her from ever asking… whether she was escorted or collected.” That is a disputable interpretation of the whole poem rather than a description of its personification, and it sets up the reasoning the rest of the essay follows.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Every claim is anchored in quoted phrases cited by line, “Because,” “He kindly stopped for me,” “And Immortality,” “For His Civility,” the triple “We passed,” “Gazing Grain,” “Or rather — He passed Us —,” “Gossamer” and “Tulle,” “A Swelling of the Ground,” “surmised”, and the commentary explains how each works rather than restating it: the causal conjunction flatters the speaker's schedule, the trade of labor and leisure for civility is deliberately lopsided, the repetitions order a life, the short line 13 removes her agency, the bridal fabrics expose the body the manners ignore. One line of reasoning runs from the social call of stanza one to the unfinished sentence of stanza six, and the essay explains multiple elements working together (personification, the structural ordering and its break at line 13, and the shifts of the closing stanzas), which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The last paragraph identifies a genuine ambiguity and holds it open: “surmised” and the final dash mean the poem supplies a complete courteous form for dying while refusing the conclusion that form promises, so the consoling reading and the frightening reading both survive the evidence. The essay names the alternative interpretation explicitly and answers it from the poem's own diction and punctuation rather than hedging.

Poetry analysis 4 · 40 minutes

Read the poem carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Dunbar uses the extended comparison of the caged bird, repetition, and sound to convey the speaker's complex understanding of confinement and song.

Directions

Forty minutes, one poem, six points. Read the poem twice before you write, once for the situation, once with a pencil marking the words that repeat. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the poem rather than a summary of it: say what the speaker's understanding of confinement and song actually is, and say what makes it complex. Support that interpretation with specific evidence (short quoted phrases, cited by line number), and let your commentary do the explaining: a reader gives Row B's fourth point only when you consistently show how the words you quoted produce the effect you claim, and when you explain how more than one element (here, the extended comparison, the repetition, and the poem's sound) contributes to the poem's meaning. Naming a device is not analysis. Finish inside the time; an unfinished essay cannot earn Row C.

The poem

Source: Paul Laurence Dunbar, “Sympathy,” first published in Lyrics of the Hearthside, 1899. Complete, 21 lines; line numbers printed every fifth line.

I know what the caged bird feels, alas!
When the sun is bright on the upland slopes;
When the wind stirs soft through the springing grass,
And the river flows like a stream of glass;
5 When the first bird sings and the first bud opes,
And the faint perfume from its chalice steals —
I know what the caged bird feels!

I know why the caged bird beats his wing
Till its blood is red on the cruel bars;
10 For he must fly back to his perch and cling
When he fain would be on the bough a-swing;
And a pain still throbs in the old, old scars
And they pulse again with a keener sting —
I know why he beats his wing!

15 I know why the caged bird sings, ah me,
When his wing is bruised and his bosom sore, —
When he beats his bars and he would be free;
It is not a carol of joy or glee,
But a prayer that he sends from his heart's deep core,
20 But a plea, that upward to Heaven he flings —
I know why the caged bird sings!

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that names the complexity, not the subject. “Dunbar shows that the caged bird is sad” is a summary; “the song and the injury in this poem are the same motion, so the bird's music is evidence of its confinement rather than relief from it” is an interpretation someone could dispute. The prompt's word is complex: say what pulls against what.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording. The strongest essays quote three to eight words at a time (“the cruel bars” (line 9), “the old, old scars” (line 12), “a carol of joy or glee” (line 18)), and put the quotation inside their own sentence. Reproducing a whole stanza wastes minutes and earns nothing.
  • The line of reasoning this poem invites is its own three-part movement: the first stanza is about what the bird feels, the second about why he beats his wing, the third about why he sings. An essay organized along that progression has a structure the poem itself supplies. Notice that the opening word changes from “what” to “why” after stanza one.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: the repetition (the anaphora of “I know,” and each stanza closing on a near-copy of its own first line) and the sound (the hard consonants of “beats his wing / Till its blood is red on the cruel bars,” the chime of “sting” against “wing”). Explain how the repeated frame and the harsh music work on a reader differently, and you have the “multiple literary elements” Row B's fourth point requires.
  • A sophistication path: the poem refuses to settle whether the song is resistance or a symptom. It is “not a carol of joy or glee” (line 18) yet it is also a “prayer” and a “plea” (lines 19–20): a religious act performed by a creature whose last word about itself is “I know,” not “I am free.” Hold that tension open, or answer the reading that hears triumph in the final line. Do not close with a sentence about hope in general.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Dunbar's speaker does not watch the caged bird; he claims to know it from the inside, and what he knows is that the bird's song is made out of the same motion as the bird's injury. The poem's three stanzas move from feeling to beating to singing, and each one is sealed shut by a repetition of its own first line, so that by the end the song is not an escape from confinement but the noise confinement makes. That is the complexity here: singing is the bird's most alive act and also the proof that nothing has changed.

Evidence The first stanza spends almost all of itself outside the cage. The sun is “bright on the upland slopes” (line 2), the wind “stirs soft through the springing grass” (line 3), the river “flows like a stream of glass” (line 4), and the season offers “the faint perfume from its chalice” (line 6). Commentary None of it belongs to the bird. Dunbar gives six lines to the world the bird cannot reach and not one word of description to the cage, which is a strange way to write about captivity until you notice what it does: the reader feels the spring before feeling the bars, so the pain of the poem arrives as a comparison rather than as an image of suffering. What hurts is not the cage by itself but knowing precisely what is on the other side of it. The bird is not numb; it is informed.

Evidence The repetition builds the cage the description withholds. Every stanza opens with “I know” and closes by almost repeating that opening: “I know what the caged bird feels, alas!” returns as “I know what the caged bird feels!” (lines 1, 7), and the same loop shuts stanzas two and three. Commentary The form is a circuit the poem cannot get out of, which is exactly the bird's situation: he “must fly back to his perch and cling” (line 10) after every attempt. But the loop is not identical each time. The speaker's second word changes from “what” to “why,” and that one-syllable shift moves the poem from sensation to cause: he begins by sharing the bird's feeling and ends by understanding its logic.

Second element Sound is where Dunbar puts the violence. Evidence “I know why the caged bird beats his wing / Till its blood is red on the cruel bars” (lines 8–9) runs four hard b-sounds through two lines, and the stanza's rhymes keep striking the same note, “wing,” “cling,” “a-swing,” “sting”, while the phrase “the old, old scars” (line 12) stalls on a repeated adjective. Commentary The prettiest technical effects in the poem sit on its most painful words. The chime of “sting” against “wing” is pleasant to the ear and describes a wound reopening, and that mismatch trains the reader for the last stanza's argument: music and damage are not opposites in this poem. Even the doubled “old, old” works this way, sounding gentle and meaning that the injury is habitual.

Evidence The final stanza says it outright. The song is “not a carol of joy or glee” (line 18) but “a prayer that he sends from his heart's deep core” and “a plea, that upward to Heaven he flings” (lines 19–20). Commentary The denial is built out of the vocabulary it denies: “carol,” “joy,” and “glee” are the words a listener on the outside would have supplied, and Dunbar prints them only to take them away, so the reader is corrected in the act of reading. Sophistication Yet the correction does not resolve into despair either. A prayer and a plea are addressed to someone, and “flings” is the gesture of a creature still expending force upward; the poem holds open whether that song is resistance or only a symptom, and it refuses to tell us whether anything hears it. A reader could take the triumphant exclamation point of the last line as defiance, and the stanza's energy supports that. But the speaker's final claim is modest and exact (he claims knowledge, not rescue), and the comparison itself is never completed: writing in 1899, Dunbar never names what the cage stands for, and that reticence leaves the reader to supply the human term and to feel the poem close on them.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The opening paragraph claims that the song and the injury are “the same motion” and that singing is simultaneously the bird's most alive act and the proof that nothing has changed. That is a defensible interpretation of the poem's complexity, not a restatement of the prompt, and the rest of the essay argues it.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Specific evidence supports every claim, always as short quoted phrases cited by line: lines 2–6 for the withheld outside world, lines 1 and 7 for the closed loop, line 10 for the forced return, lines 8–9 and 12 for the consonants and the doubled adjective, lines 18–20 for the denied vocabulary. The commentary consistently explains how each piece works rather than restating it: why description of spring rather than of bars produces the pain, why the “what”/“why” change marks a movement from sensation to cause, why a pleasant rhyme on a wound prepares the last stanza. And the essay explains multiple elements: the extended comparison and its withheld fourth term, the anaphora and refrain, and the poem's sound, each tied to the same line of reasoning.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph identifies a tension the poem will not settle (a prayer that may or may not be heard, a song that is either resistance or symptom), and answers the alternative reading that hears the last line as triumph by pointing to what the speaker actually claims (“I know,” not “I am free”). It then situates the interpretation in the poem's own reticence about what the cage stands for. The point is earned by a sustained move, not by a closing generalization.

Poetry analysis 5 · 40 minutes

Read the poem carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Frost uses the poem's form, diction, and closing question to convey a complex attitude toward diminishment and change.

Directions

Forty minutes, one poem, six points. This is a short poem, so read it three times: once for sense, once for the rhymes, once for the last two lines alone. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation: say what the poem's attitude toward diminishment actually is, and name what makes that attitude complex rather than simply sad. Support the interpretation with specific evidence, quoting in short phrases and citing line numbers, and let the commentary explain how the evidence works: Row B's fourth point goes to essays whose commentary consistently explains, and that show how more than one element (here the sonnet form, the diction, and the closing question) contributes to the poem's meaning. Saying “Frost uses imagery” proves nothing. Leave yourself five minutes for the ending; the last two lines are where this poem's difficulty lives.

The poem

Source: Robert Frost, “The Oven Bird,” first published in Mountain Interval, 1916. Complete, 14 lines; line numbers printed every fifth line.

There is a singer everyone has heard,
Loud, a mid-summer and a mid-wood bird,
Who makes the solid tree trunks sound again.
He says that leaves are old and that for flowers
5 Mid-summer is to spring as one to ten.
He says the early petal-fall is past
When pear and cherry bloom went down in showers
On sunny days a moment overcast;
And comes that other fall we name the fall.
10 He says the highway dust is over all.
The bird would cease and be as other birds
But that he knows in singing not to sing.
The question that he frames in all but words
Is what to make of a diminished thing.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that takes a position on the attitude. “The poem is about the end of summer” is a subject; “Frost treats diminishment as a practical problem rather than a loss to be mourned, and then declines to solve it” is an interpretation a reader could argue against. The prompt asks for complexity, so name the two things pulling against each other: for instance, a bird who will not sing prettily inside a form built for singing.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording. The poem's flattest phrases are the most useful ones: “He says” (lines 4, 6, 10), “as one to ten” (line 5), “the highway dust” (line 10), “in all but words” (line 13). An essay that quotes only the famous last line has one piece of evidence, not four.
  • The line of reasoning this poem invites runs through its own sequence: a loud singer is introduced, three reports of loss follow, a late turn at line 11 explains why he sings at all, and a question closes the poem. Following that order gives you a structure, and it puts the hardest lines last, where you have something to say about them.
  • Two elements worth pairing: the form (fourteen lines of pentameter that open on a couplet, let the middle rhymes cross, snap back into the couplet of lines 9–10, and never break into stanzas) and the diction (measurement, dates, dust, a vocabulary of accounting rather than of song). Explain how a sonnet that sounds deliberately unmusical enacts what line 12 describes, and you have connected two elements to one meaning rather than listing them.
  • A sophistication path: the final sentence is a question the poem prints with a period, reported by the poet because the bird “frames” it “in all but words.” Decide what that refusal of a question mark does, and answer the reader who takes the ending as plain resignation, since “what to make of” is a maker's phrase and the poem is itself something made out of the diminished summer. Do not end on a sentence about how all things must pass.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Frost's oven bird does not mourn the summer; he takes inventory of it. The poem gives a bird who “says” rather than sings a sonnet that keeps declining to sound like one, and it ends by handing the reader a question printed as a statement. The attitude that results is neither grief nor acceptance but something harder: diminishment is treated as a practical problem, and the poem sets that problem down without solving it.

Evidence The form promises music and then withholds it. The poem is fourteen lines of iambic pentameter, fully rhymed, a sonnet by the numbers, but it opens on a blunt couplet, “heard” and “bird” (lines 1–2), then lets the next six rhymes cross one another before snapping shut again on “fall” and “all” (lines 9–10). Commentary The effect is a poem that keeps almost falling into song and then thinking better of it, which is precisely what the bird does. Frost also delays the turn. A sonnet usually pivots at line 8 or 9; here the pivot waits until “The bird would cease and be as other birds” (line 11), so the poem spends ten lines listing losses and only four lines thinking about them. The proportions themselves argue that the counting is easier than the conclusion. And the poem never breaks into stanzas: it is one solid block of woods, with no clearing in it.

Second element The diction belongs to a bookkeeper rather than a singer. Evidence Three times the bird “says” something (lines 4, 6, 10), and what he says is measured: “Mid-summer is to spring as one to ten” (line 5) is a ratio, “the early petal-fall is past” (line 6) is a date, and “the highway dust is over all” (line 10) is a survey of coverage. Commentary Frost could have written any of this as lament, and the material was available: pear and cherry blossom “went down in showers” (line 7) is nearly beautiful. Instead the arithmetic of line 5 converts a feeling into a proportion, which is a way of making loss manageable and also a way of refusing to be moved by it. The dust of line 10 does something sharper: a highway is an intrusion of the modern world into a poem about woods, and it arrives in the same flat reporting voice as the flowers, as though the two kinds of change were the same size.

Evidence The pun at the center holds the poem's two scales together. “And comes that other fall we name the fall” (line 9) turns a season into the Fall, and the line's rhyme with “all” makes the loss total. Commentary But Frost puts the largest idea in the plainest words, “that other fall we name the fall” is almost a shrug, and that mismatch is the poem's habit: the bigger the subject, the flatter the saying. The tone stays level while the stakes rise.

Evidence Then the ending. “The question that he frames in all but words / Is what to make of a diminished thing” (lines 13–14). Commentary The question is reported rather than asked, it is framed “in all but words” by a creature who has none, and it closes with a period instead of a question mark, so the poem never actually opens its mouth to ask. Sophistication That withheld punctuation is where the complexity sits. Line 12 says the bird “knows in singing not to sing,” and the sonnet has been doing that for thirteen lines, using a form invented for song to avoid singing, so the poem's own method is its answer to the question it will not ask. A reader could reasonably hear resignation here, and the dust and the arithmetic support that reading. But “what to make of” is a maker's phrase as much as an interpreter's, and the thing made out of this diminished summer is the poem itself, loud and mid-wood, insisting on being heard. Frost lets both readings stand and refuses to certify either, which is why the last line is quotable and unresolvable at once.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The first paragraph claims the poem treats diminishment as a practical problem it then declines to solve, and names the complexity: neither grief nor acceptance. That is defensible and disputable, and every body paragraph returns to it.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Evidence is specific and cited throughout (the couplets at lines 1–2 and 9–10, the late turn at line 11, the three uses of “He says,” the ratio in line 5, the dust in line 10, the pun in line 9, the reported question in lines 13–14), and the commentary explains rather than restates: why a delayed volta changes the poem's proportions, why arithmetic is a way of refusing to be moved, why flat phrasing on a large idea is a habit rather than an accident. Multiple elements are explained and connected to one line of reasoning: the sonnet form, the diction, and the poem's punctuation.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph identifies a real tension, a form built for singing used by a poet and a bird who both decline to sing, and shows it in the poem's own words (line 12 against the sonnet's rhymes). It then takes the alternative reading of the ending seriously, answers it with “what to make of” as a maker's phrase, and leaves the ambiguity standing rather than resolving it for comfort.

Prose analysis 1 · 40 minutes

The following excerpt is from Jane Austen's Pride and Prejudice (1813). In this passage Mr. Collins proposes to Elizabeth Bennet. Read the passage carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Austen uses dialogue, narration, and irony to characterize Mr. Collins and Elizabeth and the relationship between them.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Read the passage twice, once for the situation, once with a pencil on the words Mr. Collins chooses for himself. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the passage: a claim about what this proposal reveals about the two people in the room, stated so that another reader could disagree with you and argue back from these same paragraphs. Support that interpretation with specific evidence (short quoted phrases worked into your own sentences, cited by paragraph, not by line), and make your commentary explain how the quoted words produce the effect you claim rather than restating what they say. Arrange the paragraphs so that each advances a single line of reasoning instead of starting over. The prompt names three techniques; an essay that handles only the speeches has left the narrator's sentences alone, and the narrator is where most of the irony lives. Finally, aim for sophistication: identify a tension the passage holds open, answer a reading a sensible person could prefer to yours, or place the scene in the wider world the novel assumes, and earn it from the text, not from a closing sentence about love and marriage.

The passage

Source: Jane Austen, Pride and Prejudice, first published 1813; volume 1, chapter 19: Mr. Collins proposes to Elizabeth Bennet at Longbourn. Excerpted; internal cuts are marked with an ellipsis.

Mr. Collins made his declaration in form. Having resolved to do it without loss of time… he set about it in a very orderly manner, with all the observances which he supposed a regular part of the business.

“My reasons for marrying are, first, that I think it a right thing for every clergyman in easy circumstances (like myself) to set the example of matrimony in his parish; secondly, that I am convinced that it will add very greatly to my happiness; and thirdly—which perhaps I ought to have mentioned earlier, that it is the particular advice and recommendation of the very noble lady whom I have the honour of calling patroness.…

“…being, as I am, to inherit this estate…, I could not satisfy myself without resolving to choose a wife from among his daughters, that the loss to them might be as little as possible… And now nothing remains for me but to assure you in the most animated language of the violence of my affection.”

It was absolutely necessary to interrupt him now.

“You are too hasty, sir,” she cried. “You forget that I have made no answer. Let me do it without further loss of time.… I am very sensible of the honour of your proposals, but it is impossible for me to do otherwise than decline them.”

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that claims something about the scene, not about Mr. Collins's personality. “Austen uses irony to show that Mr. Collins is pompous” is a character label and earns nothing. A defensible interpretation says what the passage does: that the speech is built like a sermon and never arrives at the person being addressed; that Collins's fluency is his own indictment because no one has to comment on it; that Elizabeth defeats him by answering his form rather than his feeling. Any of those can be argued against, which is the test.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording, not for the plot. The phrases that pay here are the small ones: “in form,” “without loss of time,” “with all the observances which he supposed a regular part of the business” (first paragraph); “(like myself),” “first… secondly… and thirdly—which perhaps I ought to have mentioned earlier”; “that the loss to them might be as little as possible”; “the most animated language of the violence of my affection”; and, from Elizabeth, “You forget that I have made no answer” and “very sensible of the honour.” Retelling that Collins gives three reasons is summary; quoting the third one and showing whose reason it is is evidence.
  • The line of reasoning this passage invites. Start with the shape of the speech, move to the sentence in which that shape collapses, then to the motive he saves for last, and only then to Elizabeth's four sentences: so that by the time she speaks, the reader already knows what she is interrupting. Each paragraph should advance the argument one step rather than restating the thesis in new words.
  • Two techniques worth pairing: the dialogue and the narration around it. Collins's speech is self-characterizing, but the free indirect narration is what makes it funny: “he supposed a regular part of the business” lends him his own vocabulary while quietly declining to agree with it, and “It was absolutely necessary to interrupt him now” reports Elizabeth's exasperation in the narrator's perfectly level voice. Explain how the two work on each other; naming them side by side is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: the comedy depends on Collins being sincere rather than calculating. By the standards of his world his three reasons are respectable, the entail is real, and choosing a Bennet daughter genuinely would protect the family he is going to displace. Hold open the possibility that what the passage exposes is not one absurd man but an arithmetic everyone in the novel lives by and only he is tactless enough to say aloud, which makes Elizabeth's refusal a real risk rather than an easy triumph. Do not resolve that tension in a sentence; keep it working.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Mr. Collins never tries to persuade Elizabeth, and Austen makes that the joke. The proposal is built as public speaking (numbered reasons, a cited authority, the motive saved for last), and the form is the exposure: a speech about marrying that mentions his parish, his happiness, his patroness, and his inheritance, and never the woman in front of him. The narrator supplies no verdict, only Collins's own formal vocabulary, so the speech convicts itself; and Elizabeth wins by correcting his procedure rather than refusing his feelings.

Evidence The speech is organized like a sermon. Collins's reasons are “first,” then “secondly,” then “and thirdly”: that a clergyman “in easy circumstances (like myself)” should “set the example of matrimony in his parish,” that marriage “will add very greatly to my happiness,” and that it is Lady Catherine's “particular advice and recommendation.” Commentary Enumeration promises logic and delivers an inventory. Each clause moves a step further from the person addressed: his professional duty, his private comfort, somebody else's opinion. And “(like myself)” does its damage in two words: asked to think of a wife, he pauses to admire himself.

Evidence The syntax gives way where the thinking does. The third reason arrives as “and thirdly—which perhaps I ought to have mentioned earlier, that it is the particular advice…” Commentary That dash is a man re-ranking his list aloud and never closing the sentence he opened. He knows the order is wrong, Lady Catherine should have come first, and the correction escapes before he can dress it. Austen gives him fluency without control: he can produce the shapes of argument all afternoon, and cannot keep one sentence from showing which reason is real.

Second element The narration lends him a formality it never endorses. Evidence In the first paragraph he “made his declaration in form,” had “resolved to do it without loss of time,” and “set about it… with all the observances which he supposed a regular part of the business.” Commentary Every noun there is his (form, observances, business), and the one that is not, “supposed,” tips the sentence. The narrator reports his procedure faithfully and declines to agree that a proposal is a procedure: irony with no raised voice, the gap between ceremony and errand left for the reader to hold.

Evidence The same method handles his one claim to feeling. Being “to inherit this estate,” he “could not satisfy myself without resolving to choose a wife from among his daughters, that the loss to them might be as little as possible,” then offers “the most animated language of the violence of my affection.” Commentary Love enters as a register rather than an emotion: “most animated language” concedes in advance that what follows is a performance, and “violence” measures affection the way the clause before it measured a loss. He cannot switch vocabularies, so his intended climax is the most accountant-like thing he says.

Elizabeth answers in kind. Evidence “You are too hasty, sir,” she cried; “You forget that I have made no answer. Let me do it without further loss of time.… I am very sensible of the honour of your proposals, but it is impossible for me to do otherwise than decline them.” Commentary She objects to a procedure, not a man, lifting “without loss of time” from the narrator's account of his planning. Her refusal is as ceremonious as anything he has said: she speaks his dialect perfectly, so declining him is a choice, not an inability. The narrator had already taken her side: “absolutely necessary to interrupt him now” is her exasperation in his level voice.

Sophistication Still, the scene is funny only because Collins is sincere. By the standards of his world his reasons are respectable: clergymen were expected to marry, patronesses obeyed, the entail is real, and a Bennet daughter really would soften the loss. What the passage exposes may therefore be not one absurd man but an arithmetic the whole novel runs on, which quieter people perform in silence and he is tactless enough to say aloud. Elizabeth's refusal is then no costless triumph, she turns down the only offer that keeps her family's house, and Austen leaves that bill unpaid.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “The proposal is built as public speaking… and the form is the exposure: a speech about marrying that mentions his parish, his happiness, his patroness, and his inheritance, and never the woman in front of him.” That is an interpretation, not a summary or a character label: it claims the passage works by structure rather than by insult, and a reader who thinks Austen is simply satirizing a fool has something specific to argue against.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Every claim is anchored in quoted phrases cited by paragraph (“(like myself),” the “first… secondly… and thirdly—which perhaps I ought to have mentioned earlier” sequence, “he supposed a regular part of the business,” “that the loss to them might be as little as possible,” “the most animated language of the violence of my affection,” “You forget that I have made no answer”), and the commentary explains how each one works instead of restating it: enumeration promising logic and delivering an inventory, the unclosed dash revealing the real ranking, “supposed” withholding the narrator's assent, “violence” measuring feeling in the vocabulary of an entail. One line of reasoning runs from the shape of the speech to the sentence where it breaks to Elizabeth's answer, and the essay explains two techniques working on each other, the self-characterizing dialogue and the free indirect narration that surrounds it, which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph identifies a tension and keeps it open: the comedy depends on Collins's sincerity, so the passage can be read as exposing not a ridiculous individual but the marriage arithmetic everyone else practices quietly. It answers the obvious alternative reading, pure satire of a fool, from the passage's own terms, and it registers the cost of Elizabeth's refusal instead of ending on a general remark about love and marriage.

Prose analysis 2 · 40 minutes

The following excerpts are from Charlotte Brontë's Jane Eyre (1847), with a summary of the scene they come from. In this scene Jane, a governess at Thornfield, answers her employer Mr. Rochester in the orchard after he tells her she must leave. Read the summary and the excerpts carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Brontë uses figurative language, syntax, and the interplay of the two speakers to convey Jane's complex state of mind.

Directions

You have forty minutes. This document is not a continuous passage: it gives a summary of the scene's movement followed by three short excerpts in the order they occur. Read the summary once for the situation, then read the three excerpts twice, once for what each speaker claims, once with a pencil on the sentence shapes, because Jane's argument is made as much by her syntax as by her words. Quote only from the printed excerpts, and cite by excerpt rather than by line; you may refer to the summarized action, but do not put words in a character's mouth that are not on this page. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation: a claim about what Jane's state of mind actually is here, stated so that another reader could disagree and argue back from these same excerpts. Support it with short quoted phrases worked into your own sentences, and make your commentary explain how the quoted words produce the effect you claim rather than restating what they say. Arrange the paragraphs so each advances a single line of reasoning. The prompt names three techniques; an essay that only collects Jane's metaphors has left Rochester's sentences and his answer alone, and the interplay is where her complexity shows. Finally, aim for sophistication: identify a tension the scene holds open, answer a reading a sensible person could prefer to yours, or place the moment in the wider world the novel assumes, and earn it from the text, not from a closing sentence about love conquering class.

The scene and the excerpts

Source: Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre, first published 1847; chapter 23, Jane's declaration to Rochester in the orchard at Thornfield on Midsummer-eve, short excerpts with a summary of the scene.

Description of: the scene. On Midsummer-eve Rochester walks Jane through Thornfield's orchard and tells her his marriage is settled and a post in Ireland found for her. He describes a cord knotted between his ribs and hers that distance would tear, leaving him bleeding inwardly. Jane weeps, then breaks out against being used as a thing without feeling, and claims equality of spirit. He echoes her word and takes hold of her; she pulls free, telling him she is no bird in a net. The older Jane narrates, so each speech arrives framed by a self that survived it.

Excerpt 1: Rochester, walking beside Jane in the orchard, explains what her going to Ireland would do to him.

“…it is as if I had a string somewhere under my left ribs, tightly and inextricably knotted to a similar string situated in the corresponding quarter of your little frame.”

Excerpt 2: Jane, who has been weeping, answers him. Internal cuts are marked with an ellipsis.

“Do you think I am an automaton?—a machine without feelings?… Do you think, because I am poor, obscure, plain, and little, I am soulless and heartless?… I have as much soul as you,—and full as much heart!”

Excerpt 3: Jane goes on, and Rochester takes up her last words.

“…it is my spirit that addresses your spirit; just as if both had passed through the grave, and we stood at God's feet, equal,—as we are!”

“As we are!” repeated Mr. Rochester…

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis about what the outburst is, not about how Jane feels. “Jane is angry and in love at the same time” names two emotions and earns nothing, because the excerpts give no way to argue against it. A defensible interpretation makes a claim the scene could refute: that Jane does not lose control but changes the subject, moving the quarrel off the body and onto ground where Rochester's advantages do not count; that her equality is won only by a condition she cannot meet; that Rochester's echo concedes the words and takes back the argument. Any of those invites a real disagreement.
  • Evidence chosen for wording, not for the story. The phrases that pay are small and exact: “inextricably knotted,” “your little frame,” and “as if I had a string” from the first excerpt; “automaton,” “a machine without feelings,” the list “poor, obscure, plain, and little,” and “soulless and heartless” from the second; “my spirit that addresses your spirit,” “just as if both had passed through the grave,” “at God's feet, equal,” and Rochester's repeated “As we are!” from the third. Reporting that Jane insists she is not a machine is summary; quoting “automaton” beside “your little frame” and showing what the two words do to each other is evidence.
  • The line of reasoning this document invites. Begin with Rochester's figure, because it sets the terms Jane has to answer; move to the syntax of her questions; then to the sentence where she shifts the ground to spirit; then to his three-word reply, so that by the time he speaks the reader already knows what he is agreeing to. Each paragraph should advance the argument a step rather than restate the thesis in new clothes.
  • Two techniques worth pairing: the figurative language and the sentence structure that carries it. Jane's metaphors would be assertions on their own; it is the syntax that argues. The repeated interrogatives turn a protest into a cross-examination, the world's adjectives are buried in a subordinate clause so the conclusion drawn from them looks absurd, and the equality claim arrives inside a simile, “just as if both had passed through the grave”, before a dash drags it into the present tense. Explain how figure and structure work on each other; naming them side by side is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: hold the two halves of Jane's speech against each other. She begins by refusing to be a machine (insisting she has feelings, which belong to a living body), and ends by asking to be weighed as a spirit with no body at all, in a court she can reach only through the grave. The scene can be read as a triumph and as a measure of how little ground she has to stand on, and Rochester's echo takes her words without granting her premise. Do not resolve that; keep it working, and remember the narrator is an older Jane who already knows how the night ends.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Jane's outburst in the orchard is not a loss of control but a change of venue. Rochester has described their bond as a fact of his anatomy, something knotted into him that neither of them chose; Jane answers by moving the dispute off the body altogether, onto ground where the adjectives the world has hung on her carry no weight. She wins that argument, and Brontë makes the winning conditional: the only equality Jane can prove is one that requires both speakers to be dead.

Evidence Rochester's figure comes first and sets the terms. He feels “as if I had a string somewhere under my left ribs, tightly and inextricably knotted to a similar string situated in the corresponding quarter of your little frame.” Commentary Every noun is anatomical and every modifier removes choice: “inextricably knotted” names a bond nobody tied and nobody can pick apart. The comparison is generous and possessive at once: it gives Jane a place inside him while making her “little frame” a location in his feeling rather than a person with one of her own. He has accounted for their attachment without once asking what she wants.

Second element Jane's reply takes that sentence apart with syntax. Evidence “Do you think I am an automaton?—a machine without feelings?… Do you think, because I am poor, obscure, plain, and little, I am soulless and heartless?” Commentary The questions ask for nothing; repeated, they stop being protest and become cross-examination, with Rochester in the chair. The four adjectives are the world's inventory of her, and Brontë buries them in a subordinate clause so that “I am soulless and heartless” arrives as the conclusion somebody else has drawn from the list. Setting the inference out in order is enough to break it: nothing joins the adjectives to the verdict except habit. And “little” is the word Rochester has just used of her frame, so the examination catches him as well.

Evidence Then she moves the case: “it is my spirit that addresses your spirit; just as if both had passed through the grave, and we stood at God's feet, equal,—as we are!” Commentary The sentence strips away everything the earlier list depended on; what is left, “spirit,” has no income and no height, and the two of them can finally be measured on one scale. But the equality arrives inside a simile that needs a grave to work: “just as if both had passed through” it. Jane must imagine herself dead to argue herself level. Then the dash before “as we are” hauls the claim into the present and asserts flatly what the simile had only supposed, so the sentence leaves its own leap visible on the page.

Evidence Rochester's answer is three words of hers: “As we are!” repeated Mr. Rochester. Commentary The echo looks like surrender and works like capture. He keeps her final clause and drops the condition that earned it, so what she reached by argument he simply helps himself to, and he answers a claim about spirit by taking hold of her. Brontë lets the interplay deliver the judgment: Jane's most abstract sentence is met physically, exactly as his first figure predicted it would be, and she has to break free to stay the person who spoke it.

Sophistication The scene therefore holds two of Jane's own claims against each other, and the narrator prints both without reconciling them. She begins by refusing to be a machine (insisting she has feelings, which belong to a living body), and ends by asking to be weighed as a spirit with no body at all. The only court that will call her Rochester's equal is one she has to die to enter; the orchard, where she is a governess he may dismiss and send to Ireland, is not it. Her declaration is at once the most eloquent speech in the novel and the least useful, and the older Jane, who knows how this night ends, softens neither half.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “Jane's outburst in the orchard is not a loss of control but a change of venue… the only equality Jane can prove is one that requires both speakers to be dead.” That is an interpretation rather than a summary or a mood label: it claims the speech works by argument and that its victory is conditional, and a reader who thinks the excerpts show passion overflowing has something specific to contest.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Every claim is anchored in short phrases quoted from the printed excerpts, “inextricably knotted,” “your little frame,” “automaton,” “a machine without feelings,” “poor, obscure, plain, and little,” “soulless and heartless,” “my spirit that addresses your spirit,” “just as if both had passed through the grave,” “as we are”, and the commentary explains how each works instead of paraphrasing it: modifiers that remove choice, a subordinate clause that exposes a non-sequitur, a simile whose condition is a grave, a dash that asserts what the simile had only supposed. One line of reasoning runs from Rochester's figure to the syntax of Jane's questions to her change of ground to his reply, and the essay explains two techniques working on each other, the figurative language and the sentence structure that argues with it, which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph identifies a tension inside Jane's own speech and keeps it open: she demands recognition as a feeling body and then asks to be judged as a disembodied spirit, so the same excerpt reads as triumph and as evidence of how little ground she has. It answers the likelier alternative reading, an emotional outpouring, from the text's own terms, and it registers the cost rather than closing on a general remark about love and class.

Prose analysis 3 · 40 minutes

The following excerpts, with a summary of the chapter they come from, are from Kate Chopin's The Awakening (1899). Chapter 6 interrupts the story of Edna Pontellier's summer on Grand Isle to describe what has begun in her. Read the summary and the excerpts carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Chopin uses narration, figurative language, and the structure of the chapter to convey the complexity of Edna's awakening.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Read the summary once for the situation, then read the three excerpts twice: the second time with a pencil on the verbs and the nouns, because this chapter contains no action and the words are all there is. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation: a claim about what kind of awakening Chopin is describing and how the chapter describes it, stated so that another reader could disagree with you and argue back from these same sentences. Support that interpretation with specific evidence, short quoted phrases worked into your own sentences, and quote only from the printed excerpts; the summary is there to tell you where you are, and a phrase invented from it is not evidence. Make your commentary explain how the quoted words produce the effect you claim rather than restating what they say, and arrange your paragraphs so each advances a single line of reasoning. The prompt names three elements; an essay that admires the sea and never notices that the chapter has no scene in it has left the structure alone. Finally, aim for sophistication: identify a tension the chapter holds open, answer a reading a sensible person could prefer to yours, or place these sentences in the wider book, and earn it from the words, not from a closing remark about freedom.

The excerpts and a summary of the chapter

Source: Kate Chopin, The Awakening, first published 1899; chapter 6, which follows Edna's first swim with Robert Lebrun at Grand Isle: short excerpts with a summary of the chapter. Cuts inside an excerpt are marked with an ellipsis.

Description of: chapter 6 entire. The chapter holds no scene and no dialogue. It steps back to the moment just past, when Edna, wanting to go down to the water with Robert, first refused him and then went, and treats that contradiction as the only event worth explaining. Chopin names it a dim light starting inside Edna, one that opens a direction and closes it in the same motion, then states plainly that Edna has begun to understand where she stands in the world. Two paragraphs on beginnings follow, and the chapter ends on the sea.

Early in the chapter, offered in place of a motive for her going:

A certain light was beginning to dawn dimly within her,—the light which, showing the way, forbids it.

The chapter's central statement, a few lines later:

Mrs. Pontellier was beginning to realize her position in the universe as a human being, and to recognize her relations as an individual to the world within and about her.

The closing lines of the chapter:

The voice of the sea is seductive; never ceasing, whispering, clamoring, murmuring, inviting the soul to wander for a spell in abysses of solitude…

The touch of the sea is sensuous, enfolding the body in its soft, close embrace.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis about the writing, not about Edna's biography. “Edna is beginning to discover herself and feels drawn to the sea” restates the summary and earns nothing. A defensible interpretation says what these sentences do: that Chopin explains an action by removing the scene and substituting weather inside a person; that the chapter says the same thing twice in two vocabularies that will not combine; that the sea is given a voice and a touch so that desire can be described without anyone desiring anything. Each of those can be argued against, which is the test.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording. The phrases that pay are small ones: “beginning to dawn dimly,” “showing the way, forbids it,” “position in the universe as a human being,” “relations as an individual,” “never ceasing, whispering, clamoring, murmuring,” “abysses of solitude,” “soft, close embrace.” Quote inside your own sentences and keep the quotations short. Do not quote the summary or manufacture a sentence from it: the three blockquotes are the whole text you have, and a reader can tell.
  • The line of reasoning this chapter invites. Start with what is missing, a chapter that owes a scene at the beach and delivers commentary instead, then take the light figure and its self-canceling clause, then the cool abstract sentence about Edna's position, and only then the sea, so that by the time the water speaks the reader already knows what it is answering. Each paragraph should move the argument one step rather than restating the thesis in warmer words.
  • Two elements worth pairing: the narrator's diction and the personification at the end. The middle of the chapter is pitched like a lecture, “position,” “relations,” “individual,” “the world within and about her”, and the last lines are pitched like a seduction. Explaining how the two registers work on each other, and what the change of register does to a reader, is what the fourth Row B point requires; naming “abstract language” and “personification” side by side is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: the sea's invitation is not simply promising. It offers “solitude,” and it offers it in “abysses”; an embrace that is “close” is also a thing that closes. Hold open the possibility that the same words that welcome Edna are the words the novel will need later, so that the chapter's warmth and its warning are inseparable rather than sequential. Or press the light figure: if seeing the way is what forbids it, this awakening may cost Edna more than it gives from the first page of it. Do not settle the tension in a final sentence; keep it working.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Chapter 6 is the part of a novel that is usually thrown away: the explanation after a scene, with the scene removed. Chopin spends it saying twice what has begun in Edna Pontellier, and the two accounts do not fit together. One is the flat, almost clerical language of a woman recognizing her “position in the universe”; the other is a sea that whispers and touches. The complexity here is that gap. What Edna is said to understand and what she is shown to want arrive in different vocabularies, and Chopin writes no sentence that joins them, so the awakening reads less like a discovery than like a split.

Evidence The chapter begins by declining the scene it owes. Edna has gone down to the water with Robert after refusing to go, and the narration does not follow her there; it stops to account for the refusal instead, and what it offers in place of a motive is a figure: “A certain light was beginning to dawn dimly within her.” Commentary The verbs are the tell. “Beginning” and “dawn” are processes without an agent (nothing Edna decides, nothing anyone does to her), and “dimly” cancels half of what a light is for. Chopin explains a woman's behavior by describing weather inside her, which is a way of declining to explain it at all.

Evidence The figure then turns on itself. It is “the light which, showing the way, forbids it.” Commentary One clause does two opposite jobs, and the participle “showing” is what makes the contradiction airtight: the forbidding is not a second event that happens later but the same act seen from its other side. Illumination here is not permission. Whatever Edna can now see, she can also now see that she may not have, and the sentence leaves her no way to unsee it. That is the chapter's central claim about awakening, and Chopin makes it in half a sentence with no scene attached.

Second element Against that figure the narrator sets its opposite: abstraction. Evidence Edna “was beginning to realize her position in the universe as a human being, and to recognize her relations as an individual to the world within and about her.” Commentary The diction belongs to a lecture, “position,” “relations,” “individual,” “the world within and about her”, and it is being applied to a young woman who has just come up out of the Gulf. The paired infinitives, “to realize” and “to recognize,” keep the sentence balanced while its content is not, and “beginning” appears again, so even the plainest statement in the chapter refuses to let anything finish. The coolness is doing work: it states an enormity in terms no one could be scandalized by.

Evidence Then the sea speaks, and the prose changes climate altogether. Its voice is “seductive; never ceasing, whispering, clamoring, murmuring, inviting the soul to wander for a spell in abysses of solitude,” and its touch is “sensuous, enfolding the body in its soft, close embrace.” Commentary The participles do not advance the sentence; they accumulate after it has already finished, so the syntax keeps going the way water does, and “clamoring” plants one urgent word inside a series that is otherwise all murmur. The order matters more: voice first, then touch, the two instruments of persuasion rather than instruction. Personification lets the novel address Edna's body while no person is addressing it, so the desire in these lines has no object and therefore, yet, no scandal.

Sophistication It is tempting to read the ending as a promise, the book blessing what Edna is becoming. Its own nouns resist that. What the sea offers is “solitude,” and it offers it in “abysses”; the embrace is “close” as well as “soft,” and an enfolding is also a closing. Read forward, the passage is an invitation; read for its vocabulary, it is already the language a drowning would need. Chopin does not choose between them here, and the light that forbids what it shows has taught the reader, a page earlier, that in this novel seeing more and being free are not the same thing.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “Chopin spends it saying twice what has begun in Edna Pontellier, and the two accounts do not fit together… What Edna is said to understand and what she is shown to want arrive in different vocabularies.” That is an interpretation of how the chapter is built, not a summary of Edna's feelings or a label for her character, and a reader who thinks the abstract sentence and the sea are two stages of one continuous revelation has something specific to argue against.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Every claim rests on quoted phrases taken from the printed excerpts, “beginning to dawn dimly,” “showing the way, forbids it,” “position in the universe as a human being,” “relations as an individual,” “never ceasing, whispering, clamoring, murmuring,” “abysses of solitude,” “soft, close embrace”, and the commentary explains how each works rather than restating it: agentless verbs that describe weather instead of motive, a participle that makes prohibition simultaneous with sight, lecture diction cooling an enormity, participles that spill past the end of a sentence the way water does. One line of reasoning runs from the missing scene to the light to the abstraction to the sea, and the essay explains multiple elements working on each other (the structure of a chapter with no action in it, the narrator's shifting diction, and the personification of the sea), which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The last paragraph identifies a tension and keeps it open: the closing lines can be read as welcome or as warning, and the essay shows that the same words carry both, “solitude,” “abysses,” an embrace that is “close.” It answers the obvious alternative reading, that the sea simply blesses Edna's new freedom, from the passage's own vocabulary, and it ties that ambiguity back to the light figure instead of ending on a general remark about women and independence.

Prose analysis 4 · 40 minutes

The following excerpt is from Edith Wharton's Ethan Frome (1911). In the passage, Ethan Frome walks home from a village dance with Mattie Silver, a young relative of his wife who keeps house for them. Read the passage carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Wharton uses narration, detail, and figurative language to convey Ethan's complex experience of the walk.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Read the passage twice before you write anything, once to follow what actually happens, once with a pencil on the verbs, because in this passage almost nothing happens and the verbs are where Wharton says so. Then respond with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the passage: a claim about what Ethan's experience of this walk really is, stated so that another reader could disagree with you and argue back from the same four paragraphs. Support that interpretation with specific evidence (short quoted phrases, cited by paragraph), and make your commentary do the explaining: say how the words you quoted produce the effect you claim, and build your paragraphs so each one advances a single line of reasoning instead of restarting it. Explain how more than one literary element contributes to the passage's meaning; this prompt names three, and an essay that only inventories the similes has left the narration alone. Finally, aim for sophistication: identify a tension the passage holds open, answer a reading a sensible person could prefer to yours, or place the scene in a wider context, but earn it from the text, not from a closing sentence about lost chances.

The passage

Source: Edith Wharton, Ethan Frome, first published 1911; chapter II, the walk back to the farm after the dance in the church basement. Ethan has just watched Denis Eady, a young man from the village, offer Mattie a ride home in his cutter, and she has refused it. Excerpted; every cut is marked with an ellipsis.

They stood together in the gloom of the spruces, an empty world glimmering about them wide and grey under the stars. …

He slipped an arm through hers, as Eady had done, and fancied it was faintly pressed against her side; but neither of them moved. … He longed to stoop his cheek and rub it against her scarf. He would have liked to stand there with her all night in the blackness.

She moved forward a step or two and then paused again above the dip of the Corbury road. Its icy slope, scored by innumerable runners, looked like a mirror scratched by travellers at an inn. …

They walked on in silence through the blackness of the hemlock-shaded lane, where Ethan’s sawmill gloomed through the night, and out again into the comparative clearness of the fields. … Here and there a farmhouse stood far back among the fields, mute and cold as a grave-stone. The night was so still that they heard the frozen snow crackle under their feet. The crash of a loaded branch falling far off in the woods reverberated like a musket-shot, and once a fox barked, and Mattie shrank closer to Ethan, and quickened her steps.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that names the complexity, not the situation. “Ethan is happy walking Mattie home but worried about his marriage” is a summary plus a guess, and it earns nothing. A defensible interpretation says what kind of happiness this is: that Wharton grants Ethan the feeling and withholds the action; that his best half-hour is narrated almost entirely in verbs of wishing; that the same darkness he wants to stay in is the darkness he has to walk through to get home.
  • Evidence chosen for its wording, not its content. The load-bearing words here are small: “as Eady had done,” “fancied,” “but neither of them moved,” “longed,” “would have liked” (paragraph 2), “scored by innumerable runners,” “travellers at an inn” (paragraph 3), “gloomed,” “mute and cold as a grave-stone,” “musket-shot,” “shrank closer,” “quickened her steps” (paragraph 4). Quoting “an empty world glimmering” because it sounds beautiful is quoting the right passage for the wrong reason, unless you can say what “empty” is doing in a sentence about two people who have finally got what they wanted.
  • The line of reasoning this passage invites. Start with who is telling it: the narration sits just behind Ethan's eyes and reports his wishes as facts about him, never Mattie's. Then show what that vantage does to each event: a gesture that is copied, a pressure that is only “fancied,” a longing aimed at a scarf, a movement that finally comes from her. Then let the landscape take over the argument, so that by the last sentence the reader already knows why the one moment of contact has to arrive as fright.
  • Two elements worth pairing: narration and figurative detail. The narration supplies the mood of the verbs (conditional, unperformed); the similes supply the world those verbs move through: a mirror already scratched by strangers, houses like grave-stones, a branch that sounds like a gunshot. Explain how they work together: the figures are not decoration around Ethan's feeling, they are what his feeling is being measured against. Naming them side by side is Row B level 2.
  • A sophistication path: the passage will not let shelter and confinement be two different things. “Blackness” is what Ethan wants to stand in all night (paragraph 2) and also what he must walk through (paragraph 4); the hill that holds the evening's one promise is the hill “scored by innumerable runners.” Hold that doubleness open instead of resolving it quickly. Or take the harder route and account for what the passage refuses to tell you: Mattie's inner life is never reported, so a reader who calls this a mutual romance is reading Ethan's hopes as evidence, which is exactly the mistake the word “fancied” warns against.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis This is probably the happiest Ethan Frome ever gets, and Wharton writes his happiness in the grammar of things that do not happen. The narration stays close behind his eyes and hands him verbs of wishing rather than verbs of doing, while the countryside keeps producing images of other people's passage and of the dead. The result is not a love scene shadowed by foreboding from outside: the elation and the foreclosure are made of the same words, so the reader has to feel both at once.

Evidence The first gesture of the passage is borrowed. Ethan “slipped an arm through hers, as Eady had done,” then “fancied it was faintly pressed against her side; but neither of them moved” (paragraph 2). Commentary Wharton could have reported that Mattie pressed his arm. Instead she routes the fact through Ethan, and “fancied” tells us we are getting his reading of the evidence rather than the evidence, so the reader is placed inside a hope with nothing to check it against. The comparison with Denis Eady works the same way from the other side: the boldest thing Ethan does all night copies a younger man's move, made in the dark where nobody can see it. Then the semicolon lands: “but neither of them moved” cancels the clause in front of it, and the sentence stops exactly where the couple does.

Evidence The next two sentences name actions and then decline to report them: he “longed to stoop his cheek and rub it against her scarf,” he “would have liked to stand there with her all night in the blackness.” Commentary Even the longing is modest and displaced (not her cheek but her scarf, a piece of clothing standing in for the person), and the second wish asks time to stop, which a walk home cannot do. It is Mattie who ends it: “She moved forward a step or two” (paragraph 3). She gets the only verb of motion; he gets the conditional mood. That grammatical difference is the distance between them.

Second element From there the landscape does the arguing. Evidence The Corbury road's “icy slope, scored by innumerable runners, looked like a mirror scratched by travellers at an inn” (paragraph 3). Commentary A mirror is what a lover looks into, and this one has been ruined by traffic. “Innumerable” others have already come down this hill, and “travellers at an inn” are by definition people passing through, so the simile tells Ethan's private night that it is neither private nor first. Wharton sets that image at the top of the very slope the story will later send him down, letting one detail belong to the evening's pleasure and to its wreckage at once.

Evidence The walk itself keeps the pattern. Ethan's own property “gloomed through the night,” the farmhouses stand “mute and cold as a grave-stone,” and the loudest thing in the county is a falling branch that “reverberated like a musket-shot” (paragraph 4). Commentary Those are the terms of a funeral and a shooting, laid over the best half-hour of a man's life, and the grave-stone matters most, because a silent cold farmhouse is precisely what Ethan is walking toward. Then the one moment of contact arrives: “Mattie shrank closer to Ethan, and quickened her steps.” Commentary What he could not manage under the spruces is delivered by a fox's bark, and it comes with an acceleration: the nearer she gets, the faster the walk is over.

Sophistication A reader could fairly say this is just a beautiful winter night and that grave-stones are what New England looks like in February, and the surface supports that: the world “glimmers” and the pair are alone at last. But the passage refuses to keep shelter and trap apart. The “blackness” Ethan wants to stand in all night is the same “blackness of the hemlock-shaded lane” he has to walk through to get home, and the world that is “empty” for the two of them is empty in both senses at once. Commentary Ethan is not being deceived about his happiness; he is having it in the only form Starkfield issues: secondhand, unspoken, and pointed at a house that looks like a stone.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): “Wharton writes his happiness almost entirely in the grammar of things that do not happen… the elation and the foreclosure are made of the same words.” That is an interpretation rather than a summary: it claims the passage's feeling and its doom are carried by one set of choices, and a reader who thinks the foreboding comes from the setting alone has something specific to argue against.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Every claim rests on quoted phrases cited by paragraph, “as Eady had done,” “fancied,” “but neither of them moved,” “longed,” “would have liked,” “She moved forward,” “scored by innumerable runners,” “travellers at an inn,” “gloomed,” “mute and cold as a grave-stone,” “musket-shot,” “shrank closer”, and the commentary explains how each works instead of restating it: how “fancied” marks the report as Ethan's, how the semicolon stalls the sentence where the couple stalls, how the scratched mirror strips the night of its privacy. One line of reasoning runs from the borrowed gesture to the frightened touch, and the essay explains two elements working together (narration (the limited vantage and its conditional verbs) and figurative detail (the mirror, the grave-stone, the musket-shot)), which is what the fourth point requires.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The last paragraph names the alternative reading, an idyllic winter walk, and answers it from the passage's own diction rather than dismissing it, then holds open a tension the text will not resolve: “blackness” and “empty” are used for the refuge and for the confinement, so the scene is Ethan's one night of freedom and a picture of what has him. The point is earned by the doubled words, not by a closing claim about human nature.

Prose analysis 5 · 40 minutes

The following exchange is from Act I of Oscar Wilde's comedy The Importance of Being Earnest (1895). Algernon has discovered an inscription in his friend's cigarette case that does not match the name his friend goes by in town, and presses him about it. Read the excerpts and the summary below carefully. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how Wilde uses dialogue, epigram, and the contrast between the two men to convey the play's attitude toward respectability.

Directions

You have forty minutes. Begin with a defensible thesis that presents an interpretation of the passage: a claim about what Wilde's choices accomplish, not a restatement of the prompt and not a summary of who says what. In the body, build a line of reasoning from evidence: quote a few words, then explain how the language works. Two literary elements developed carefully will earn more than five named in passing. Do not narrate the scene; a sentence that only reports what happens is not yet evidence. For sophistication, look for the tension the scene keeps open: the play mocks the moral vocabulary of its audience while borrowing that vocabulary for its jokes, and it is genuinely unclear whether the deception is being condemned or congratulated.

The passage

Source: Oscar Wilde, The Importance of Being Earnest (first performed 1895), Act I: short excerpts with a summary of the scene.

Description of the scene. Algernon refuses to return the cigarette case until his friend explains why it is inscribed to "Uncle Jack" from a niece called Cecily, when in London he is known to everyone as Ernest. The explanation comes out in pieces: in the country he is Jack, guardian to his ward Cecily, and maintains a fictitious younger brother named Ernest whose scrapes require him to rush up to town. Algernon, delighted, produces the matching confession of his own invented invalid friend Bunbury, whose relapses require him to escape to the country, and names the practice as a recognized activity with a recognized name.

After Jack has finally given his explanation:

Jack. That, my dear Algy, is the whole truth pure and simple.

Algernon. The truth is rarely pure and never simple.

Algernon sets the two inventions side by side:

Algernon. You have invented a very useful younger brother called Ernest … I have invented an invaluable permanent invalid called Bunbury, in order that I may be able to go down into the country whenever I choose.

And gives the practice a name:

Algernon. I have always suspected you of being a confirmed and secret Bunburyist; and I am quite sure of it now.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • The epigram as a reversal of a cliché. Jack offers "the whole truth pure and simple"; Algernon returns "The truth is rarely pure and never simple." Weak commentary calls the line witty. Strong commentary notices that the joke works by taking a phrase the audience uses without thinking and testing it, and that the reversal is also accurate about the scene, since the truth just told was neither.
  • The parallel that equalizes the two men. "You have invented … I have invented" puts the confession and the counter-confession in matching syntax, with the inventions differing only in direction of travel. Commentary should explain that the symmetry removes any moral high ground from the exchange: neither man is exposing the other, and Jack's secret turns out to be a common practice rather than a private disgrace.
  • Moral vocabulary applied to deceit. The invented brother is "very useful," the invented invalid "invaluable," and the deceiver is "confirmed": words the play's audience reserved for duty, character and faith. Good essays explain the effect of the transfer rather than simply noting it.
  • Naming as legitimation. Coining "Bunburyist" turns an improvisation into a category with adherents and rules. Commentary can explain how giving a private lie a noun makes it sound like a recognized institution: the same move Victorian respectability makes with its own labels.
  • A sophistication path. Hold the play's double attitude open: the scene exposes a society whose members must invent people in order to live, and it is also entirely on the side of the inventors, who are the only characters having any fun. A strong Row C essay may also notice that the audience laughing at Bunburying is being asked to recognize it.
Show a 6/6 sample response

A cigarette case with the wrong name in it is, in most plays, the beginning of an exposure. In Wilde's hands it becomes an introduction. Thesis Through paired confessions set in matching syntax, through epigrams that overturn the phrases his audience uses to describe honesty, and through a vocabulary of usefulness and conviction applied to lying, Wilde converts what should be a scene of moral discovery into a scene of mutual recognition, so that the deception is not revealed as a flaw in these two men but as the ordinary technique by which respectable people survive the demands of respectability.

Evidence The turn comes in two lines. Jack finishes his explanation by calling it "the whole truth pure and simple," and Algernon answers, "The truth is rarely pure and never simple." Commentary Jack reaches for a stock phrase, the kind of formula a man uses to close a subject rather than to describe anything, and Algernon declines to let it pass, taking the two adjectives seriously enough to deny them both. Second element The wit is not decoration here but the play's method of argument: the epigram performs on the audience's language exactly what the scene performs on its morality, holding up a phrase everyone repeats and finding it will not survive inspection. It is also, inconveniently, correct. The account Jack has just given involves two names, a ward, and a brother who does not exist, so "pure and simple" is the one description that cannot apply, and Algernon's reply is a piece of literary criticism delivered to his friend's face.

Evidence Algernon then answers the confession with a confession of his own, arranged so the two match: "You have invented a very useful younger brother called Ernest … I have invented an invaluable permanent invalid called Bunbury, in order that I may be able to go down into the country whenever I choose." Commentary The repeated verb and the parallel clauses do the work that an argument would otherwise have to do. Jack's secret has been forced out of him under interrogation and could have left him at a disadvantage; Algernon's is volunteered, in the same grammatical shape, and the disadvantage disappears. What is left of the difference between the two men is a matter of direction (one invention brings its owner to London, the other sends its owner to the country), and direction is not a moral distinction. The adjectives finish the job. A fictitious brother is "very useful" and a fictitious invalid "invaluable," words belonging to the appraisal of tools, so the inventions are presented as equipment rather than as sins, and both men are simply well equipped.

Evidence The scene's last move is to give the practice a name: "I have always suspected you of being a confirmed and secret Bunburyist; and I am quite sure of it now." Commentary A noun does something a description cannot. Once the activity has a name it has a class of practitioners, and once it has practitioners it can be recognized on sight, suspected in advance, and confirmed, which is the language of creed and diagnosis, not of vice. "Confirmed" is the word used of bachelors and believers; "secret" implies an order to belong to. Wilde is not merely mocking two liars. He is showing that a society which insists on a public self will produce private machinery for escaping it, and that the machinery will acquire vocabulary, etiquette and adherents exactly as the public self did.

Sophistication What keeps the passage from settling into simple satire is that the play never asks anyone to stop. The two men who invent relatives are the only people in the scene with energy, invention or conversation worth hearing, and the audience's pleasure is in watching the inventions work rather than in seeing them punished. Wilde is therefore holding two positions at once: the deceit is a symptom of a society that demands the impossible, and it is also the best thing about the people practising it, a judgment and a compliment carried by the same lines. The tension extends to the theatre itself, since the audience being invited to laugh at a confirmed and secret Bunburyist was largely composed of people with country houses, town addresses, and reasons of their own for needing to be somewhere else.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1/1): The second sentence of the essay presents a defensible interpretation (that Wilde converts a scene of exposure into one of mutual recognition, so that deception reads as the technique of respectability rather than a lapse from it), and names the elements the body will use. It is not plot summary and not a restatement of the prompt.
  • Row B: Evidence and commentary (4/4): Three moments are developed in order, each with quoted evidence, "the whole truth pure and simple" against "rarely pure and never simple"; the paired "You have invented … I have invented"; "a confirmed and secret Bunburyist", and each quotation is followed by commentary explaining how the language works rather than what it reports: the epigram tests a stock phrase and proves accurate about the scene; the parallel syntax cancels the moral advantage the interrogation had created; the coined noun converts an improvisation into an institution. Two elements are sustained (epigram and the foil relationship carried by syntax), and the claims build in one line of reasoning.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1/1): The final paragraph names a genuine tension in the passage and holds it open, the same lines condemn the society and endorse its liveliest liars, and extends it to the relationship between the comedy and the audience watching it, rather than closing with a generalization about honesty.

Literary argument 1 · 40 minutes

Many works of literature feature a character who conceals a truth from the people around him or her. The concealment may protect the character, the community, or another person, and it usually costs something. Either from your own reading or from the list below, choose a work of fiction in which a character's concealment is central to the work. In a well-written essay, analyze how that concealment contributes to an interpretation of the work as a whole. Do not merely summarize the plot.

You may select a work from the list below or another novel or play of comparable literary merit: The Scarlet Letter (Hawthorne) · Jane Eyre (Charlotte Brontë) · Hamlet (Shakespeare) · Twelfth Night (Shakespeare) · The Picture of Dorian Gray (Wilde) · A Doll's House (Ibsen) · The House of Mirth (Wharton) · The Turn of the Screw (James) · Persuasion (Austen) · Frankenstein (Shelley).

Directions

Forty minutes, no printed text, six points. Everything you quote or describe comes from memory, so choose a work you know in detail: a book you can name chapters and scenes in is worth more here than a more impressive one you half-remember. Begin by deciding what the concealment does in the work as a whole, then write a thesis that presents that defensible interpretation; a thesis that only identifies the secret earns nothing. Support the interpretation with specific evidence recalled accurately (scenes, chapters, acts, turning points, a short remembered phrase), and explain how each piece supports your line of reasoning. Row B's fourth point requires commentary that consistently explains and an essay that shows how multiple elements of the work (structure, symbol, narration, setting, character foils) contribute to your interpretation. Do not retell the story: a reader who knows the book must still learn something from your paragraph. Plot summary, however accurate, cannot earn Row C.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis about what the concealment means, not what it is. “Dimmesdale hides that he is Pearl's father” is a fact from the plot; “the novel measures sin by its visibility, so the hidden letter grows while the public one can be worked with” is an interpretation of the work as a whole. Whatever work you choose, your claim should be arguable by someone who has read the same book and disagrees.
  • Answer the prompt's own terms: who is protected, and what does it cost? The prompt hands you a built-in line of reasoning: concealment protects someone, and it charges someone. An essay organized around those two questions, one body paragraph each, will outrun an essay organized as a retelling.
  • Evidence has to be located. Name the chapter, act, or scene: the second scaffold scene at midnight, the wedding interrupted in chapter 26, the letter Nora hides in the locked mailbox, the portrait in the locked schoolroom. A remembered detail with an address is specific evidence; “later in the book” is not.
  • Multiple elements, tied to one claim. The concealment in most of these works is carried by structure (a scene that repeats, a revelation withheld until the end) and by a symbol or a narrator (a letter, a portrait, a governess telling her own story). Explaining how two of those work together is what separates three points from four on Row B.
  • A sophistication path: hold open the cost on both sides. Exposure in these works is rarely a reward, the character who is finally seen often pays for it, and several of them refuse to confirm the truth even after the secret breaks. Naming what the ending still withholds, or answering a reader who thinks the concealment was justified, earns Row C. A closing sentence about honesty being the best policy does not.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis In Hawthorne's The Scarlet Letter, Hester Prynne and Arthur Dimmesdale commit the same sin, and the novel is built on the one difference between them: hers is visible and his is not. Hawthorne uses that difference to argue that concealment does not contain a wrong but enlarges it. Hester's letter is a fixed punishment she can work with and eventually redefine; the letter Dimmesdale hides keeps growing inside him, turns his holiness into a lie, and hands a third man the power to become worse than either of them. And the novel ends by refusing to confirm what the crowd saw on the minister's chest, so even his confession keeps something concealed.

Evidence The structure makes the argument before any character states it: Hawthorne builds the book on one piece of wood and returns to it three times. In chapter 2 Hester stands on the scaffold at noon with Pearl in her arms, and in chapter 3 Dimmesdale, from the balcony, is the one made to adjure her to name the father: concealment performed, not merely passive. In chapter 12 he climbs the same scaffold alone at midnight, cries out, and no one comes; Pearl asks whether he will stand there with them at noontide, and he will not. Only in chapter 23, after the Election Sermon, does he mount it in daylight and die. Commentary The three scenes measure the difference. What Hester's exposure costs is paid at once and in public; what Dimmesdale's concealment costs is paid across seven years, in installments he chooses himself. His midnight vigil is what concealment offers: penance without consequences, a confession staged for an audience of no one.

Evidence What the secret does to him is stranger than guilt. In chapter 11 he tells his congregation that he is a thing of pollution and a lie, and they love him the more for it; his power as a preacher grows directly out of the sin he will not name, because a man who has fallen can speak to the fallen. He fasts, keeps vigils, and scourges himself in a locked closet. Commentary The irony is structural rather than decorative: concealment turns truth into falsehood, since the one true sentence he says in public is heard as humility and so functions as a lie. By chapter 20, walking home from the forest, he is inventing blasphemies to teach to children. Hiding has not preserved the man his parishioners admire; it has hollowed him and left their admiration standing on nothing.

Second element The novel's symbols make the same case in another key. Evidence Hester embroiders her own A in gold thread, earns her living by that needle (chapter 5), and by chapter 13 the town has begun to say the letter stands for “Able.” Pearl is the letter alive: the child who keeps asking the question the adults will not answer, and who in chapter 19 will not cross the brook until the A is back on her mother's breast. Commentary A displayed symbol can be argued with and gradually turned; a hidden one is legible to no one but the man carrying it, so it never changes meaning. That is the interpretation of the work as a whole: meaning here is made publicly, which is why the public sinner survives and the private one does not.

Evidence Hester's own concealment proves the rule. Her promise in chapter 4 to hide Chillingworth's identity is what makes the plot possible: it lets him lodge in the minister's house and feed on him. When she breaks it in chapter 17 Dimmesdale is freed within days, and after his death Chillingworth withers away within the year (chapter 24). Commentary The damage runs outward: the secret does not merely hurt its keepers, it creates a man whose existence depends on it. Sophistication And yet the novel will not let its own moral stand clean. The narrator's charge to be true asks only that we show the world some trait by which the worst may be inferred (a compromise, not disclosure), and the last chapter reports that some witnesses saw a letter on the minister's flesh and others denied any mark at all, a disagreement Hawthorne declines to settle. A reader could argue the concealment genuinely protected Pearl and a congregation that needed its minister, and the book allows it. But it also shows what exposure buys: Hester is vindicated and still lives at the edge of town for the rest of her life. The novel argues for the public letter without pretending it is a reward.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The opening paragraph claims that the novel is organized around the visibility of sin rather than the sin itself, and that concealment enlarges what it hides: a defensible interpretation of the work as a whole that a reader could dispute, not a summary of the plot or a restatement of the prompt.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Evidence is recalled from the work and located precisely: the three scaffold scenes (chapters 2, 12, 23), Dimmesdale's pulpit confession and self-punishment (chapter 11), the blasphemies of chapter 20, the gold-embroidered letter and “Able” (chapters 5 and 13), Pearl at the brook (chapter 19), Hester's promise and its breaking (chapters 4 and 17), Chillingworth's collapse (chapter 24). The commentary consistently explains rather than narrates: why the repeated scaffold functions as a measuring device, why a true sentence heard as humility becomes a lie, why a public symbol can change meaning and a private one cannot. Multiple elements (the novel's three-part structure, its symbols, and its use of Chillingworth as a foil created by the secret) are explained in support of one line of reasoning.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph takes the alternative reading seriously (the concealment as real protection for Pearl and the congregation), answers it with what the seven years actually cost, and then identifies a tension the book itself leaves open: a narrator who recommends only partial disclosure and an ending that refuses to confirm the mark on Dimmesdale's chest. The essay also refuses to sentimentalize Hester's exposure, noting that she is vindicated and still marginal. This is a sustained complexity, not a closing flourish.

Literary argument 2 · 40 minutes

In many works of literature a character refuses a role that family, community, or society expects that character to accept. The refusal may be spoken or silent, and it always costs something. Either from your own reading or from the list below, choose a work of fiction in which such a refusal occurs. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how the refusal and its consequences contribute to an interpretation of the work as a whole. Do not merely summarize the plot.

  • Jane Austen, Pride and Prejudice (1813)
  • Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre (1847)
  • Kate Chopin, The Awakening (1899)
  • Charles Dickens, Great Expectations (1861)
  • George Eliot, The Mill on the Floss (1860)
  • Thomas Hardy, Tess of the d'Urbervilles (1891)
  • Henrik Ibsen, A Doll's House (1879)
  • Herman Melville, “Bartleby, the Scrivener” (1853)
  • Mark Twain, Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884)
  • Edith Wharton, The House of Mirth (1905)
Directions

You have 40 minutes and nothing is printed for you: every piece of evidence comes from a work you already know well. Open with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the work as a whole: a claim about what the refusal means in the novel or play, not a report that it happens. Support that claim with specific evidence you can actually name under time pressure: acts, chapters, scenes, staged actions, a character's words in short phrases. After each piece of evidence write commentary that explains how it supports your line of reasoning. Row B's fourth point is awarded only when that explaining is consistent across the essay and when you show how more than one literary element (structure, characterization, setting, imagery, narration) contributes to your interpretation. Earn the sophistication point by naming a tension the work refuses to settle, by answering the strongest reading against your own, or by placing the refusal in the world that made it necessary. Do not merely summarize the plot: a retelling, however accurate, sits at the bottom of Row B and never reaches Row C.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that says what the refusal reveals, not that it occurs. “Nora leaves Torvald at the end of the play” is plot; “Nora's leaving exposes a marriage that was never a relationship, only a part she had been cast in” is a defensible interpretation of the work as a whole, and it is arguable, which is what Row A pays for.
  • Evidence located, not quoted at length. Name where things happen (the macaroons and the pet names in Act I, the tarantella rehearsal in Act II, the returned bond and the change of clothes in Act III), and quote only a phrase. On Q3 a reader expects accurate recall with a location attached, not a memorized passage.
  • The line of reasoning this prompt builds in: refusal, then consequence, then meaning. Follow what the refusal costs (children, money, reputation, the character's own certainty), and let the cost do the arguing. An essay that only celebrates the refusal never answers the second half of the prompt and stalls at 2 in Row B.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: costume and stage properties as characterization (the party dress, the hidden sweets, the ordinary clothes a character returns in) and dramatic or narrative structure (a plot whose crisis is resolved before the real ending begins). Row B's top point wants both explained, not listed side by side.
  • A sophistication path: hold open what the work will not settle. Nora leaves three children; Torvald is less a villain than a man reciting lines he was handed. An essay that grants the strongest objection to its own reading and still holds that reading earns Row C. An essay that ends on “she finally found herself” does not.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis Nora Helmer's refusal at the end of A Doll's House looks like a decision made in one evening, but Ibsen builds the play so that it reads as a discovery instead. Nora does not decide to stop being a wife; she finds out that she has never been one, only an actor paid in pet names to keep playing the part. Because the refusal arrives after the blackmail plot has already been solved, the play's real subject turns out not to be a woman's scandal but the price of a life held on somebody else's terms.

Evidence For two acts Nora is characterized almost entirely by what she wears, eats, and hides. She sneaks macaroons in Act I and lies about them when Torvald asks, and she lets him call her his lark and his squirrel instead of her name. Commentary These are small comic details, and that is exactly the point: the marriage runs on a currency of treats and nicknames, so Nora's only power in the house is a pet's power to be charming. Evidence The same logic runs through the tarantella. In Act II she performs the dance wildly and out of time while Torvald corrects her from the piano. Commentary She is stalling so that he will not open the letterbox, but Ibsen lets us see what the stalling costs. To buy one hour, she has to perform the exact helplessness that is ruining her, and the dance that looks like abandon is really obedience.

Second element The structure of the play makes the same argument in a different key. Evidence Ibsen spends three acts assembling a conventional blackmail machine (the forged signature on her father's note, Krogstad's threat, the letter locked in the box) then defuses it: Krogstad returns the bond, and Torvald cries out that he is saved. Nora's answer is two words. “And I?” Commentary A well-made play would end there, with the danger gone and the household restored. Instead the curtain stays up for another long scene, and that scene is the real play. By finishing his plot early, Ibsen shows that the crisis was never the forgery at all. Torvald's rage, followed within minutes by his cheerful forgiveness once his own name is safe, teaches Nora more than exposure ever could: she matters to him precisely as much as his reputation requires.

Evidence The refusal itself is staged as an anticlimax. Nora goes offstage and comes back in her everyday clothes, having taken off the costume she wore upstairs to the party, and asks Torvald to sit down at the table, because in eight years they have never once had a serious conversation. Commentary The change of clothes does work a speech would do badly. It shows her stepping out of a role rather than winning an argument, and it signals that what follows is a settlement, not a tantrum. When Torvald reminds her of her duties to her husband and her children, she answers that she has duties to herself that are just as sacred, and that she must find out for herself which is right, the world or she. She does not claim to be right. She claims the right to find out, which is a far more damaging thing to say to a man who has spent eight years explaining the world to her.

Sophistication It would be easier if Ibsen let us call this simply brave, and he will not. Nora leaves three children behind, and she says herself that she is not fit to raise them: an echo of Torvald's cruelest line an hour earlier, so his accusation survives inside her own mouth. The last exchange holds the same doubleness: she gives back her ring and takes his, and yet when he asks whether they could ever be more than strangers she says it would take a change so great she can only call it a miracle, and he is left repeating the word when the street door slams below. The play promises neither that she is right nor that she will survive; its argument is smaller and harder than either. Torvald is not a monster; he says what he was raised to say, in the voice his society hands to husbands. Read that way, Nora's refusal is not aimed at a man at all but at a script, which is why a door closing offstage could sound, to Ibsen's first audiences, like something breaking.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The second and third sentences of the opening paragraph make an arguable claim about the whole play: that the refusal is a discovery, not a decision, and that the play's subject is the cost of a borrowed life. It could be argued against, and it is a claim about meaning rather than a summary of the ending.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Specific, located evidence supports every claim: the macaroons and pet names (Act I), the tarantella rehearsal (Act II), the returned bond and “And I?”, the change of clothes and the duties-to-myself exchange (Act III). Commentary follows each piece and explains how it works rather than what it shows: the pet-name currency, the dance as obedience, the plot that ends before the play does. Two elements are explained, not listed: costume and properties as characterization, and the structure of a well-made play that Ibsen deliberately overruns.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph holds a tension open instead of closing it, Nora abandons her children and repeats her husband's charge against herself, and answers the strongest objection to the essay's reading by granting that Torvald is a product of the same script. The reading survives the objection, which is what the row rewards.

Literary argument 3 · 40 minutes

Works of literature often present a figure who stands outside a community: by birth, by choice, or by the community's refusal: and whose exclusion exposes something about that community. Either from your own reading or from the list below, choose a work of fiction in which such a figure appears. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how the character's exclusion contributes to an interpretation of the work as a whole. Do not merely summarize the plot.

  • Charlotte Brontë, Jane Eyre (1847)
  • Emily Brontë, Wuthering Heights (1847)
  • Charlotte Perkins Gilman, “The Yellow Wall-Paper” (1892)
  • Nathaniel Hawthorne, The Scarlet Letter (1850)
  • Henry James, Daisy Miller (1878)
  • Herman Melville, Billy Budd, Sailor (written 1891)
  • Mary Shelley, Frankenstein (1818)
  • Mark Twain, Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884)
  • Edith Wharton, The Age of Innocence (1920)
  • Oscar Wilde, The Picture of Dorian Gray (1890)
Directions

You have 40 minutes and no printed text; every piece of evidence comes from a work you already know in detail. Begin with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the work as a whole: a claim about what the exclusion reveals, not a report that the character is excluded. Support it with specific evidence you can locate: volumes, chapters, scenes, a gesture, a refusal, a short phrase the character actually speaks. Follow each piece with commentary that explains how it advances your line of reasoning. Row B's fourth point requires commentary that explains consistently, and it requires you to show how more than one literary element (narration, structure, setting, allusion, a recurring motif) contributes to your interpretation. Earn the sophistication point by exploring a tension the work leaves standing, by accounting for a reading of the same evidence that opposes yours, or by placing the exclusion in the work's own historical or generic moment. Do not merely summarize the plot: retelling the story, however faithfully, keeps an essay at the bottom of Row B and out of Row C entirely.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis aimed at the community, not the outcast. The prompt's second half, the exclusion “exposes something about that community”, is where Row A is won or lost. “The creature is rejected everywhere he goes” restates the prompt; “the creature is met with the same reflex by every person who sees him, so the novel makes monstrousness a property of the eye rather than of the body” is an interpretation someone could dispute.
  • Evidence recalled precisely and located. Name the volume, chapter, or scene and paraphrase: the winter of secret help at the cottage, the choice to approach the blind man first, the shot beside the stream. A three- or four-word phrase is plenty; an invented quotation costs more than it buys.
  • The line of reasoning this prompt builds in: what the figure is before exclusion, the moment of exclusion itself, what the community's reaction reveals, and what follows from it. Essays that skip the first stage have no way to argue that the exclusion made anything happen.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: point of view (who narrates the outsider's story, to whom, and how many voices stand between the reader and the outcast) and a sustained motif; sight and blindness, thresholds and doorways, the withholding of a name. Row B's top point wants both explained in the same argument, not introduced in separate paragraphs and dropped.
  • A sophistication path: the hardest fact about most outsider figures is that they do real harm. Grant it. An essay that admits the murders and still argues that the novel indicts the community, because it shows sympathy being withdrawn before any crime exists, earns Row C. An essay that ends on “society should be more accepting” does not.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis In Frankenstein the creature is never excluded for anything he has done. Mary Shelley arranges volume 2 so that every act of kindness comes first and every rejection follows on sight alone, and she gives the one welcome he receives to a man who cannot see him. The result is a novel that treats exclusion as a reflex of the eye rather than a judgment on a life, and that asks how much of the monster the community has built itself.

Evidence Before the creature speaks to anyone, Shelley spends chapters establishing what he is. Hidden in the hovel attached to the De Lacey cottage, he learns language by eavesdropping on the lessons Felix gives Safie, and he learns history from a book read aloud in the same room. When he understands that the family is poor, he stops taking their food, and he spends his nights gathering their firewood and clearing the path of snow so that they wake to work already done. Commentary None of this is necessary to the plot, which is exactly why it matters: Shelley is buying the reader's judgment in advance. By the time anybody looks at him, we have watched him behave better than most of the human beings in the novel, so the rejection cannot be read as self-defense.

Evidence The rejection scene is built like an experiment. The creature waits for a day when Felix, Agatha, and Safie are out, and speaks to the blind old De Lacey, who listens, hears a stranger in trouble, and offers his help. Minutes later the others return: Agatha faints, Safie runs, and Felix beats him with a stick and drives him out of the cottage. Commentary The voice is the same voice, the words are the same words, and the only variable Shelley changes is whether the listener can see. That single controlled difference is the novel's argument in miniature. It also explains the creature's earlier horror at his own reflection in a pool: he has already been taught to judge himself by the faculty that will condemn him, which means the community's verdict is inside him before it is ever pronounced.

Second element The book's structure does the same work on the reader that blindness does on De Lacey. Evidence The creature's account sits at the center of three nested narratives: Walton's letters enclose Victor's confession, which encloses the creature's own voice. Commentary For the length of volume 2 the reader has no picture, only a speaker (we are placed where the blind man is, listening before looking), and Shelley knows that the sympathy we grant there is the sympathy the cottagers withhold. The same structure shapes his reading of Paradise Lost, which he takes as history: he first compares himself to Adam, then decides he is closer to Satan. That movement is not self-pity but a report on the only two positions his education has offered him, and the reader, who has heard the whole story, can see that he did not choose the second one alone.

Sophistication What keeps this from being a simple defense is that Shelley refuses to let sympathy settle. The creature burns the cottage after the family flees, and on the road to Geneva he strangles a child: approaching William in the hope that someone so young could not yet have learned the reflex, and killing him the instant he proves he has. He then plants the miniature on Justine, and she is executed for it. Evidence That is an innocent woman dead at second hand, and no amount of prior kindness cancels it. Commentary Yet the novel's shape will not let us use the murders to dismiss him either, because it has already shown the withdrawal of sympathy happening before any crime exists. And the account that moves us reaches the reader only through Victor, who loathes him, and through Walton, who is looking for a hero to admire; the most sympathetic testimony in the book is also the most heavily mediated. Shelley leaves both facts standing. The novel does not ask whether the creature deserves pity or punishment. It asks a colder question about the community he wanted to join: what it is worth, if the price of admission is a face.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The opening paragraph claims that Shelley sequences volume 2 so that kindness always precedes rejection and that the one welcome comes from a blind man, making exclusion a reflex of sight. That is a defensible interpretation of the whole novel, arguable and specific to this book rather than to any story about an outcast.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Located evidence supports every claim in the line of reasoning: the language lessons and the nightly firewood, the staged approach to De Lacey and Felix's stick, the reflection in the pool, the nested Walton–Victor–creature narration, the reading of Paradise Lost, William's murder and Justine's execution. Commentary follows each piece and explains its function: why the kindnesses are placed first, why the only changed variable is sight, why the frame puts the reader in De Lacey's chair. Two elements are explained together rather than listed: narrative structure and the sight-and-blindness motif.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph names the strongest objection to its own reading, the creature murders a child and lets an innocent woman hang, refuses to cancel it, and then adds a second complication, that the account moving us is filtered through two hostile or self-interested narrators. Both are held open rather than resolved, and the closing question is about the community, which is what the prompt asks.

Literary argument 4 · 40 minutes

In some works of literature a place is more than a backdrop: it shapes what the characters can want, do, or become. Either from your own reading or from the list below, choose a work of fiction in which a particular place carries that weight. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how the place contributes to an interpretation of the work as a whole. Do not merely summarize the plot.

  • Emily Brontë, Wuthering Heights (1847)
  • Willa Cather, My Ántonia (1918)
  • Kate Chopin, The Awakening (1899)
  • Charles Dickens, Hard Times (1854)
  • Thomas Hardy, The Return of the Native (1878)
  • Nathaniel Hawthorne, The Scarlet Letter (1850)
  • Sarah Orne Jewett, The Country of the Pointed Firs (1896)
  • James Joyce, Dubliners (1914)
  • Herman Melville, Moby-Dick (1851)
  • Edith Wharton, Ethan Frome (1911)
Directions

You have 40 minutes and no printed text; the evidence comes from a work you know well enough to cite by chapter or scene. Begin with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the work as a whole: a claim about what the place does to the people in it, not a description of what the place is like. Support it with specific evidence: a named landscape, a room, a season, a journey, an image the work returns to. After each piece, write commentary explaining how the evidence carries your line of reasoning forward. Row B's fourth point asks for commentary that explains consistently and for more than one literary element (setting and imagery, but also structure, point of view, or the shape of the narration) working together in your interpretation. The sophistication point goes to an essay that explores a tension the work leaves unresolved, answers a competing reading of the same evidence, or situates the place in its historical or generic moment. Do not merely summarize the plot: a tour of the setting is still summary, and summary cannot reach Row C.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis that gives the place a job. “The prairie is important in My Ántonia” is not arguable and not an interpretation. “The prairie is the scale the novel measures lives against, so the move to town registers as a shrinking rather than a step up” is a claim a reader could argue with, which is the test Row A applies.
  • Evidence tied to a location in the book. Name the book and the scene: the first night under the open sky in Book I, Mr. Shimerda's grave at the crossroads, the plough standing black on the setting sun at the close of Book II, the children coming up out of the fruit cave in Book V. Paraphrase the image; a phrase of three or four words is all the quotation Q3 needs.
  • The line of reasoning a place prompt rewards: set the place against its rival. Most of these works have two (land and town, ship and shore, moor and house, island and city), and the argument gets sharp when you follow one character across the boundary and show what each place permits that the other forbids.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: setting and imagery (the grass, the plough, the cave, the road) and the structure of the narration, a retrospective first-person narrator whose account of a place is also evidence about himself. Row B's top point needs the two explained in one argument, not handled in separate paragraphs.
  • A sophistication path: ask what the narrator gains by making the place this large, and let the question stay open. Note too that the land in this novel is not kind: it kills Mr. Shimerda in the first winter, so an essay that treats the prairie as simply nurturing has ignored its own best evidence. Holding the gift and the cost together is a Row C move; ending on “setting shapes character” is not.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis The Nebraska prairie in My Ántonia is not the background of Ántonia's life; it is the scale the novel uses to measure one. Cather builds the book so that the land, dangerous and indifferent, is still the only place large enough to let a person become something, while Black Hawk, which is safe, only makes people smaller. And because the whole story is remembered by a man who chose the town, the novel's argument about place doubles as a quiet verdict on its narrator.

Evidence Jim's first hours in Nebraska establish the terms. Riding from the station in the dark he can see no fence and no field, only land, and he feels as though he has gone over the edge of the world. Later, sitting in his grandmother's garden with the warm earth under him, he decides that being dissolved into something complete and great is happiness. Commentary Cather gives the novel's definition of happiness to a place, not to a person, and she makes it a definition of self-loss rather than self-assertion. That is a strange thing to build a book of memory on, and it sets up everything after: whatever Jim later wants will be measured against a standard that requires being absorbed into something bigger than a career.

Evidence The land is not tender about this. Mr. Shimerda, a cultivated man who brought a violin from Bohemia, cannot survive his first winter in a dugout and kills himself; he is buried at the corner of the farm, and years later the roads still bend around the grave instead of crossing it. Commentary That detail does more argumentative work than any description of the grass. The country will not be squared off into the grid the surveyors laid over it, and the man it killed is still there, shaping the way people travel. The prairie in this novel gives and takes at the same scale, which is exactly why it can serve as a measure: a place that only nurtured would prove nothing.

Second element The novel's five-book structure turns that measure into a plot. Evidence Book II moves the Burdens into Black Hawk, where Ántonia and the other immigrant girls work in townspeople's kitchens and are gossiped about for dancing at the tent the Vannis put up in the summer; the town's young men admire the hired girls and marry the bankers' daughters. Book III takes Jim further off the land, to Lincoln and Latin, and Book V brings him back twenty years later. Commentary Each step toward town narrows what a person may want, and Cather marks the boundary with one image at the end of Book II: seen from the river bluff, a plough left in a field stands black and enormous inside the circle of the setting sun, and then the sun drops and the plough shrinks back to a small tool on the plain. Distance and light, not the object, made it great, which is what town does to people in reverse.

Evidence Book V proves the thesis on Ántonia's body and land. She comes back from Denver unmarried and pregnant, and the town has a word for that; the farm does not. Commentary Twenty years on she has an orchard she planted herself and a fruit cave her children come boiling out of into the light, and Jim, who has a law practice and a marriage the introduction describes coldly, has nothing of the kind. The place that could have destroyed her is also the only one that had room for what she became.

Sophistication Still, the novel undercuts its own narrator at the point where he sounds surest. The title is My Ántonia, and the introduction tells us Jim wrote “Ántonia” on the manuscript first and then went back and added the possessive: a small gesture that turns a woman into a piece of somebody's country. Every claim above reaches us through a man who believes his best life is behind him. It is possible that the prairie really does what he says, and it is equally possible that a childless, disappointed narrator has enlarged a place the way the horizontal light enlarged that plough. Cather does not settle it. She ends Jim on the old road outside town, calling what he and Ántonia share the precious, the incommunicable past: a phrase that admits, in its middle word, that whatever the place gave him cannot be handed to anyone else, including the reader.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The first paragraph claims that the prairie functions as the novel's unit of measure (dangerous but large enough to permit becoming, against a town that only diminishes), and that the narration turns this into a judgment on Jim. That is an interpretation of the work as a whole and could be argued against.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Evidence is specific and placed: the first night's ride and the garden in Book I, Mr. Shimerda's grave and the bending roads, the hired girls and the dancing tent in Book II, the plough on the sun, Lincoln in Book III, the orchard and fruit cave in Book V. Commentary follows each and explains its function rather than restating it: happiness defined as self-loss, the grave that redirects the grid, the light that makes the plough enormous. Two elements are explained together: the setting's imagery and the five-book structure that converts the measure into a plot.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The last paragraph raises a competing reading of the same evidence (that the prairie's grandeur may be an artifact of a disappointed narrator's memory, like the light that magnified the plough) grounds it in the added possessive of the title, and leaves the question open instead of resolving it. The final sentence reads the closing phrase against Jim rather than sentimentally.

Literary argument 5 · 40 minutes

Some works of literature end without settling the central question they raise, leaving the reader to weigh the possibilities. Either from your own reading or from the list below, choose a work of fiction with such an ending. Then, in a well-written essay, analyze how the lack of resolution contributes to an interpretation of the work as a whole. Do not merely summarize the plot.

  • Anton Chekhov, “The Lady with the Dog” (1899, Garnett translation)
  • Kate Chopin, The Awakening (1899)
  • Charlotte Perkins Gilman, “The Yellow Wall-Paper” (1892)
  • Nathaniel Hawthorne, “Young Goodman Brown” (1835)
  • Henrik Ibsen, A Doll's House (1879)
  • Henry James, The Turn of the Screw (1898)
  • James Joyce, “The Dead” (Dubliners, 1914)
  • Herman Melville, Billy Budd, Sailor (written 1891)
  • Mary Shelley, Frankenstein (1818)
  • Mark Twain, Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884)
Directions

You have 40 minutes and nothing printed in front of you, so choose a work whose last pages you can reconstruct in order. Open with a thesis that presents a defensible interpretation of the work as a whole: a claim about what the missing resolution accomplishes, not the observation that the ending is ambiguous. Support it with specific evidence: the images and sentences of the closing scene, and the earlier material the ending answers or repeats. Commentary after each piece must explain how the evidence carries your line of reasoning; Row B's fourth point requires that explaining to be consistent throughout and requires more than one literary element (a recurring image, the structure of the narration, the handling of point of view) to be shown contributing to your interpretation. The sophistication point is available here in an unusually direct form: name the competing readings the work sustains, show the evidence each one rests on, and refuse to break the tie on the work's behalf. Do not merely summarize the plot, and do not supply the ending the author withheld.

Your essay
What a reader looks for on this prompt
  • A thesis about what the silence does. “The ending of The Awakening is ambiguous” is an observation every reader shares and earns nothing. “Chopin withholds the word for what happens because her world has no word for what Edna has become” is a claim about the whole novel, and it can be argued against, which is the Row A test.
  • Evidence from both ends of the book. The closing scene is only a few pages (the beach, the old bathing suit left behind, the bird with the broken wing, the voices and smells of childhood), but the argument gets its force from what those pages repeat: the description of the sea that Chopin prints early and again at the end, and the first solitary swim at Grand Isle. Know which comes where.
  • The line of reasoning this prompt builds in: name the two readings the work actually supports, put the text under each, and then show why the work keeps both alive. An essay organized as a walk to the last page will describe the ambiguity; an essay organized by the competing readings will analyze it.
  • Two elements worth pairing here: a motif carried across the whole book (sea, birds, sleep and waking) and the structure and point of view of the final chapter, where a narrator who has reported Edna's thoughts all novel stops short of reporting the last one. Row B's top point wants both explained inside one argument.
  • A sophistication path: this novel has a reception history worth two sentences; 1899 reviewers read the swim as the punishment the plot owed a wayward wife; later readers read it as the one act she could complete, and the same three pages support both. Showing that the tie is structural, not accidental, earns Row C. Announcing a winner, or ending on “the reader must decide,” does not.
Show a 6/6 sample response

Thesis The Awakening does not end; it stops. Chopin brings Edna to the water at Grand Isle, gives her a few sentences of childhood sound and smell, and never writes the word that would tell us what has happened. That withholding is not evasion. The novel has produced a woman for whom its society has no available future (not wife, not mother-woman, not artist, not mistress), and by refusing to supply an ending, Chopin makes the reader feel the absence of a category rather than merely hear about it.

Evidence The clearest formal signal is a repetition. Early in the novel, at Grand Isle, Chopin describes the voice of the sea as seductive and never ceasing, whispering and murmuring, inviting the soul to wander in abysses of solitude; in the final chapter she prints that description again, nearly unchanged. Commentary A novel of growth would not be able to do that. Reusing the sentence puts the last scene in a circle with chapter six and tells us that nothing Edna has learned in between has altered what the sea offers her. The repetition converts the ending from a climax into a return, and a return cannot resolve anything, which is precisely the point being made about her life.

Evidence The first swim works the same way. On the night Edna finally learns to swim she goes out alone, feeling a power she has never had, reaching for the unlimited; and then she turns, sees the distance back to shore, and is seized by a flash of terror. Commentary Chopin has put both of the novel's possible endings inside one paragraph, two hundred pages early: the reach outward and the fear of not returning. When the last chapter repeats the swim and simply removes the shore from the arithmetic, it is not introducing an ambiguity. It is declining to cancel one that has been there since the beginning.

Second element The bird imagery holds the same two verdicts against each other, and it does so on a single page. Evidence Mademoiselle Reisz has told Edna that a bird meaning to soar above tradition and prejudice must have strong wings, and that it is a sad spectacle to watch the weak ones bruised and fluttering back to earth. On the beach in the last chapter a bird with a broken wing beats the air above the water and reels down to it. Commentary Read forward from Reisz, that bird is a judgment: Edna was one of the weak ones, and the novel is watching her fall. But within the same few sentences Edna takes off the unpleasant, pricking garments and stands naked in the open air, and Chopin calls her a new-born creature opening its eyes in a familiar world it has never known. That is not the language of failure. Two images, one page, opposite verdicts, and no narrator to arbitrate between them.

Evidence Even Edna's own thinking is given in the negative. She remembers Adèle's whispered charge to think of the children, and what she formulates is not a wish but a refusal: the children are antagonists who would drag her into slavery, and they need not have thought that they could possess her, body and soul. Commentary The closest thing the book offers to a motive is a sentence about what she will not allow, which leaves the positive half of the question, what she is walking toward, exactly as blank as the last paragraph does.

Sophistication Both readings survive because Chopin removes the sentence that would decide between them. Her last paragraph reports sensations rather than an event: the barking of an old dog chained to a sycamore, her father's and her sister Margaret's voices, the clang of a cavalry officer's spurs, the hum of bees and the heavy scent of pinks. A narrator who has stayed inside Edna's mind for thirty-nine chapters stops there, before the only fact a reader wants. Reviewers in 1899 took the swim as the punishment the plot owed a wayward wife; later readers have taken it as the single act she was allowed to finish. The novel's own construction makes that disagreement permanent, and that is its argument. A world that offers a woman no ending she can live in does not get to be handed one at the close of her story.

Where the points are earned
  • Row A: Thesis (1): The opening paragraph claims that the withheld ending enacts the novel's subject, a woman for whom the society has no available category, rather than merely noting that the ending is ambiguous. It is an interpretation of the whole book and is open to dispute.
  • Row B: Evidence and Commentary (4): Specific, located evidence supports every stage of the reasoning: the sea description printed in chapter six and again in the last chapter, the first solitary swim and its flash of terror, Mademoiselle Reisz's warning about strong wings, the broken-winged bird, the new-born creature, Adèle's charge and Edna's refusal to be possessed, and the closing catalogue of sensations. Commentary follows each and explains its function: why a repeated sentence blocks the shape of a growth novel, why the first swim contains both endings, why a motive stated in the negative leaves the question open. Two elements are explained in one argument: the repeated sea and bird imagery, and the structure and point of view of a narration that stops short of its own last fact.
  • Row C: Sophistication (1): The final paragraph names both readings, supplies the evidence each rests on, points to the reception history that has sustained the disagreement since 1899, and shows that the tie is built into the novel's construction rather than left there by accident. It declines to break the tie, which is the reading the essay has been defending all along.

Unit recap

Unit recap

0:00 / 0:00

Animated recap with on-screen narration. Turn on Voice to have it read aloud (uses your device's built-in voice). Pressing play counts as your one free video.

Free preview complete

That's the end of the free preview.

You've opened five lessons (or watched a unit video), which is as much as we can show without a subscription. Everything you've already opened stays available; use the outline on the left to go back to it.

Book a tutor instead